becker county waste transfer facility detroit lakes, mn project manual … county...

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY DETROIT LAKES, MN 203 N.W. 1st Ave., Ste. B 1800 Pioneer Creek Center Faribault, MN 55021 Maple Plain, MN 55359

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY DETROIT LAKES, MN

PROJECT MANUAL and BID PACKAGE

JUNE 2015

TITLE PAGE 00001-1

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER DETROIT LAKES, MN

DOCUMENT 00004 TABLE OF CONTENTS

00001 COVER PAGE 00002 PROJECT DATA SHEET 00003 CERTIFICATION PAGE 00004 TABLE OF CONTENTS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS, AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT 00030 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 00100 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

00300 PROPOSAL FORM 00301 AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION

00303 LIST OF SUB CONCONTRACTORS 00400 CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS INSURANCE

00500 AGREEMENT FORMS (A.I.A Document A101, 2007) 00600 BOND FORMS/BID BOND 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS (A.I.A. Document A201, 2007) 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Note: AIA Documents and forms are not included within this project manual but are available

for review at the Architect's offices. DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01040 PROJECT COORDINATION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING 01095 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 01155 ON-SITE HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS 01300 SUBMITTALS 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01560 PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01630 SUBSTITUTIONS

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00004-1

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER DETROIT LAKES, MN DIVISION 2 SITEWORK 02110 SITE PREPARATION 02140 DEWATERING 02207 CONTROLLED FILL 02209 STRUCTURAL FILL 02211 SITE GRADING 02223 EXCAVATION 02225 TRENCHING, BACKFILLIING, AND COMPACTING 02271 RIPRAP 02276 MODULAR CONCRET RETAINING WALLS 02277 EROSION CONTROL 02510 WATER SUPPLY WELL 02540 SEPTIC SYSTEMS 02600 GRAVEL BASE AND BITUMINOUS SURFACING 02610 PIPING 02624 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE 02700 SCALE DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03200 STEEL BAR AND WELDED WIRE FABRIC REINFORCEMENT 03300 CAST IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 4 MASONRY (NOT USED) DIVISION 5 METALS 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTIC 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07200 INSULATION 07900 JOINT SEALERS


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER DETROIT LAKES, MN DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08100 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08300 ROLLING GRILLES –OPEN DESIGN 08331 OVERHEAD COILING FIRE DOORS 08360 SECTIONAL DOORS 08500 METAL WINDOWS 08700 FINISH HARDWARE 08950 TRANSLUCENT WALL PANELS DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09900 PAINTING 09970 FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC, (FRP) PANELS DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT (NOT USED) DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS (NOT USED) DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13120 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS (NOT USED) DIVISON 15 MECHANICAL 15020 MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15060 PIPES, PIPE FITTINGS, VALVES AND UNIONS 15065 PROCESS PIPING AND VALVES 15140 SUPPORT AND ANCHORS 15170 MOTORS 15185 ELECTRICAL 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 15196 FACILITY LIQUIFIED PETROLEUM GAS PIPING 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER DETROIT LAKES, MN DIVISON 15 MECHANICAL (CONTINUED) 15400 PLUMBING 15410 PLUMING PIPING 15430 MECHANICAL PUMBING SPECIALTIES 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450 PUMBING EQUIPMENT 15500 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 15530 FURNACES 15850 AIR HANDLING 15870 POWER VENTILATORS 15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15890 DUCTWORK 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 15930 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 15940 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 15950 HVAC CONTROLS 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 16100 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 16411 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 16500 LIGHTING 16680 FIRE PROTECTION LIST OF DRAWINGS SEE CONSTUCTION PLANS & DRAWINGS

END OF DOCUMENT 00004


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER DETROIT LAKES, MN

DOCUMENT 00002 PROJECT DATA SHEET

OWNERS: Becker County PROJECT SITE: Becker County Landfill PROJECT TITLE: Becker County Waste Transfer Facility ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: 14-053 ENGINEER’S PROJECT NUMBER 1423-0008 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Steve Skoog Becker County 835 Lake Ave. Detroit Lakes, MN 56502 218-846-7310 e-mail: [email protected] ARCHITECT: David J. Medin D.J. Medin Architects, Inc. 203 N.W. 1st Ave., Ste. B Faribault, MN 55021 507-334-2252 e-mail: [email protected] OWNER’S CIVIL ENGINEER: Tom Shustarich Wenck Associates 1800 Pioneer Creek Center Maple Plain, MN 55359-0249 763-479-4226 e-mail: [email protected] STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Henry Voth Larson Engineering of MN 3524 Labore Road White Bear, MN 55110 651-481-9120 e-mail: [email protected]

PROJECT DATA SHEET 00002-1

mailto:[email protected]





BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER DETROIT LAKES, MN OWNER'S MECHANICAL ENGINEER: Noel Kempfert Wenck Associates 1800 Pioneer Creek Center Maple Plain, MN 55359-0249 OWNER'S ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: Steve Pelletier Wenck Associates 1800 Pioneer Creek Center Maple Plain, MN 55359-0249 DATE OF ISSUE: June 10, 2015

END DOCUMENT 00002

PROJECT DATA SHEET 00002-2

SECTION 00030

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE TRANSFER STATION CONSTRUCTION

For BECKER COUNTY

DETROIT LAKES, MINNESOTA The project includes the construction of a municipal solid waste transfer facility for Becker County to be completed at the current Becker County Transfer Station and Landfill. The work includes the construction of the new approximately 16,000 square foot pre-engineered steel frame building attached to concrete footing transfer building structure, site work, grading, all access road construction, electrical, mechanical, and all other specified items specified for complete construction of transfer station. Sealed bids will be received by Mr. Steve Skoog, Environmental Services, 915 Lake Avenue, Detroit Lakes, Minnesota 56501, until 1:00 p.m., local time, Wednesday, July 8, 2015, when they will be opened for review. Bidding Documents may be examined at: Wenck Associates, Inc. OR Wenck Associates, Inc. 1800 Pioneer Creek Center 3310 Fiechtner Dr., Suite 110 Maple Plain, Minnesota 55359-0249 Fargo, Minnesota 58103-8730 Phone (763) 479-4200; Fax (763) 479-4242 Phone (701) 297-9600; Fax (701) 297-9601 Copies of the Project Documents may be obtained online on the home page “News and Announcements” section at www.co.becker.mn.us. Plan Holders are parties that have downloaded the plans and specifications. Plan Holders will be notified via the website as addenda are issued. It is the Plan Holders responsibility to check the website for any addendums issued and confirm that addenda were received on the Bid Form. Direct communications regarding this project to the Engineers Project Manager: Tom Shustarich, P.E. Wenck Associates, Inc. 1800 Pioneer Creek Center Maple Plain, Minnesota 55359-0249 Telephone (763) 479-4226; Fax (763) 479-4242 The successful Contractor shall furnish Bid Performance and Payment Bonds as well as Builders Risk Insurance in the full amount of the contract for this project. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days following the bid opening. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids, accept any quote, and enter into a contract with any Contractor supplying a bid, as it deems to be in its best interest.

***END OF SECTION***

00030-1 Advertisement for Bids T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 00_Front Ends\FRONT-END.doc Becker County Transfer Station

http://www.co.becker.mn.us/

6/9/201521210

Mechanical Documents Prepared by: Wenck Associates, Inc. - Noel Kempfert, PE

I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Registered Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota.

By: Registration Number: 19652 Date: 6/9/2015 Electrical Documents Prepared by: Wenck Associates, Inc. – Peter Christensen, PE

I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Registered Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota.

By: Registration Number: 52213 Date: 6/9/2015 Date of Issue DRAFT Review May 11, 2015


00003-2 Certification Page T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\Final May 8 2015 Bid Package\Div 00_Front Ends\00003 certification page.rtf Becker County Transfer Station

00030-1 Advertisement for Bids T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\Final May 8 2015 Bid Package\Div 00_Front Ends\FRONT-END.doc Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 00030

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE TRANSFER STATION CONSTRUCTION

For BECKER COUNTY

DETROIT LAKES, MINNESOTA The project includes the construction of a municipal solid waste transfer facility for Becker County to be completed at the current Becker County Transfer Station and Landfill. The work includes the construction of the new approximately 16,000 square foot pre-engineered steel frame building attached to concrete footing transfer building structure, site work, grading, all access road construction, electrical, mechanical, and all other specified items specified for complete construction of transfer station. Sealed bids will be received by Mr. Steve Skoog, Environmental Services, 915 Lake Avenue, Detroit Lakes, Minnesota 56501, until 1:00 p.m., local time, Wednesday, July 8, 2015, when they will be opened for review. Bidding Documents may be examined at: Wenck Associates, Inc. OR Wenck Associates, Inc. 1800 Pioneer Creek Center 3310 Fiechtner Dr., Suite 110 Maple Plain, Minnesota 55359-0249 Fargo, Minnesota 58103-8730 Phone (763) 479-4200; Fax (763) 479-4242 Phone (701) 297-9600; Fax (701) 297-9601 Copies of the Project Documents may be obtained online on the home page “News and Announcements” section at www.co.becker.mn.us. Plan Holders are parties that have downloaded the plans and specifications. Plan Holders will be notified via the website as addenda are issued. It is the Plan Holders responsibility to check the website for any addendums issued and confirm that addenda were received on the Bid Form. Direct communications regarding this project to the Engineers Project Manager: Tom Shustarich, P.E. Wenck Associates, Inc. 1800 Pioneer Creek Center Maple Plain, Minnesota 55359-0249 Telephone (763) 479-4226; Fax (763) 479-4242 The successful Contractor shall furnish Bid Performance and Payment Bonds as well as Builders Risk Insurance in the full amount of the contract for this project. No bid may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days following the bid opening. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all bids, accept any quote, and enter into a contract with any Contractor supplying a bid, as it deems to be in its best interest.


SECTION 00100

INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS 1.01 DOCUMENTS A. The “Project Documents” include the Construction Specifications, Drawings, and Addenda. 1.02 DELIVERY OF BIDS Sealed bids for the recycling facility will be received by Mr. Steve Skoog, Environmental

Services, 9135 Lake Avenue, Detroit Lakes, Minnesota 56501, until 1:00 p.m. Wednesday, July 8, 2015, and will be opened immediately thereafter and reviewed.

1.03 INTERPRETATIONS OF PROJECT DOCUMENTS A. Notify the Engineer of omissions, discrepancies, or ambiguities in the Project Documents.

Submit requests for interpretation or correction in writing, to be received by the Engineer not later than five (5) business days before the bid opening date.

B. “Addenda” are documents issued prior to the receipt of bids which modify, clarify, or

interpret the Project Documents. Addenda become part of the Contract Documents when the Agreement between Owner and Contractor is executed. Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection whenever bidding documents are on file for that purpose. Bidders required to monitor Becker County website for any Addenda issued. Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid.

C. Interpretation or correction of the Project Documents will be issued by Addenda.

Interpretations or corrections given by other methods will not be binding and Contractors shall not rely on such information. Addenda will be mailed, delivered personally or by facsimile to each person or firm on record as having received Project Documents.

1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Prior approval of substitutions for specified materials, equipment, and systems shall be

obtained from the Engineer. Submit requests for approval of substitutions in writing, to be received not later than five (5) Owner business days before the bid opening date. Approved substitutions will be listed by Addendum.

B. Refer to General Requirement Specifications Section 01630 for additional information

concerning substitutions. 1.05 FORM OF PROPOSAL All proposals must be submitted on the form provided and included with these specifications. Each bid proposal must be submitted in a sealed envelope clearly marked as follows: Mr. Steve Skoog, Environmental Services 915 Lake Avenue Detroit Lakes, Minnesota 56501

00100-1 Instruction to Bidders T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 00_Front Ends\FRONT-END.doc Becker County Transfer Station

Proposal Form: Municipal Solid Transfer Facility. All entries shall be handwritten or typewritten ink, excepting signatures which shall be handwritten ink. Entries shall be without correction, erasure or interlineations. Each and every space on the proposal form must be filled in. Bids not conforming may be rejected as irregular. No oral, telephonic or telegraphic proposals or modifications will be considered. Obligation for delivery of proposals to the Becker County is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.06 BID SUBMITTAL

A. Submit the original Prime Contract Bid Form and any requested attachments in an envelope

marked “Municipal Solid Transfer Facility – Sealed Bid”. The Owner’s Name, the Engineer’s Project Number, the name and address of the Contractor, and the date and hour of the bid opening should be entered on the envelope. All bids must be mailed or personally delivered to the address on the Prime Contract Bid Form; telephone, oral or facsimile bids will not be accepted.

1.07 EVALUATION OF BIDS

A. Only bids which have been submitted substantially in accordance with these instructions will be considered by Owner. The acceptability of bids will be determined based upon the cost of doing the work and, at the sole discretion of Owner, the perceived ability of the Contractor and any proposed subcontractors to perform the work.

B. The Owner reserves the right, at its sole discretion, to reject any and all bids, accept any bid, waive any rights or remedies of the Owner with respect to these instructions of the bids submitted, or waive discrepancies between a bid and these instructions, as it deems to be in its best interest. Any waiver of the Owner with respect to the requirements of these instructions shall apply only to the particular instance for which it was made or given, and no such waiver shall constitute a permanent or future waiver of such requirements.

C. Prime contract bids that do not identify mechanical and electrical subcontractors and such

other subcontractors as the bid proposal form may require to be identified may be rejected. D. Any Prime Contractor may be required, as a condition to award of the contract, to furnish

evidence that the Contractor has sufficient experience to ensure completion of the Work in a satisfactory manner, and has successfully completed projects similar in scope and type to the Project for which the Prime Contractor has submitted a bid.

E. Final award will be based on the proposal that serves the long-term best interests of the

Becker County.

1.08 SITE INSPECTION

A. All prospective Prime Contractors and subcontractors are encouraged to inspect the site before submitting a bid. Appointment for such inspection can be made by calling Steve Skoog (218) 846-7310. There will not be a Pre-bid meeting.

B. The Responder shall base the response on materials complying with the plans and specifications. The responder will be required to make its own estimates of the actual quantities involved and to calculate its price accordingly. Qualified and/or alternate responses will not be considered.


1.09 EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT

A. The successful Prime Contractor, upon notification by the Owner of the Owner’s intent to award a Contract shall execute and deliver a Contractor’s Agreement, Bid Bond Performance Bond, Payment Bond, and evidence of all required insurance as described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.

B. Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form of a Bid Bond written on AIA Document A310. The Bidder pledges to enter into a contract with the OWNER on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the OWNER.

1.10 The Contractor shall obtain Builders Risk Insurance for the full value of the Contract. 1.11 This is a Prevailing Wage Rate project in accordance with the Minnesota Department of Labor

and Industry. Contractor shall follow all applicable requirements including Chapter 177 and Sections 177.41 through 177.435.

1.12 Workers compensation in accordance with MN. Statute 176.181, subd. 3 and 176.182 shall be included for this project.

1.13 Contractor shall complete this job in accordance with MN. Law 2014, chapter 294, Article 2, Section 22 American made steel.


Bid Proposal Form

SECTION 00300

BID PROPOSAL FORM Municipal Solid Waste Transfer Station Construction at the Becker County Transfer Station and Landfill Mr. Steve Skoog, Environmental Services P.O. Box 787 913 Lake Avenue Detroit Lakes Minnesota 56502-0787 Gentlemen: In accordance with the "Advertisement for Bids", inviting proposals for the construction of a municipal solid waste transfer facility and appurtenant work as described by and in conformance with the plans and specifications, the undersigned hereby certifies that an examination has been made of the plans and specifications and the site of the work and hereby proposes to furnish all necessary labor, fabrication, equipment, materials, machinery, and all other accessories and means in the time and manner specified. Bid for Transfer Station: $ The undersigned agrees that, upon acceptance of a bid, he will, within five days of such notice, execute the necessary contract forms for this project and that he will provide the bonds or guarantees as required. The undersigned agrees he will commence and complete the work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications as soon as practical. The undersigned agrees to furnish and pay for all labor materials, equipment and appliances required by the aforementioned documents for the Bid sum and warranty this work for a minimum period of twelve (12) months after the date of substantial completion of the work. Accompanying this Proposal is a properly executed copy of the Affidavit of Non-Collusion and List of Subcontractors. In submitting a bid, it is understood that the right is reserved by the Owner to reject any and all bids, and it is agreed that a bid may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty days from the opening.

00300-1 Bid Proposal Form T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 00_Front Ends\FRONT-END.docBecker County Transfer Station

If a corporation, what is the state of incorporation? If a partnership, state full name of all co-partners: Name of individual, partnership or corporation: Official Address: Name of Authorized Official: Title of Authorized Official: Telephone Number(s): Authorized Signature: Percentage markup for Overhead and Profit for change orders % _________________________________ ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA: I hereby acknowledge that I have received and am fully aware of the following addenda: (initial each) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

***END OF SECTION

00300-2 Bid Proposal Form T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 00_Front Ends\FRONT-END.docBecker County Transfer Station

SECTION 00301

AFFIDAVIT OF NON-COLLUSION Municipal Solid Waste Transfer Facility Construction at the Becker County Landfill

I hereby swear (or affirm) under the penalty of perjury:

(1) That I am the Contractor (if the Contractor is an individual), a partner in the bid (if the Contractor is a partnership), or an officer or employee of the corporation submitting the bid having authority to sign on its behalf (if the Contractor is a corporation);

(2) That the attached bid or bids have been arrived at independently, and have been submitted without collusion with, and without any agreement, understanding or planned common course of action with, any other vendor of materials, supplies, equipment or services described in the Advertisement for Bid, designed to limit competition;

(3) That the concerns of the bid or bids have not been communicated by the Contractor or its employees or agents to any person not an employee or agent of the Contractor, and will not be communicated to any such person prior to the official opening of the bid or bids;

(4) That I have fully informed myself regarding the accuracy of the statements made in this affidavit. Signed: First Name: Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 20 . Notary Public My commission expires , 20 .

00301-1 Affidavit of Non-Collusion T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 00_Front Ends\FRONT-END.docBecker County Transfer Station

SECTION 00302

LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS All Contractors submitting a bid are required to list the Subcontractors related to their branch of the work. Failure to list Subcontractors may be considered cause for rejection of a bid. After the Agreement(s) have been let, Subcontractors other than those listed hereunder cannot be substituted unless authorized by the Owner after a written request has been submitted. 1) PORTION OF WORK:

Amount of Subcontract:

(Name)

(Street) (City) (Zip Code) 2) PORTION OF WORK:


(Name) (Street) (City) (Zip Code)

3) PORTION OF WORK:



4) PORTION OF WORK:

Amount of Subcontractor:


5) PORTION OF WORK:



00302-1 List of Subcontractors

T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 00_Front Ends\FRONT-END.docBecker County Transfer Station

6) PORTION OF WORK:


(Name)

(Street) (City) (Zip Code) 7) PORTION OF WORK:



8) PORTION OF WORK:



9) PORTION OF WORK:



10) PORTION OF WORK:




00302-2 List of Subcontractors T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 00_Front Ends\FRONT-END.docBecker County Transfer Station

SECTION 00400 CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS INSURANCE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 CONTRACTOR AND SUBCONTRACTOR INSURANCE

A. The CONTRACTOR shall not commence work under the Agreement or otherwise under the Contract Documents, nor shall it allow any subcontractor to commence work until all insurance hereinafter required has been procured, a Certificate and endorsement evidencing its existence and compliance with the terms hereof and as otherwise set forth in the Contract Documents has been provided to the OWNER, and such insurance has been approved by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR and SUBCONTRACTOR shall furnish four copies of an insurance certificate(s) to the OWNER using the standard Accord form (current Date), modified as set forth herein, as evidence of the required insurance. The certificate(s) shall indicate unconditionally that the insurance company will provide to OWNER, in the same manner and to the same degree as to CONTRACTOR and SUBCONTRACTOR, notice in the event of cancellation, non-renewal or any material modification or change in the policies and/or coverages thereunder. The certificate shall state, and CONTRACTOR shall furnish endorsements demonstrating that OWER and ENGINEER are additional insureds under the General and Automobile Liability. The insurance certificate must be signed and dated by an authorized representative of the insurance company.

1.02 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to Supplementary Conditions Section 00800, Article 11 for specific insurance requirements.


00400 - 1 Contractors &Subcontractors Insurance T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 00_Front Ends\00400 Contractors Subcontractors Insurance.docx Becker County Transfer Station

03300-5 AGREEMENT FORM

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No.14-053

DOCUMENT 00500 AGREEMENT FORM

A.I.A. Document A101, "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor", 2007 Edition as published by the American Institute of Architects, Article 1 through 10, inclusive, are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents to same extent as if bound herein and as supplemented hereinafter. is not included within this Project Manual but is available for review at the Architect's office.

SECTION 00600

BOND FORMS 1. GENERAL

A. The Performance and Payment Bonds shall be executed on standard forms provided as an attachment to this section.

2. FORM OF PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS

A. Two originals of each Bond shall be submitted to the Owner.

B. The Bonds shall be issued by a Corporate Surety Company which is acceptable to the Owner, licensed to do business in the State of Minnesota, be rated by A.M. Best as A-minus or better, and listed in the current printing of the U.S. Treasury Department listing of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies.” The amount of each Bond shall be within the limit set by the Treasury Department as the net limit on any single risk for the surety. There shall be no affiliation between the Contractor and the Bonding Agent or Agency.

C. In the event of additions to the Contract, the Owner reserves the right to require evidence of

an increase in the penal sum of the Bonds. D. Deliver executed Bonds to the Owner with the signed Agreement, accompanied by a

certified and effectively dated copy of a Power of Attorney for the resident agent or attorney-in-fact signing the Bond for the Surety Company.

00600-1 Bond Forms T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 00_Front Ends\FRONT-END.docBecker County Transfer Station

Construction Performance Bond

Any singular reference to CONTRACTOR, SURETY, OWNER, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

CONTRACTOR (Name and Address) SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business) _________________________________ _______________________________

_________________________________ _______________________________

_________________________________ _______________________________

_________________________________ _______________________________

OWNER (Name and Address)

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

DATE: ____________________________, 20___

AMOUNT: _______________________________

(Written Amount)_______________________________________________________________

Description (Project Name and Location):

_______________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

BOND

DATE: ____________________________, 20___

AMOUNT: _______________________________

(Written Amount) ________________________________________________________________

Construction Performance Bond T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 00_Front Ends\FRONT-END.docBecker County Transfer Station

Contractor (Corporate Seal) Surety (Corporate Seal)

Company Name: Company Name:

By: By: (Signature) (Signature) Name:(Typewritten) Name:(Typewritten) ITS: ITS: (Title) (Title)

On this ____day of ___________, 20___, before me personally appeared____________________ and

_________________________, on behalf of the CONTRACTOR and SURETY named in this Performance

Bond above, respectively, and each of them, as their free act and deed, caused this Performance Bond to be

executed as of this date.

_______________________

Notary Public

ATTACH POWER OF ATTORNEY FROM SURETY TO THIS BOND

For Information Only (Name, Address and Telephone)

Agent or Broker: Owner’s Representative (Engineer)


1. Contractor and the Surety, jointly and

severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.

2. If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except to participate in conferences as provided in Subparagraph 3.1.

3. If there is no Owner Default, the Surety’s obligation under this Bond shall arise after: 3.1. The Owner has notified the Contractor

and the Surety at its address described in Paragraph 10 below, that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default and has requested and attempted to arrange a conference with the Contractor and the Surety to be held not later than fifteen days after receipt of such notice to discuss methods of performing the Construction Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; and

3.2. The Owner has declared a Contractor Default and formally terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the contract. Such Contractor Default shall not be declared earlier than twenty days after the Contractor and the Surety have received notice as provided in Subparagraph 3.1: and

3.3. The Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract in accordance with the terms of the contract with the Owner.

4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take one of the following actions:

4.1. Arrange for the Contractor, with consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; or

4.2. Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or through independent contractors: or

4.3. Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and the contractor selected with the Owner’s concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the

Construction Contract, and pay to the

Owner the amount of damages as described in Paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner resulting from the Contractor’s default: or

4.4. Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: 1. After investigation, determine the

amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, tender payment therefore to the Owner; or

2. Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner citing reasons therefore.

5. If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the payment tendered or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part,


without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner.

6. After the Owner has terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the Construction Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the Construction Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for: 6.1. The responsibilities of the contractor for

correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;

6.2. Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Paragraph 4; and

6.3. Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor.

7. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, or successors.

8. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

9. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of

competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

10. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page.

11. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

12. Definitions. 12.1. Balance of the Contract Price: The total

amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract.

12.2. Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified in the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.

12.3. Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms of


the Construction Contract.

12.4. Owner Default: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof.


Construction Payment Bond

Any singular reference to CONTRACTOR, SURETY, OWNER, or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.

CONTRACTOR (Name and Address) SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business) _________________________________ _______________________________

_________________________________ _______________________________

_________________________________ _______________________________

_________________________________ _______________________________

OWNER (Name and Address)

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

_________________________________

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT

DATE: ____________________________, 20___

AMOUNT: _______________________________

(Written Amount)_______________________________________________________________

Description (Project Name and Location):

_______________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

BOND

DATE: ____________________________, 20___

AMOUNT: _______________________________

(Written Amount) ________________________________________________________________

Construction Payment Bond T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 00_Front Ends\FRONT-END.doc Becker County Transfer Station

Contractor (Corporate Seal) Surety (Corporate Seal)

Company Name: Company Name:

By: By: (Signature) (Signature) Name:(Typewritten) Name:(Typewritten) ITS: ITS: (Title) (Title)

On this ____day of ___________, 20___, before me personally appeared____________________ and

_________________________, on behalf of the CONTRACTOR and SURETY named in this Performance

Bond above, respectively, and each of them, as their free act and deed, caused this Performance Bond to be

executed as of this date.

_______________________

Notary Public

ATTACH POWER OF ATTORNEY FROM SURETY TO THIS BOND

For Information Only (Name, Address and Telephone)

Agent or Broker: Owner’s Representative (Engineer)


1. The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and

severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.

2. With respect to the Owner, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor: 2.1. Promptly makes payment, directly or

indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and

2.2. Defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from all claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity who furnished labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, provided the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands, liens or suits and tendered defense of such claims, demands liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety, and provided there is no Owner Default.

3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all sums due.

4. The Surety shall have no obligation to Claimants under this Bond until: 4.1. Claimants who are employed by or have

direct contract with the Contractor have given notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and send a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim.

4.2. Claimants who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor: 1. Have furnished written notice to the

Contractor and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, within 90 days after having last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the claim stating, with substantial accuracy, the amount of the claim and the name of the party to

whom the materials were furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed: and

2. Have either received a rejection in whole or in part from the Contractor, or not received within 30 days of furnishing the above notice any communication from the Contractor by which the Contractor has indicated the claim will be paid directly or indirectly; and

3. Not having been paid within the above 30 days, have send a written notice to the Surety (at the address described in Paragraph 12) and sent a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner, stating that a claim is being made under this Bond and enclosing a copy of the previous written notice furnished to the Contractor.

5. If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given

by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety, that is sufficient compliance.

6. When the Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety’s expense take the following actions: 6.1. Send an answer to the Claimant, with a

copy to the Owner within 45 days after receipt of the claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed.

6.2. Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.

7. The Surety’s total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety.

8. Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the construction Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any Construction Performance Bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the contractor and the Surety under this Bond,


subject to the Owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion of the work.

9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligations to make payments to, give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have obligations to Claimants under this Bond.

10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.

11. No suite or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located or after the expiration of one year from the date (1) on which the Claimant gave the notice required by Subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2 (iii), or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.

12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the signature page. Actual receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the Contractor, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received at the address shown on the signature page.

13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said

statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. The intent is, that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.

14. Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.

15. DEFINITIONS 15.1. Claimant: An individual or entity

having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Contract. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms “labor, materials or equipment” that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished.

15.2. Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor identified on the signature page, including all Contract Documents and changes thereto.

15.3 Owner Defaults: Failure of the Owner, which has neither been remedied nor waived, to pay the Contractor as required by the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other terms thereof.


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No.14-053

DOCUMENT 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT

A.I.A. Document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", 2007 Edition as published by the American Institute of Architects, Article 1 through 15, inclusive, are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents to same extent as if bound herein and as supplemented hereinafter. is not included within this Project Manual but is available for review at the Architect's office.

00700-1 GENERAL CONDITIONS


Project No. 14-053

DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," AlA Document A201, 2007 Edition, which is available at the Architect's office for review. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.

ARTICLE 1: GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 Basic Definitions

1.1.3 The Work

Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.3:

"Furnish", "Erect", "Deliver", "Install", and "Provide", are intended to be synonymous, and indicate that the material or work mentioned is to be furnished, installed, or erected to completion by this Contractor.

Add the following to Subparagraphs 1.1.8,:

1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker

As used in the Contract Documents shall mean Becker County.

1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents

1.2.1 Add the following to Subparagraph 1.2.1:

In the case of an inconsistency between Drawings and Specifications or within either Document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of Work shall be provided in accordance with the Architect's interpretation.

ARTICLE 2: OWNER

No Change.

ARTICLE 3: CONTRACTOR

3.4 Labor and Materials

Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.4, 3.4.5, 3.4.6, 3.4.7, 3.4.8, & 3.4.9 to 3.4:

3.4.4 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and Architect will consider a formal

request for substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions

00800-1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS


Project No. 14-053

set forth in the General Requirements (Division 1 of the Specifications).

3.4.5 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.3 above, the

Contractor:

.1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified;

.2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified;

.3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's analysis and redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and

.4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.

3.4.6 Whenever an article or material is defined by describing a proprietary product, or by using the name of a manufacturer, the term "or approved equal" if not inserted, shall be implied. The specific article or material mentioned shall be understood as establishing minimum standards as to the type, function, standard of design, durability, efficiency and quality desired and shall not be construed so as to exclude other manufacturers' products of comparable quality, design, and efficiency.

3.4.7 Makes and models of items which the Contractor alleges to be equal to the makes and

models to items named in the specification, shall be subject to the written approval of the Architect. All approved substitutions shall be in writing and approved by the Architect. The Contractor shall not be relieved from the responsibility of furnishing articles or materials equal in quality, design and efficiency to those specified because of the approval of such alternate items by the Architect.

3.4.8 All Contractors and Subcontractors shall conform to the labor laws of the state in which

the work is done, and all other laws, ordinances, and legal requirements affecting the work.

ARTICLE 4: ARCHITECT

No Change.

ARTICLE 5: SUBCONTRACTORS

5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work

Add the following Clauses 5.2.1.2 to 5.2.1:



Project No. 14-053

5.2.1.1 The Owner shall maintain the list of subcontractors and major material suppliers and issue a general approval of the same after official award of the contract, subject to the specific requirements of the Plans, Specifications, the "General Conditions of the Contract", and these Supplementary Conditions, and elsewhere with contract documents, as applicable. Deviations from the list of subcontractors and material suppliers shall be made only with the specific approval of, or at the request of, the Owner.

ARTICLE 6: CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

No Change.

ARTICLE 7: CHANGES IN THE WORK

No Change.

ARTICLE 8. TIME

No Change.

ARTICLE 9. PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.3.1 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 9.3.1:

The form of Application for Payment shall be a notarized AlA Document G702, Application and Certification for Payment, supported by AlA Document G703, Continuation Sheet.

Add the following Clause 9.3.1.3 to 9.3.1:

9.3.1.3 Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay 95% of the amount due the Contractor

on account of progress payments.

9.8.5 Add the following sentence:

The payment shall be made within thirty days of the date of the Contractor's submittal of the above requirements and shall be sufficient to increase the total payments to 100% of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Owner and the Architect shall determine for all incomplete work and unsettled claims. A. TIME OF COMPLETION

1. Anticipated start date is August 31, 2015. 2. Project shall be substantially complete no later than May 30, 2016. 3. Final completion of the work will be on or before June 10, 2016.

B. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

1. The contractor will be assessed liquidated damages in the amount of $500 per day.



Project No. 14-053

ARTICLE 10: PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

Add the following:

10.1 To minimize impacts of traffic on landfill operations the County has observed a 1Omph speed limit on its access road to the site. The contractor agrees to observe, promote, and enforce among his employees, subcontractors and other parties to his contract this same practice. The County, to assist in promoting this provision, may set up signs and/or portable speed monitoring equipment to give feedback to users of the access road; however, failure by the County to provide signs or driver feedback signage shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to enforce this limit. The County may also enforce this provision by openly, surreptitiously or electronically observing drive behavior. The Contractor agrees to pay an administrative fine to the County the amount of $100 for each incident of violation for any party associated with the contract. Unpaid fines shall be deducted from the Contract amount.

10.1.1 The Contractor shall maintain free and clear access for other parties requiring access to

and/or through the site, including other contractors and individuals requiring access to adjacent land. The Contractor shall protect the access road from damage due to his activities. Any damage to the roadway surface, associated fencing, drainage facilities, or adjacent vegetation shall be immediately reported to the Engineer. The Contractor shall stabilize and correct any damage caused by his activities as directed by the Engineer.

ARTICLE 11: INSURANCE AND BONDS

11.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance

Add the following Clauses 11.1.1.9 and 11.1.1.10 to 11.1.1:

11.1.1.9 Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a

comprehensive basis including:

1. Premises Operations (including X, C, & U as applicable) 2. Independent Contractor's Protective 3. Products and Completed Operations 4. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion deleted 5. Contractual - including specified provision for Contractor's obligation under

Paragraph 3.18. 6. Owned, non-owned, and hired motor vehicles. 7. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations 8. Umbrella Excess Liability

11.1.1.10 If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General Liability Policy on a claims-made basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting period shall be no earlier than the termination date of coverages required to be maintained after final payment, certified in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.2


SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-5


Add the following Clause 11.1.2.1 to 11.1.2

11.1.2.1 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than the following limits, or greater if required by law:

1. Worker's Compensation :

Project No. 14-053

(a) State: Minnesota: (b) Applicable Federal : (c) Employer's Liability :

$ 500,000.00 $ 500,000 .00 $ 500,000.00

Statutory Statutory

Each Accident Disease Policy Limit Disease, Each Employee

2. Comprehensive or Commercial General Liability (including Premises - Operations; Independent Contractor's Protective; Products and Completed Operations ; Broad Form Property Damage) :

(a) Bodily Injury:

$2,000,000 .00 $2,000,000.00

(b) Property Damage:

Each Occurrence Aggregate

$2,000,000.00 Each Occurrence $2,000,000.00 Minimum 'U' coverage

$2,000,000.00 Aggregate

(c) Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for one year after final payment. $2,000,000 .00 Aggregate

(d) Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X (explosion), C (collapse), and U (underground) coverage as applicable.

(e) Broad Form Property Damage Coverage shall include Completed Operations .

3. Contractual Liability:

(a) Bodily Injury: $2,000,000.00 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 .00 Aggregate

(b) Property Damage:

$2,000,000.00 Each Occurrence

$2,000,000.00Aggregate


Project No. 14-053

4. Personal Injury, with Employment Exclusion deleted:

$2,000,000.00 Aggregate

5. Business Automobile Liability (including owned, non-owned, and hired vehicles):

(a) Bodily Injury & Property Damage Combined Single Limit:

$2,000,000.00 Each Occurrence

NOTE: The State of Minnesota has a no-fault automobile insurance requirement. The Contractor shall be certain that coverage is provided which conforms to any specific stipulation in the law.

6. If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial Liability policy,

the:

(a) General Aggregate shall be not less than $2,000,000 .00 and it shall apply, in total, to this project only .

(b) Fire Damage Limit shall be not less than $100,000.00 on any one fire.

(c) Medical Expense Limit shall be not less than $10,000.00 on any one

person.

7. Umbrella Excess Liability:

$2,000,000.00over primary insurance.

$ 10,000.00 retention for self-insured hazards, each occurrence.

11.1.3 Add the following sentence to Subparagraph 11.1.3:

If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the Certificate shall be ACORD Form 25S, accompanied by a completed A. I.A. Document G715, Instruction Sheet and Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance.

ARTICLE 12: UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

No Change.



Project No. 14-053

ARTICLE 13: MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

Add the following Paragraph 13.8 to Article 13:

13.8 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY

13.8.1 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows:

13.8.1.1 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex or national origin. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training , including apprenticeship . The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination.

13.8.1.2 The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or

advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, or national origin.

Add the following Paragraph 13.9 to Article 13:

13.9 AUDIT CLAUSE AND DATA PRACTICES ACT CLAUSE

13.9.1 Pursuant to Minnesota Stat. 16C.05, Subd. 5, the Contractor acknowledges and agrees

that the books, records, and accounting procedures and practices of the Contractor that are relevant to this Contract are subject to examination by the Owner and appropriate state authorities for a minimum of six years .

13.9.2 All the data created, collected, received, stored, used, maintained, or disseminated by

the Contractor in performing the Contract are subject to the requirements of Minnesota's "Data Practices Act", Minn. Stat. 13.05, Subd. 11 and the Contractor shall comply with those requirements as if it were a government entity.

ARTICLE 14: TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

No Change.

END OF DOCUMENT 00800


SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. The work under this Contract shall consist of site work, and construction of a municipal solid waste transfer station, hereinafter referred to as the Owner. The work shall be executed in accordance with the Specifications and Plan Drawings prepared by Wenck Associates, Inc., D.J. Medin Architects, Inc., and Larson Engineering of Minnesota, hereinafter referred to as the Engineer. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for all labor, equipment, and material required for a complete installation except as specifically identified otherwise in these specifications or on the Drawings. The project shall be constructed under one prime contract which is to include all work.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule the order of work as he deems necessary to complete the

work in an expeditious and orderly manner and to allow the OWNER to continue normal site operations. The work must be coordinated so each phase of construction shall immediately follow the preceding phase.

C. All bidders are encouraged to visit the site prior to submission of their bid. Contact the

OWNER at (218) 846-7310 to schedule a site visit. 1.02 CONTRACTS

A. Contract shall be a lump sum contract with the OWNER and shall be full compensation for labor, equipment, materials, and other items (not specifically mentioned) required to complete the work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.

1.03 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES

A. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed.

B. OWNER will occupy site and existing buildings during entire period of construction for

conduct of normal operations. Cooperate with OWNER during construction operations to minimize conflict and facilitate OWNER'S operations.

C. CONTRACTOR shall, at all times, conduct operations to ensure least inconvenience to

OWNER, and operation of existing waste transfer facilities.

D. Coordinate use of premises under direction of OWNER.

E. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of materials and equipment under this Contract.

01010-1 Summary of Work T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01010.docxBecker County Transfer Station

Division 1 General Requirements

SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

A. The work under this Contract shall consist of site work, and construction of a municipal solid waste transfer station, hereinafter referred to as the Owner. The work shall be executed in accordance with the Specifications and Plan Drawings prepared by Wenck Associates, Inc., D.J. Medin Architects, Inc., and Larson Engineering of Minnesota, hereinafter referred to as the Engineer. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for all labor, equipment, and material required for a complete installation except as specifically identified otherwise in these specifications or on the Drawings. The project shall be constructed under one prime contract which is to include all work.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall schedule the order of work as he deems necessary to complete the

work in an expeditious and orderly manner and to allow the OWNER to continue normal site operations. The work must be coordinated so each phase of construction shall immediately follow the preceding phase.

C. All bidders are encouraged to visit the site prior to submission of their bid. Contact the

OWNER at (218) 846-7310 to schedule a site visit. 1.02 CONTRACTS

A. Contract shall be a lump sum contract with the OWNER and shall be full compensation for labor, equipment, materials, and other items (not specifically mentioned) required to complete the work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications.

1.03 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES

A. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Portions of site beyond areas in which construction operations are indicated are not to be disturbed.

B. OWNER will occupy site and existing buildings during entire period of construction for

conduct of normal operations. Cooperate with OWNER during construction operations to minimize conflict and facilitate OWNER'S operations.

C. CONTRACTOR shall, at all times, conduct operations to ensure least inconvenience to

OWNER, and operation of existing waste transfer facilities.

D. Coordinate use of premises under direction of OWNER.

E. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of materials and equipment under this Contract.


1.04 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS

Subcontractors shall conform to all local, state and federal labor laws, and all other laws, ordinances and legal requirements affecting the Work. CONTRACTORS shall employ labor only in work suited to the level of their individual skill and experience, and all Work shall be performed in accordance with the trade standards by personnel skilled in their respective trades. Work shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications and Plan Drawings. Incompetent or careless workmanship will not be permitted by the CONTRACTOR and will not be accepted by the Owner. If, in the opinion of the CONTRACTOR, any Work is indicated or specified in such a manner as to make it impossible to produce work of adequate quality, or which may be considered improper for use and conditions, or should discrepancies appear between Drawings and/or Specifications, the CONTRACTOR shall obtain an interpretation from the Owner before proceeding with the Work. If the CONTRACTOR does not request such interpretation, no excuse will be considered thereafter for failure to carry out and guarantee Work in a satisfactory manner.

1.05 INSTALLATION, FITTING, APPLICATION AND OPERATING REQUIREMENTS

Work, materials, and equipment shall be complete in every respect, with all parts, connections, anchors, devices, backing, fittings, and other necessary items. Before buying, constructing, installing, fitting, applying or otherwise commencing the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER of any discrepancies, errors or questions which may exist in Drawings and/or Specifications which will affect proper operation or installation or application. Each manufacturer, CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor shall take all reasonable precautions to insure his material, devices, items, equipment or other products can be satisfactorily applied or installed to each other and he shall make necessary adjustments during preparation or shop drawings or in advance of field or shop work to accommodate other work to prevent unsatisfactory items, installations or applications. Equipment and devices shall be provided and installed to "fail safe" in all circumstances and it shall be the CONTRACTOR'S obligation to provide and install Work in such manner.

1.06 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

Should Specifications, instructions, interpretations, laws, ordinances or any public authority require any work to be tested or approved, the CONTRACTOR or particular Subcontractor performing the Work shall agree to such test and a reasonable date fixed for such inspection. If any Work should be covered up without approval or consent of approving authority, it must be uncovered for examination and replaced at CONTRACTOR'S expense. All testing shall be paid for by the CONTRACTOR.

1.07 APPROVAL OF SUBSTITUTE MATERIALS OR MANUFACTURERS

Unless specifically noted, materials, manufacturers or procedures herein specified by trade names are not intended to be the only materials which are acceptable for the execution of the Work, but are intended as a means of establishing quality or grade. Whenever an article or material is defined by describing a proprietary product or by using the name of a manufacturer, the term "or equal", if not inserted, shall be implied. Where the term "approved equal" or "or equal" is used, a request for approval of a substitute material or procedure must be made in writing and approved by the OWNER prior to bidding. Submit requests for approval of substitute materials or manufacturers at least ten calendar days prior to bid due date. Submittal shall include evidence of quality and procedure. Lists of approved substitutions shall be included in subsequent addenda.


1.08 PERMITS

This CONTRACTOR will be required to take out all necessary building permits immediately after Notice to Proceed. The CONTRACTOR shall procure permits and include the cost as part of the lump sum bid for the project.

1.09 TEMPORARY POWER

The CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary power required for the construction of the project.

1.10 TEMPORARY HEAT

The CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary heat required for the project during cold weather. The CONTRACTOR shall provide fuel, equipment, and shelters as required to sustain quality work.

1.11 TEMPORARY LIGHTING

The CONTRACTOR shall provide all temporary lighting required for safe prosecution of the work. All temporary lighting shall be arranged with the OWNER.

1.12 TEMPORARY OFFICES (FIELD OFFICE)

The CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary offices, if necessary. 1.13 WORKING HOURS AND NOISE CONTROL

All work on this project shall be limited between 7:00 am and 7:00 pm Monday through Saturday with the only exception being an emergency or with the written permission of the OWNER.

1.14 DUST AND BLOWING SAND CONTROL

During construction, the CONTRACTOR shall keep all excavated material from blowing around by keeping the piles covered with calcium chloride and enough water to keep the surface pinned down. If, in the opinion of the ENGINEER or OWNER, the CONTRACTOR is not diligently following the above controls, the OWNER shall do the same on an overtime basis and then deduct from any amount due the CONTRACTOR the cost of said control.

1.15 RIGHT OF ENTRY

Any person representing the ENGINEER and/or OWNER shall have the right of entry to inspect the work being performed by the CONTRACTOR. If the case warrants, the CONTRACTOR shall provide proper facilities for such access and inspection.


1.16 EXISTING UTILITIES

The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for field locating existing utilities and avoid any damage to them.

1.17 ACCESS

Any temporary grading required shall be by this CONTRACTOR at no additional compensation. The temporary construction will have to be restored to original contours at completion. The CONTRACTOR will be required to maintain his access as he requires, including snow removal, etc. Any damage to the existing access roadways used by the CONTRACTOR shall be restored to their original conditions. The CONTRACTOR shall maintain access to the site at all times.

1.18 SHOP DRAWINGS

The CONTRACTOR shall prepare and furnish or cause to be prepared and furnished to the OWNER for review and approval all shop drawings, product data and samples required of the sections of this specification for the work. All subcontractors, fabricators, suppliers, etc. shall submit their required shop drawings, product data and samples to the CONTRACTOR. Review of shop drawings and submissions by the OWNER shall not be construed:

1) as permitting any departure from the requirements of the Specifications and Plan Drawings; 2) as relieving the CONTRACTOR of responsibility for any error in detail dimensions or

otherwise that may exist; and 3) as approving departures from additional details or instructions previously furnished by the

OWNER. 1.19 STARTING AND COMPLETION DATES

The CONTRACTOR shall commence work on the project site only after receipt of Notice to Proceed. There is no requirement for any early start or specific start date. The CONTRACTOR shall start the work within five days after receipt of Notice to Proceed subject only to coordination with the OWNER.

1.20 PROJECT SCHEDULE

The CONTRACTOR shall provide adequate planning and arrange the work detailed in the Plans and Specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall meet a project schedule that is agreed upon by the OWNER prior to beginning construction.

To assure adequate planning and execution of the work for completion in a timely manner and to assist the OWNER in evaluating progress of the work, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and maintain a progress schedule. The schedule shall graphically show the order and interdependence of all activities necessary to complete the work and the sequence in which each activity is to be accomplished. Activities shown on the diagram shall include, but are not necessarily limited to:

1) Project mobilization; 2) Submittals and approvals of shop drawings and samples; 3) Procurement of critical materials; 4) Fabrication of special material, installation and testing; 5) Final cleanup;


6) Final inspection and testing; 7) All activities by the ENGINEER or OWNER affecting progress, required dates for

completion, or both, for all or part of the work; 8) All other specified requirements identified; and 9) All major work activities by trade.

If, in the opinion of the OWNER, the work actually in place falls behind that schedule, the CONTRACTOR shall take such action as necessary to improve his progress. In addition, the CONTRACTOR may be required to submit a revised schedule demonstrating his program and proposed plan to make up lag in scheduled progress and to insure completion of work within the contract time. Costs incurred by the OWNER in connection with expediting construction activity under this section shall be reimbursed to the OWNER by the CONTRACTOR. Progress Schedule preparation and implementation shall conform to requirements of the General Conditions.

1.21 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

Should the CONTRACTOR fail to complete the work on or before the Substantial Completion dates set or as agreed upon by subsequent Change Orders, a sum of Five Hundred Dollars and No Cents ($500.00) per calendar day shall be deducted from any monies due, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages, all in accordance with the General Conditions, and Supplemental General Conditions.

1.22 WORKMANSHIP AND CLEANUP

CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises clean at all times and shall remove all rubbish as often as directed by the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all finished work from damage or defacement from any subsequent operations by his employees or Subcontractors. Should any damage or defacement occur, CONTRACTOR shall promptly have said Work satisfactorily replaced, repaired or cleaned. Upon completion of the Project, the CONTRACTOR shall leave the premises acceptably clean and ready for use without further cleaning by the OWNER.

1.23 GUARANTEE

The CONTRACTOR for this work shall guarantee and maintain the stability of all his work and materials for a period of one year from the date of completion of the work. Defects of any kind appearing during the guarantee period must be made good by the CONTRACTOR, at his own expense, to the entire satisfaction of the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall also repair and replace any damage to finish, fixtures, equipment and furnishings due to defective work, etc. However, the provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as restricting CONTRACTOR'S liability for breach of contract by reason of nonconformance with the specification, defects or faulty workmanship. More restrictive or extensive guarantees may be specified in the technical specifications for certain portions of the work.

1.24 SITE SECURITY

CONTRACTOR shall provide for project site security. CONTRACTOR shall provide barriers, enclosures, and other site security measures to prevent theft, vandalism, unauthorized entry and accidents at the project site. In the event this is not possible, a security guard shall be posted to guard the property at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. The OWNER shall approve project site security.


1.25 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING

The CONTRACTOR and all of his subcontractors are required to attend a preconstruction meeting prior to the start of any work.

1.26 EXISTING FACILITY OPERATION

The existing Transfer Operations must remain operational throughout the construction of the Transfer Station. The CONTRACTOR is required, as part of his scope, to assure that his activities do not interfere with the normal activities of the existing facility operation.

1.27 DEMOLITION DISPOSAL

Disposal of demolition debris is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR on this project. Disposal costs shall be included as part of the lump sum bid for the project.

1.28 RECORD DOCUMENTS

The CONTRACTOR shall maintain on site, and furnish to the OWNER at project completion, one set of project documents with all actual revisions recorded in a legible fashion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used ***END OF SECTION***


SECTION 01040

PROJECT COORDINATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate material supply, material

delivery/unloading, construction, and inspection to assure efficient and orderly completion of the Work.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER, in writing, when coordination of

the OWNER’S or other CONTRACTOR’S activities are required. 1.02 PROJECT PERSONNEL A. The OWNER is the Becker County: 1. The Owner’s Representative: Mr. Steve Skoog

Environmental Services Director Becker County 835 Lake Avenue Detroit Lakes, MN 56502

B. The ENGINEER is: Tom Shustarich, PE Wenck Associates, Inc. 1800 Pioneer Creek Center Maple Plain, MN 55359-0249 Phone: (763) 479-4200 Fax: (763) 479-4242 Dave Medin D.J Medin Architects, Inc. 203 N.W. 1st Ave., Ste. B Faribault, MN 55021 507-334-2252

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable)


01040-1 Project Coordination Becker County Transfer Station T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01040-Coordination.doc

SECTION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for construction staking and documentation surveying by CONTRACTOR.

1.02 PRIMARY CONTROL MONUMENTS

A. Benchmark to be provided by OWNER to establish primary vertical control for Work.

B. Monuments or references to establish primary horizontal control to be provided by CONTRACTOR.

C. Preserve and maintain primary control monuments.

1.03 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK. 1.04 METHOD OF PAYMENT

A. Work specified in and performed under this section is included in the CONTRACTOR’s lump sum bid price and is borne entirely by the CONTRACTOR.

1.05 LINE AND GRADE

A. CONTRACTOR to provide primary line and grade.

1. Establish primary line and grade of: a. Service and access roads. b. Transfer Station. c. Surface water ponds. d. Ditching. e. Piping, access roads, etc. f. Other as requested by OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE for proper completion of

project. 2. Arrange operations to avoid interference with primary lines and grades. 3. Check accuracy of line and grade by visual inspection, checks between stakes, and

periodic checks (with surveying equipment) between primary control monuments and stakes.

4. Responsible for protection and preservation of stakes.

01050-1 Field Engineering T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01050.docx Becker County Transfer Station

B. CONTRACTOR to provide construction line and grade.

1. Responsible for correct transfer of construction lines and grades from primary line and grade points and for correct alignment and grade of completed Work based on lines and grades shown on Drawings.

2. Transfer line and grade for open-cut construction of piping from primary line and grade stakes to Work by grade boards, laser beam, or other approved methods.

3. Provide construction staking for: a. Slopes. b. Culverts. c. Stormwater pond and ditching. d. Invert elevations for piping and structures. e. Transfer station. f. Service and access roads. g. Other as requested by OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE.

1.06 LOT CORNERS AND SURVEY MONUMENTS

A. Protect lot corners and survey monuments throughout Project.

B. If such marked corners and monuments are damaged by CONTRACTOR, replace by Registered Land Surveyor at CONTRACTOR'S expense.

1.07 DOCUMENTATION SURVEY

A. Provide documentation survey for record drawing purposes and verification of layout. Documentation survey conducted on 50-foot by 50-foot grid designated by OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE in site area and at transfer station as requested by OWNER.

PART - 2 Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 Perform construction staking and documentation survey for record drawing preparation drawing

preparation. 3.02 Protect primary control monuments. 3.03 Provide copy of construction staking and documentation survey notes to OWNER'S

REPRESENTATIVE. ***END OF SECTION***

01050-2 Field Engineering T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01050.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 01095

DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Basic definitions are provided in the General Conditions. B. Additional technical definitions are provided in appropriate sections of these

Specifications. C. Abbreviations and acronyms are sometimes used in the Specifications to identify

reference standards. Implied words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.

D. When a standard is specified by reference, the CONTRACTOR shall comply

with requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when requirements are modified by the Contract Documents, or when applicable codes established more strict standards.

E. When published standards are referenced, the publication in effect on the date of

issue of Contract Documents shall apply, unless specified otherwise. F. Structures and Surface Features: For purpose of this section, shall mean existing

structures and surface features, including but not limited to buildings, pavements, curb and gutter, signs, posts, fences, trees, shrubs, and other landscaped features.

G. Salvaged Topsoil: Natural loam, sandy loam, silt loam, silty clay loam, or clay

loam humus-bearing soils available from overlying portions of areas to be excavated for construction.

H. Unsuitable Material (for controlled fill): Topsoil, peat, organic soils, and

materials containing slag, cinders, foundry sand, debris, and rubble or soil with less than required bearing capacity as determined by ENGINEER.

I. Utilities: Existing gas mains; water mains; electric lines; conduits, telephone,

and other communication lines; sewer pipe; cable television, other utilities, and appurtenances.

J. Influence Zone Under Foundations, Pavements, or Sidewalks: Area below

foundation or pavement and sidewalk base bounded by 1 horizontal to 2 vertical slope extending outward from 1 ft beyond outer edges of foundation, pavement, or sidewalk.

K. Influence Zone Around Piping or Electrical Ducts: Area below limits bounded

by line 12 in. above pipe or duct and by 1 horizontal to 2 vertical slope extending outward from that line 1 ft beyond outer edge of pipe or duct.

01095-1 Definitions & Standards Becker County Transfer Station T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01095-Definitions & Standards.doc

1.02 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OF ORGANIZATIONS The CONTRACTOR shall obtain copies of referenced standards, direct from the

publication source, when needed for proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract Documents.

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 44 North Capital Street, NW Washington, DC 20001 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 GRI Geosynthetic Research Institute 475 Kedron Avenue Folsom, PA 19033-1208 MN/DOT Minnesota Department of Transportation 395 John Ireland Blvd St. Paul, MN 55155-1899 MPCA Minnesota Pollution Control Agency

520 Lafayette Road North St. Paul, MN 55155-4194

1.03 OTHER DEFINITIONS A. Furnish: Supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking,

assembly, installation, and similar operations. B. Install: Operations at the Project Site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly,

erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

C. Provide or Provider: To furnish and install in-place, complete and ready for the

intended use. D. Installer: The CONTRACTOR or another entity engaged by the

CONTRACTOR, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.

The term experienced, when used with the term Installer, means having a

minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Project Site: Is the space available for performing construction activities, either

exclusively or in conjunction, with others performing work as part of the Project.


The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built.

F. Standard Specifications: Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard

Specifications for Construction" 2014 edition with revisions and supplements. G. OWNER, ENGINEER & OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: as discussed in

Section 01040. PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable)



SECTION 01155 ON-SITE HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Construction activities at landfills or at other waste disposal sites may place

CONTRACTOR'S personnel, personnel of other CONTRACTORS hired by OWNER to perform Work at the site, and public in potentially hazardous situations due to exposure to landfill refuse, leachate, and gases.

B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for implementation and enforcement of safe

Work practices, including, but not limited to personnel monitoring, personnel exposure to refuse, leachate and gases, use of trenching, sheeting, and shoring, scaffolding; materials handling and drilling; operation of equipment; and safety of public during progress of Work.

C. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all safety requirements for hazardous waste

operations as listed under OSHA 29 CFR 1910.120 specifically during gas vent drilling and waste disposal and at any other time during the project.

D. If CONTRACTOR encounters any hazardous or toxic materials or any barrels

which may contain hazardous or toxic materials while drilling through refuse, CONTRACTOR shall move from area, continue with other portions of the work, and notify the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall resume work in area where hazardous or toxic materials were encountered after notice to proceed is given by the OWNER, and using people with the appropriate health and safety training. OWNER may ask CONTRACTOR to temporarily stage such materials so that Work can proceed while the disposition of such materials is determined by the OWNER.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Agency Requirements 1. CONTRACTOR shall plan for and ensure personnel comply with basic

provisions of OSHA General Industry Safety and Health Standards (29 CFR 1910), Construction Industry Standards (29 CFR 1926), and HAZWOPER Standards (29 CFR 1920.120) as appropriate.

2. CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property.

1.03 OPERATIONS AND EQUIPMENT SAFETY A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising

safety precautions and programs in connection with Work. CONTRACTOR shall take necessary precautions for safety of employees on project site and other persons and organizations who may be affected by the project.

01155-1 Health & Safety Becker County Transfer Station T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01155-Health & Safety.doc

B. CONTRACTOR'S duties and responsibilities for safety in connection with Work shall continue until such time as all Work is completed and ENGINEER has issued notice to CONTRACTOR that Work is complete.

1.04 HEALTH AND SAFETY A. CONTRACTOR is responsible for implementation and enforcement of health and

safety requirements and shall take necessary precautions and provide protection for:

1. All personnel working on or visiting project site, irrespective of employer. 2. Work and materials or equipment to be incorporated in Work area whether

on- or off-site. 3. Other property at or adjacent to project site. 4. Public exposed to job-related operations or potential release of toxic or

hazardous materials. 5. CONTRACTORS may require that personnel on-site leave immediately if

they are not complying with Health and Safety requirements. B. CONTRACTOR shall prepare a Health and Safety Plan (HASP).

CONTRACTOR is solely responsible for the adequacy of the HASP's preparation, monitoring, management, and enforcement. At a minimum, CONTRACTOR'S HASP shall address the following:

1. Site descriptions and history. (OWNER will provide.) 2. Project activities and coordination with other CONTRACTORS. 3. On-site safety responsibilities. 4. Work zones. 5. Personnel training. 6. Atmospheric monitoring. 7. Personal protection, clothing, and equipment. 8. Emergency procedures. C. If OWNER contracts with others for Work on the site, CONTRACTOR shall

amend the HASP to include provisions for Work of others. CONTRACTOR shall also manage, enforce, and monitor the health and safety activities of other CONTRACTORS during duration of other CONTRACTORS' Work.

1.05 ENGINEER RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The ENGINEER is anticipated to be periodically present on the Project Site during construction activities. The ENGINEER will comply with CONTRACTOR’S safety plans, programs, and procedures.

B. If ENGINEER determines CONTRACTOR’S safety plans, programs, and

procedures do not provide adequate protection for ENGINEER, ENGINEER may direct its employees to leave Project Site or implement additional safeguards for ENGINEER protection. If taken, these actions will be in furtherance of ENGINEER responsibility to its employees only, and ENGINEER will not assume responsibility for protection of any other persons affected by Work.


C. If ENGINEER observes situations that appear to have potential for immediate and serious injury to persons, ENGINEER may warn persons who appear to be affected by such situations. Such warnings, if issued, shall be given based on general humanitarian concerns, and ENGINEER will not, by issuance of any such warning, assume any responsibility to issue future warnings or any general responsibility for protection of persons affected by Work.

D. The ENGINEER/OWNER has the authority to suspend work at anytime if public

safety is threatened. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit copies of HASP to OWNER and ENGINEER. 1. Submit HASP to OWNER and ENGINEER within 7 days after Notice to

Proceed. Work on-site shall not proceed until the HASP has been submitted to ENGINEER.

a. Submittal of CONTRACTOR'S Health and Safety Plan to ENGINEER is to inform ENGINEER and OWNER so they can comply with HASP during performance of their on-site responsibilities as described in Contract Documents.

b. Submittal of CONTRACTOR'S Health and Safety Plan shall neither impose on ENGINEER'S responsibility for adequacy of HASP nor relieve CONTRACTOR from full responsibility therefore.

B. Submit with HASP list of personnel to perform work on Site and documentation of

40-hour safety training of personnel required under OSHA 29 CFR 1910.120. 1. Personnel who supervise on-site work and have the potential to come in

contact with waste shall be safety trained as required under OSHA 29 CFR 1910.120.



SECTION 01200

PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for project meetings onsite. 1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. OWNER will schedule and conduct a preconstruction meeting to be held prior to

beginning Work. 1.03 WEEKLY PROGRESS MEETINGS

A. Weekly progress meetings to be held every work week on an agreed upon day by OWNER AND CONTRACTOR.

1.04 DAILY MEETINGS

A. Daily meetings may be held at OWNER’S discretion. PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 Notice of preconstruction meeting received by attendees a minimum of five (5) calendar

days prior to meeting date.

A. Attendees at the preconstruction meeting. 1. OWNER 2. CONTRACTOR’S superintendent and foreman.

B. Notice to include

1. Date 2. Time 3. Agenda

a. Safety programs. b. Review submittals. c. Review the responsibilities of each party. d. Address CONTRACTORS' questions.

e. Review lines of authority and communication. f. Review principal features of Work.

01200-1 Project Meetings T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01200 Project Meetings.doc Becker County Transfer Station

g. Review methods for documenting and reporting, and for distributing documents and reports.

h. Establish protocols for testing. i. Establish protocols for handling deficiencies, repairs, and retesting.

j. Review the time schedule for construction. k. Review progress schedules. l. Payrolls and labor relations. m. Environmental protection. n. Payment and procurement of materials. o. Establish soil stockpiling locations (if any).

C. Attendance: 1. CONTRACTOR'S superintendent. 2. Quality control supervisor. 3. Safety personnel. 4. Major subcontractors' job superintendents. 5. OWNER 6. Contractor's Health and Safety Manager D. Specifics of CONTRACTOR'S health, safety, and emergency plan shall be

discussed so emergency procedures and safety requirements are understood by those directly related to site Work.

3.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. OWNER shall schedule and administer progress meetings at a minimum of once

per week and such additional meetings as required, or as requested by OWNER. B. Attendance: 1. OWNER 2. CONTRACTOR'S superintendent 3. CONTRACTOR'S quality control supervisor 4. CONTRACTOR'S safety and emergency coordinator 5. Subcontractors as appropriate to agenda 6. Suppliers as appropriate to agenda C. General Meeting Requirements: 1. OWNER shall administer following general requirements for progress

meetings. a. Prepare agenda for meetings b. Make physical arrangements for meetings c. Preside at meetings d. Record significant proceedings and decisions of meeting


2. The CONTRACTOR will reproduce and distribute copies of meeting record

within three (3) days after each meeting to participants in meeting and to parties affected by decisions made at meeting. Furnish three (3) copies of minutes to OWNER, two (2) copies to OWNER'S site representative.

D. Typical Agenda: 1. Review and approval of record of previous meeting 2. Review of Work progress since previous meeting 3. Field observations, problems, and conflicts 4. Problems impeding Work schedule 5. Review of off-site delivery schedules 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule 7. Revisions to project schedule 8. Planned progress during Work period 9. Coordination of schedule 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required 11. Maintenance of quality and safety standards 12. Pending changes and substitutions 13. Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule and completion

date, and on other contracts of project 14. Other business



SECTION 01300

SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section contains requirements for submittals of construction progress

schedules, shop Drawings, test results, operation and maintenance data, construction photographs, and other submittals required by Contract Documents.

B. Health and Safety Plan (HASP) and Erosion Control Plan, in accordance with

Section 01560. C. Submittal for Review: 1. Submit required materials for OWNER'S review in accordance with

requirements of Contract Documents. D. Submittal for Record: 1. Submit required materials for inclusion into OWNER'S records. Submittal

materials may or may not be reviewed by ENGINEER or OWNER. 1.02 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Prepare and submit construction progress schedule in accordance with

requirements of General Conditions. B. No Work shall be done between 7:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m., nor on Sundays or legal

holidays without written permission of OWNER. However, emergency Work may be done without prior permission.

C. Prepare schedules in form of horizontal bar chart, and submit within 1 week of

notice to proceed or at the pre-construction meeting. 1. Provide separate horizontal bar for each operation. 2. Horizontal Time Scale: Identify first Work day of each week. 3. Scale and spacings to allow space for notations and future revisions. 4. Arrange listings in order of start of each item of Work. D. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Show dates for beginning and completion of each major element of

construction and installation dates for major items. Elements shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

a. Site preparation.

01300-1 Submittals T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01300 Submittals.doc Becker County Transfer Station

b. Shop Drawing receipt from supplier/manufacturer, submittal to ENGINEER, review and return to supplier/manufacturer.

c. Material and equipment order, manufacturer, delivery. d. Performance tests and supervisory services activity. e. Each Bid Item. f. Subcontractor's items of Work. g. Final cleanup h. Allowance for inclement weather. i. Miscellaneous items. 3. Show projected percentage of completion for each item as of first day of each

month. E. Schedule Revisions: 1. Every week to reflect changes in progress of Work, to be presented at weekly

progress meeting. 2. Indicate progress of each activity at date of submittal. 3. Show changes occurring since previous submittal of schedule. a. Major changes in scope. b. Activities modified since previous submittals. c. Revised projections of progress and completion. d. Other identifiable changes. 4. Provide narrative report as needed to define: a. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on schedule. b. Corrective action recommended and its effect. c. Effect of changes on schedule of other CONTRACTORS. 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES A. Submit shop Drawings and samples required in individual specification sections. B. CONTRACTOR'S responsibilities shall include: 1. Review shop Drawings and samples prior to submittal. 2. Determine and verify: a. Field measurements. b. Field construction criteria. c. Catalog numbers and similar data. d. Conformance with specifications 3. Coordinate each submittal with requirements of Work and of Contract

Documents. 4. Notify ENGINEER in writing, at time of submittal, of deviations in submittals

from requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Begin no fabrication or Work that requires submittals until return of

submittals with ENGINEER approval. 6. Designate in construction progress schedule, dates for submittal and receipt of

reviewed shop Drawings and samples.


C. Submittals shall contain: 1. Date of submittal and dates of previous submittals. 2. Project title and number. 3. Contract identification. 4. Names of: a. CONTRACTOR b. Supplier c. Manufacturer 5. Identification of product, with identification numbers, and Drawings and

specification section numbers. 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified. 7. Identify details required on Drawings and in specifications. 8. Show manufacturer and model number, give dimensions, and provide

clearances. 9. Relation to adjacent or critical features of Work or materials. 10. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers.

Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 11. Identification of revisions on resubmittals. 12. 8-inch by 3-inch blank space for CONTRACTOR stamp. 13. CONTRACTOR'S stamp, signed, certifying to review of submittal,

verification of products, field measurement, field construction criteria, and coordination of information within submittal with requirements of Work and Contract Documents.

D. Resubmittal requirements shall include: 1. Corrections or changes in submittals required by OWNER. Resubmittals are

required until approved. 2. Shop Drawings and product data: a. Revise initial Drawings or data and resubmit as specified for initial

submittal. b. Indicate changes which have been made other than those requested by

OWNER. 3. Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) DATA A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for OWNER'S

maintenance and operation of products furnished under Contract. Prepare O&M data as specified in this section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of specifications.

B. Manual Format: Prepare data in form of instruction manual for use by OWNER'S

personnel. 1. Size: 8½-inch by 11-inch or 11-inch by 17-inch folded, with standard three-

hole punching. 2. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 3. Drawings:


a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab; bind in with text. b. Fold larger Drawings to size of text pages and place in envelopes which

are to be bound into manual. Suitable identification shall be placed on outside of each envelope.

4. Preliminary Cover: Identify each submittal with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS."

a. List: 1) Title of project 2) Identity of CONTRACTOR 3) Identity of general subject matter covered in manual 4) Identity of section number as set forth in Contract Documents 5) Date of installation 5. Final Binders: a. Commercial quality binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers C. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation. c. Delete references to inapplicable information. 3. Provide table of contents. 4. Project installation schedule listing dates and locations of products installed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide complete copies of required submittals as follows: 1. Construction progress schedule: a. Two copies of initial schedule b. Two copies of each revision 2. Shop Drawings: Six (6) copies 3. Test results: Three (3) copies 4. Other required submittals: a. Six (6) copies if required for review b. Three (3) copies if required for record B. Deliver required copies of submittals to OWNER.



SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Submit to OWNER Schedule of Values allocated to various portions of Work as

required by the General Conditions. Schedule of values to cover all portions of the project work.

B. Upon request of OWNER, support values with data which will substantiate their

correctness. C. Schedule of Values shall be used only as basis for CONTRACTOR'S application

for progress payment. 1.02 FORM AND CONTENT A. For Various Portions of Work:

1. Each item shall include directly proportional amount of CONTRACTOR'S overhead and profit.

2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down value into:

a. Cost of materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid. b. Total installed value including CONTRACTOR'S overhead and profit. ***END OF SECTION***

01370-1 Schedule of Values Becker County Transfer Station

T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01370 Schedule of Values.docx

SECTION 01410

TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED

A. CONTRACTOR will employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified in place testing as described in respective sections of specifications.

1. CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with laboratory to facilitate execution of its

required services. 2. Employment of laboratory shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR'S

obligation to perform Work of Contract. B. CONTRACTOR shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing

laboratory to perform specified material SOURCE TESTING as described in respective sections.

1.02 LABORATORY DUTIES A. CONTRACTOR shall contract testing lab, approved by ENGINEER and

OWNER. B. Perform specified inspections, secure samples, and test materials. 1. Comply with specified standards. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with Contract Documents. C. Promptly notify ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR of observed irregularities or

deficiencies of Work, equipment, or material. D. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection: electronic copy each

to ENGINEER, OWNER, material supplier, and CONTRACTOR. Each report shall include:

1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions if test is performed in field. 7. Date of test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by ENGINEER.

01410-1 Testing Laboratory Services Becker County Transfer Station

T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01410-Testing Laboratory Services.doc

E. Perform additional tests as required by ENGINEER. 1.03 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge upon requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of Work. 3. Perform any duties of CONTRACTOR. 1.04 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to Work. B. Furnish OWNER copies of product test reports. C. Furnish Labor and Facilities: 1. To provide access to Work to be tested. 2. To obtain and handle samples at project site or at source of product to be

tested. 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. D. Notify laboratory and ENGINEER sufficiently in advance of operations to allow

for laboratory assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests. 1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse

OWNER for laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to CONTRACTOR'S negligence.

E. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests

required for CONTRACTOR'S convenience. F. Employ and pay for services of testing laboratory to perform additional

inspections, sampling, and testing required when initial tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents.


01410-2 Testing Laboratory Services Becker County Transfer Station

T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01410-Testing Laboratory Services.doc

SECTION 01560 PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes CONTRACTOR responsibility in protecting the environment. Maintain Work areas on-site and off-site free from environmental pollution in violation of federal, state, or local regulations.

1.02 METHOD OF PAYMENT

A. Work specified in and performed under this section is included in the CONTRACTOR’s lump sum bid price and is borne entirely by the CONTRACTOR.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. "Guidance for Erosion and Sedimentation Control Planning and Implementation," Manual EPA-72-015.

B. "Processes, Procedures, and Methods to Control Pollution Resulting from all Construction

Activity," Manual EPA 43019-73-007. 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. CONTRACTOR to obtain a State of Minnesota NPDES Construction Storm Water Permit in accordance with MPCA industrial stormwater regulations. Copy of Permit to be provided to OWNER.

1.05 PROTECTION OF WATERWAYS

A. Observed rules and regulations of State of Minnesota and agencies of U.S. government prohibiting pollution of any lake, stream, river or wetland by dumping or refuse, rubbish, dredge material, or debris therein.

B. Provide holding ponds or approved method which will divert flows, including storm flows and

flows created by construction activity, to prevent excessive silting or waterways or flooding damage to property.

C. Comply with procedures outlined in U.S. EPA manuals entitled, "Guidelines for Erosion and

Sedimentation Control Planning and Implementation," Manual EPA-72-015 and "Processes, Procedures, and Methods to Control Pollution Resulting from All Construction Activity," Manual EPA 43019-73-007.

1.06 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

A. Apply appropriate soil conservation measures to protect project area and adjacent lands. These measures may include, but not be limited to, mulching, rapid growth vegetation, fabric mat,

01560-1 Protection of Environment T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01560.docx Becker County Transfer Station

hay bales, berms, filter barriers, sediment traps, and basins.

B. Select method of erosion and sediment control for specific job site.

1. Adjust sediment control measures in field to meet conditions encountered.

C. Prepare and submit erosion control plan to OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. Plan shall include, but not be limited to:

1. Limits of disturbance. 2. Type(s) of stabilization to be used. 3. Existing and proposed culverts, storm drains, and outfalls. 4. Location of stabilized construction entrance. 5. Location of proposed sediment control measures. 6. Details of sediment traps and basins and other sediment control measures. 7. Sequence of construction as it relates to installation, phasing, and removal of sediment

control measures.

D. Provide erosion control measures, in-place, before commencing work on project site.

1. Maintain erosion control measure during course of construction. 2. Remove erosion control measures upon establishment of permanent, surface stabilization.

E. Complete temporary or permanent stabilization of surface of perimeter controls, dikes, swales,

ditches, and slopes, within seven (7) calendar days following initial soil disturbance. 1.07 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED AND OTHER WASTE MATERIALS.

A. Excess excavated soil material not required or suitable for backfill stockpiled at OWNER designated location. Other waste material shall be disposed of in accordance with the Minnesota Pollution Control Agency's Solid/Hazardous Waste Rules.

1. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for fuel or oil spills due to the construction

activities for this project. CONTRACTOR will remove all contaminated soils from the site and comply with STATE regulations at his cost.

2. In the event the CONTRACTOR, under this specification, uncovers materials which in the

opinion of the CONTRACTOR are suspected to be of hazardous nature, the CONTRACTOR will immediately notify the OWNER.

1.08 PROTECTION OF AIR QUALITY

A. Minimize air pollution by requiring use of properly operating combustion emission control devices on construction vehicles and equipment used by CONTRACTORS, and encouraging shutdown of motorized equipment not actually in use.

B. Trash burning not permitted on construction site.

C. If temporary heating devices are necessary for protection of Work, they shall not cause air

pollution.


1.09 NOISE CONTROL

A. Conduct operations to cause least annoyance to residents in vicinity of Work, and comply with applicable local ordinances.

B. Equip compressors, hoists, and other apparatus with mechanical devices necessary to minimize

noise and dust. Equip compressors with silencers on intake lines.

C. Equip gasoline or oil-operated equipment with silencers or mufflers on intake and exhaust lines.

D. Line storage bins and hoppers with material that will deaden sounds.

E. Conduct operation of dumping rock and of carrying rock away in trucks so as to cause

minimum of noise and dust. 1.10 DUST CONTROL

A. Due to close geographic location of Project to other off-site facilities take special care in providing and maintaining temporary roadways, OWNER'S existing roads, haul roads, and public roads used for construction operations in clean, dust-free conditions during construction operations.

B. Comply with local environmental regulations for dust control and direction of OWNER. If

CONTRACTOR'S dust control measures are considered inadequate, OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE will require CONTRACTOR to take dust control measures.



SECTION 01600

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Material and Equipment Incorporated into Work: 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified or as specifically

approved. B. Manufactured and Fabricated Materials and Equipment:

1. Design, fabricate, and assemble in accordance with engineering and shop practices standard with industry.

2. Material and equipment shall be suitable for service conditions.

C. Do not use material or equipment for purpose other than for which it is designed or specified.

1.02 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Installation of materials shall comply with manufacturer’s instructions. Obtain and distribute printed copies of such instructions to parties involved in installation, including 2 copies to OWNER’S RESPRESENTATIVE.

1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at job site during installation until

completion of entire Project.

B. Handle, store, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and in conformance with Specifications.

1. If job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer’s

instructions, consult ENGINEER for further instructions. a. Do not proceed with Work without written instructions. PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION Not Used


01600-1 Material & Equipment Becker County Transfer Station T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01600-Material & Equipment.doc

SECTION 01630

SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes basic procedures for request for consideration of proposed substitutions during and after the bidding period

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit enclosed Substitution request form

1. Attachment 1: No later than 10 days Prior to Bid Opening 2. Attachment 2: After Contract Award

B. Procedures for Contractors request for consideration of substitute as an “Approved Equivalent”

1. To consider products of other manufacturers as “Approved Equivalent”

CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate the substitution is equal to or better than the specified item. Factors to be addressed are: i. Environment (ambient conditions, climate, etc.)

ii. Quality iii. Dependability iv. Durability v. Strength

vi. Performance vii. Operation Efficiency

viii. Maintenance ix. Warranty x. Overall Cost Effectiveness

2. Contractor shall submit only proposed items that duplicate the intended design or function that are currently in satisfactory use at other similar landfill sites. The CONTRACTOR may be asked to provide references to other sites where the proposed substitutions have been installed.

3. Basis of Acceptance: The CONTRACTOR’S provided data as stated in paragraph 1

above shall become the basis for accepting the proposed substitution. Substitutions shall not be accepted without the approval of the ENGINEER.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED


01630-1 Substitutions Becker County Transfer Station

T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 01_General Requirements\01630-Substitutions.doc

Attachment 1 to Section 01630 REQUEST FOR DETERMINATION OF APPROVED EQUIVALENT - PRIOR TO BID OPENING

Project: Substitution Request Number:

From:

To: Date:

Re: Wenck Project #:

Specification Title: Description:

Drawing #: Detail #:

Section: Page: Article/Paragraph:

Proposed Substitution:

Manufacturer: Address: Phone:

Trade Name: Model No.:

Installer: Address: Phone:

Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:

Point-by-point comparative data attached – REQUIRED BY SECTION 01630

Similar Installation:

Project: Engineer:

Address: Owner:

Date Installed:

Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: No Yes, explain

Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports



Attachment 1 to Section 01630 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (Page 2 of 2) Prior to Bid Opening

The Undersigned certifies:

• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.

• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay

progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution

which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be

complete in all respects. Submitted by:

Signature:

Firm:

Address:

Telephone:

Attachments:

ENGINEERS REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution approved – Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01300. Substitution rejected – Use specified materials. Substitution Request received too late – Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date:

Additional Comments: Contractor Subcontractor Supplier Manufacturer Engineer



Attachment 2 to Section 01630 REQUEST FOR DETERMINATION OF APPROVED EQUIVALENT - AFTER CONTRACT AWARD

Project: Substitution Request Number:

From:

To: Date:

Re: Wenck Project #:

Specification Title: Description:

Drawing #: Detail #:

Section: Page: Article/Paragraph:

Proposed Substitution:

Manufacturer: Address: Phone:

Trade Name: Model No.:

Installer: Address: Phone:

History: New Product 2-5 years old 5-10 years old More than 10 years old

Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:

Point-by-point comparative data attached – REQUIRED BY SECTION 01630

Reason for not providing specified item:

Similar Installation:

Project: Engineer:

Address: Owner:

Date Installed:

Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: No Yes, explain

Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: __ ($ ).

Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: No Yes days.

Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports



Attachment 2 to Section 01630 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (Page 2 of 2) - After Contract Award

The Undersigned certifies:

• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.

• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. • Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. • Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay

progress schedule. • Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution

which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. • Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. • Payment will be made for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing, and

construction costs caused by the substitution. • Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be

complete in all respects. Submitted by:

Signature:

Firm:

Address:

Telephone:

Attachments:

ENGINEERS REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution approved – Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01300. Substitution rejected – Use specified materials. Substitution Request received too late – Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date:

Additional Comments: Contractor Subcontractor Supplier Manufacturer Engineer



Division 2 Sitework

SECTION 02110 SITE PREPARATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for utility clearance, clearing and grubbing, salvaged topsoil, and miscellaneous surface features.


A. Work, including materials, specified and performed under this section is included in CONTRACTOR'S Lump Sum Contract Price as stated in the Contract Agreement and no further compensation will be made.


A. Section 02201 - SOIL MATERIALS

B. Section 02223 - EXCAVATION 1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Salvaged Topsoil - Natural loam, sandy loam, silt loam, silty clay loam, or clay loam humus-bearing soils available from overlying portions of areas to be excavated for construction.

B. Utilities - Existing gas mains; water mains; electric lines; conduits, telephone, and other

communication lines; sewer pipe; other utilities; and appurtenances.

C. Structures and Surface Features - Existing structures and surface features including, but not limited to: buildings, pavements, signs, posts, fences, trees, shrubs, landscaped surface features, and other miscellaneous items.

D. Clearing and grubbing includes the removal and disposal of brush, shrubs, windfalls, dead fall

on banks, logs, stumps, roots, fallen timber, and other surface vegetation or debris. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Locate all existing structures, surface features, and utilities prior to beginning work. Contractor shall notify Gopher State One to mark locations of utilities prior to beginning work.

02110 - 1 Site Preparation T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02110.docxBecker County Transfer Station

B. Provide protection and support during construction for existing utilities, structures, and surface

features adjacent to and within construction site.

C. Remove obstructions such as mounds of dirt, stone or debris located within working limits. Obstructions such as street signs, culverts, end walls, signs, and guard posts located within construction area may be removed if promptly replaced to original condition unless otherwise directed by Owner. Trailers and roll-of boxes will be moved by OWNER upon request by CONTRACTOR as to not hinder construction.

3.02 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Clearing and grubbing consists of cutting and disposing of trees, brush, windfalls, logs, and other vegetation, and removing and disposing of roots, stumps, stubs, grubs, logs, and other timber.

B. Do not remove or cut down trees unless located within limits of excavation.

C. Do not trim trees unless approved by Owner. Trim in accordance with generally accepted

horticultural practices when partial removal of roots necessitates trimming to save trees, and paint cut limbs greater than 1 inch in diameter with asphalt base tree paint.

D. Dispose of materials removed by clearing and grubbing on-site at Owner designated location.

No on-site or in-place burial of material. 3.03 SALVAGED TOPSOIL

A. Strip vegetation to bottom of root zone from topsoil salvage area.

B. Excavate and temporarily stockpile salvaged topsoil.

C. Remove topsoil to entire depth. Stockpile where indicated on drawings or designated by Owner.

D. Grade stockpile area for proper drainage.

E. Strip stockpile areas of vegetation to bottom of root zone prior to stockpiling.

F. Free of clay, stones, vegetation, and debris.

3.04 RESTORATION

A. Restore existing utilities, surface features, and structures to condition equal to or exceeding existing condition prior to construction.


02110 - 2 Site Preparation T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02110.docxBecker County Transfer Station

SECTION 02140 DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Groundwater levels will vary from area to area and season to season and dewatering may be required for installation of this project.

B. Dewatering shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Dewater construction areas to allow construction under dry conditions. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit to OWNER or OWNER'S representative seven (7) calendar days prior to initiating dewatering, the method and location of dewatering and means of disposal of dewatering water.


A. Section 02223 – Excavation

B. Section 02225 - Trenching, Back Filling, and Compacting

C. Section 02606 – Underground Storage Tank

D. Section 02610 - Piping 1.05 METHOD OF PAYMENT

A. A. Work, including materials, specified and performed under this section is included in CONTRACTOR'S Lump Sum Contract Price as stated in the Contract Agreement and no further compensation will be made.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to have pumps, hoses, and other equipment necessary for dewatering.

02140 - 1 Dewatering T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02140.docxBecker County Transfer Station

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 APPLICATION

A. Areas shall be dewatered as necessary so construction of manholes, pipes or structures are completed under dry conditions.

B. Discharge water from dewatering sites shall be discharged in such a manner as not to cause

erosion or damage to adjacent property. Any system must be approved by the ENGINEER prior to operation. Discharge water shall be free of sediment >10 microns in diameter.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall be fully responsible and liable for all damages which may result

from failure to adequately keep excavations dewatered. ***END OF SECTION***

02140 - 2 Dewatering T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02140.docxBecker County Transfer Station

SECTION 02207 CONTROLLED FILL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work under this section includes descriptions and requirements of the off-site soils required for construction and backfill with controlled fill soils as shown on Plan Drawings.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and place off-site material meeting the specification. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for borrow testing off-site soils prior to furnishing and placing on-site.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D422 - Standard Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils. 2. ASTM D1140- Standard Test Method for Amount of Material in Soils Finer

than the No. 200 (75 um) Sieve. 3. ASTM D1556- Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in-Place by the Sand

Cone Method. 4. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils

and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-lb (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12-in. (305 mm) Drop.

5. ASTM D1587- Standard Practice for Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils. 6. ASTM D2167- Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in-

Place by the Rubber Balloon Method. 7. ASTM D2216- Standard Test Method for Laboratory Determination of Water

(Moisture) Content of Soil, Rock, and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures. 8. ASTM D2487- Standard Test Method for Classification of Soils for Engineering

Purposes. 9. ASTM D2922- Standard Test methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate

in-Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow-Depth). 10. ASTM D3017-Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in-

Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 11. ASTM D4318- Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and

Plasticity Index of Soils. B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers/U.S. Department of Interior:

1. Permeability Test; U.S. Army Corp of Engineers (WES), 1970, "Laboratory

Testing Manual," Engineering Manual 1110-2-190C.

02207-1 Controlled Fill T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02207-Controlled Fill.DOC Becker County Transfer Station

1.03 SOIL MATERIAL SOURCE QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Three (3) of each of the following:

1. USCS soil classification. 2. Atterberg Limits

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROLLED FILL

A. Natural soils classified as CL, GM, SM or SC in the Unifies Soil Classification System, free of organic and other deleterious material.

B. Native excavated subsoil from designated borrow and excavation areas to be used for

embankments, backfill, and subgrade excavation replacement where applicable. C. Material free from roots, debris, and stones larger than six (6) inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine and verify acceptability of surface to receive installation of material.

B. Proof roll and examine surfaces to receive fill and subgrades within

influence zone to determine existence of soft areas, areas loosened by frost action or softened by flooding, groundwater or weather or existence of unsuitable materials.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Sample, test, and submit test results of off-site soils.

B. Prepare surfaces to receive materials to lines and grades shown on Drawings prior to placement.

3.03 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION

A. Notify CONTRACTOR before placing fill material.

B. Do not use frozen material or place fill on frozen subgrade.

C. Where pipes or electrical conduits leave structures, protect by backfilling pipe or duct

influence zone down to undisturbed soil with controlled fill.

D. Place fill simultaneously on both sides of free-standing structures.


E. Provide mechanical compaction for cohesive material and vibratory compaction for granular materials. When approved by CONTRACTOR, jetting, flooding, puddling, or vibroflotation methods may be used for compacting if CONTRACTOR furnishes test results to confirm required degree of compaction being obtained uniformly throughout entire mass.

F. Lift Thickness and Compaction: Place and compact fill material in maximum lift

thickness and to minimum densities listed below. Where “Quality Compaction Method” is listed, reference “Standard Specifications” Section 2105.3.F2.

Fill Placement

Maximum Compacted

Lift Thickness (inches)

Standard Proctor

(%) A Controlled Fill for Transfer Station

Backfill 8 95

B Controlled Fill for Berm Construction

6 98

C

Controlled Fill for Subcut

Replacement

6

95

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. In-place testing shall be performed by CONTRACTOR and all test results recorded and provided to OWNER. Any laboratory retesting due to test failure will be paid for by the CONTRACTOR.

B. Perform field density testing on controlled fill at a rate of one test for each 500 cubic

yards placed, minimum of one each lift. 3.05 TRANSPORTATION AND HAUL ROADS

A. Observe State, County, and Local traffic rules and weight restrictions.

B. All vehicle trips loaded or unloaded shall be on designated haul roads only.

C. CONTRACTOR to coordinate selection of haul roads with the appropriate governing body and acquire any necessary permits.



SECTION 02209 STRUCTURAL FILL PART 1 - GENERAL Structural fill for use as shown on Plan Drawings. 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work under this section includes descriptions and requirements of the imported soils required for construction with structural fill soils.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. ASTM D422 - Standard Method for Particle Size Analysis of Soils. 2. ASTM D1140- Standard Test Method for Amount of Material in Soils Finer

than the No. 200 (75 um) Sieve. 3. ASTM D1556- Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in

Place by the Sand-Cone Method. 4. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction

Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12 400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). 5. ASTM D1587- Standard Practice for Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils for

Geotechnical Purposes. 6. ASTM D2487- Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering

Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System). 7. ASTM D6938 Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of

Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth). 9. ASTM D4318- Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and

Plasticity Index of Soils.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Location of off-site source of materials.

B. Name, address, telephone number and contact person of independent soils laboratory.

C. Method of off-site source soils material sampling and analyses. D. Off site source material analyses. E. Proposed haul road plan for transportation of all off-site materials to the

Project site.

02209-1 Structural Fill t:\1423 becker co\0008\june 8 bid pkg\div 02_sitework\section 02209-structural fill_v2.doc Becker County Transfer Station

1.04 SOIL MATERIAL SOURCE QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Independent soils laboratory shall be approved by OWNER. B. Source testing to be performed by CONTRACTOR at no cost to the

OWNER. C. Provide the following test results for structural fill material test requirements:

Property Test Method Frequency Grain Size Analysis ASTM D422/D1140 3 test results/source USCS Soil Classification

ASTM D2487 3 test results/source

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL FILL

A. Well-graded sand, well-graded sand and gravel, crushed stone or other approved granular materials, of 2-inch maximum size and free from organic and deleterious material.

B. Plasticity Index: <6, ASTM 4318. C. Maximum fines: 15% clay or 20% silt-clay, ASTM 1140. D. Uniformity Coefficient: 10 or greater.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine and verify acceptability of surface to receive installation of material.

B. Proofroll and examine surfaces to receive fill and subgrades within influence zone to

determine existence of soft areas, areas loosened by frost action or softened by flooding, groundwater or weather or existence of unsuitable materials.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Sample, test, and submit test results of off-site soils. B. Prepare surfaces to receive materials to lines and grades shown on

Drawings prior to placement.



A. Notify OWNER before placing fill material. B. Do not use frozen material or place fill on frozen subgrade. C. Place fill simultaneously on both sides of free-standing structures. D. Provide mechanical compaction for cohesive material and vibratory compaction for

granular materials. When approved by OWNER, jetting, flooding, puddling, or vibroflotation methods may be used for compacting if CONTRACTOR furnishes test results to confirm required degree of compaction being obtained uniformly throughout entire mass.

E. Lift Thickness and Compaction: Place and compact fill material in 8-inch lift

thickness and to 100% Standard Proctor. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. CONTRACTOR shall perform field density testing on structural fill at a rate of one

test for each 50 cubic yards placed, minimum of one each lift. CONTRACTOR shall record all test results and provide to OWNER.

3.05 TRANSPORTATION AND HAUL ROADS

A. Observe State, County, and Local traffic rules and weight restrictions. B. All vehicle trips loaded or unloaded shall be on designated haul roads only. C. CONTRACTOR to coordinate selection of haul roads with the appropriate governing

body and acquire any necessary permits.



SECTION 02211 SITE GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work described in this section includes general site grading for roadway construction, and grading for general site drainage and transfer station.

1.02 REFERENCES


1. ASTM D1140-54 - Standard Test Method for Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No. 200 (75-um) Sieve.

2. ASTM D698-78 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-lb (2.49-kg) Rammer and 12-in. (305-mm) Drop.

3. ASTM D4318-84 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Unsuitable Material: Topsoil, peat, organic soils, and materials containing slag, cinders, foundry sand, debris, and rubble or soil with less than required bearing capacity as determined by OWNER.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. CONTRACTOR to submit source testing on materials for conformance with requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. 1.06 METHOD OF PAYMENT

A. Work, including materials, specified in and performed under this section is included in CONTRACTOR'S Lump Sum Contract Price as stated in the Contract Agreement and no further compensation will be made.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 NATIVE SOIL MATERIAL

A. Native soils classified as CL, SM, SC, SP, or SW in Unified Soil Classification System.

02211 - 1 Site Grading T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02211.docx Becker County Transfer Station


A. Examine and verify surfaces to receive fill to determine existence of areas loosened by frost action, softened by flooding or weather or of unsuitable materials.

3.02 FILL USAGE

A. Native Soil Fill: Under manholes and roadways to subbase elevations, coversoil, perimeter berm, and backfill construction with OWNER approval.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Fill settled areas where excavations or trenches were backfilled and holes made by demolition, tree removal, and site preparation work.

B. Native soils or compacted fill softened by frost, flooding or weather shall be removed and

replaced or compacted as required by OWNER.

C. Remove unsuitable material.

D. Proof roll areas to receive fill material to detect soft or loose zones prior to placing fill. Remove and replace soft or loose zones.

E. Keep construction site and stockpile areas free-draining.

F. Grading within influence zone of existing or future structures or piping ducts shall be in

accordance with Section 02225 - TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING.

G. Provide 3-foot structural fill below pavement and concrete slab for transfer station and truck staging area in accordance with Section 02225 - TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING.

3.04 PLACING FILL

Location

Maximum Compacted Lift

Thickness (in.)

Standard Proctor (%)

Controlled Fill or Structural Fill

6 unless

otherwise specified

97% foundation areas 100% pavement areas


A. Rough Grading Tolerances:

1. Road areas - subgrade at elevations determined from Drawings. 2. Degree of finish ordinarily obtainable from either blade-grader or scraper operations,

except as otherwise necessary for construction. 3. Maximum allowable variation in subgrade elevation shown on Drawings is 0.1 feet.


4. Rough-graded areas, including excavated and filled sections and adjacent transition areas - smooth, compacted, uniform, and free from irregular surface changes.

B. Testing performed by OWNER. Compaction tests should be performed at random locations

throughout all fill activities at vertical intervals not exceeding 1 foot to aid in determining the degree of compaction achieved.

3.06 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. Place material not suitable for backfilling or site grading and unsuitable materials in OWNER designated spoil areas and grade to drain.

B. Rough grade areas within grading lines and areas which are disturbed to achieve lines and

grades indicated on Drawings, with thickness allowances. ***END OF SECTION***


SECTION 02223 EXCAVATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. The work of this Section includes all excavation and sediment removal required for construction of the work. Such earthwork shall include, but not be limited to, the loosening, removing, loading, transporting, depositing, and compacting in its final location of all materials wet and dry, as required for the purposes of completing the work specified in the Contract Documents, which shall include, but not be limited to, the furnishing, placing, and removing of sheeting and bracing necessary to safely support the sides of all excavation; all pumping, ditching, draining, and other required measures for the removal or exclusion of water from the excavation; the supporting of structures above and below the ground; all backfilling around structures and all backfilling of trenches and pits; the disposal of excess excavated materials; borrow of materials to make up deficiencies for fills; and all other incidental earthwork, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Codes: Excavation as referenced herein shall conform to Minnesota Department of Transportation (MNDOT) Standard Specifications for construction, latest edition.

B. Section 02211 Site Grading.

1.03 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify survey benchmarks and intended elevations for Work as shown on Drawings. 1.04 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate with others performing work, at the Project Site.

B. Call to check location of utilities prior to beginning work. 1.05 METHOD OF PAYMENT

A. Work, including materials, specified and performed under this section is included in CONTRACTOR'S Lump Sum Contract and shall include excavating, loading, hauling, disposal cost, grading, compaction, field testing, and miscellaneous, as required to complete the project.

02223 - 1 Excavation T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02223.docx Becker County Transfer Station

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Identify required lines, grades, levels, contours, and datum.

B. Protect benchmarks, structures, equipment, and partially completed work.

C. Remove, soft areas of subgrade not capable of in situ compaction. Clay or unsuitable materials encountered in footing trench excavations shall be subcut to a minimum depth of 1-foot below footings and replaced with compacted backfill in accordance with Section 02211 - SITE GRADING.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate to elevation and dimensions necessary to complete construction.

B. Trenching Tolerances in accordance with Section 02225 - TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING.

3.03 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished Work until acceptance by OWNER. ***END OF SECTION***

02223 - 2 Excavation T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02223.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 02225 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work described in this section includes trenching, backfilling, and compacting for general site grading, roadway structures, piping, and tank installation.


A. Section 02223 – EXCAVATION

B. Section 02610 – PIPING

C. Section 02272 – GEOTEXTILES

D. Section 02201 - SOIL MATERIALS 1.03 REFERENCES


1. ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil Aggregate Mixtures Using 5.5-lb (2.49-kg) Rammer and 12-in. (305-mm) Drop.

2. ASTM D4253-83 - Standard Test Method for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a Vibrating Table.

3. ASTM D4318-84 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils.

4. ASTM D2487-85 - Standard Test Method for Classification of Soils for Engineering purposes.

5. ASTM D2922-81 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in-place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow-Depth).

6. ASTM D3017-88 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in-place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).

1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Influence Zone Around Piping Area below limits bounded by line 12 in. above pipe and by 1 horizontal to 2 vertical slope extending outward from that line 1 foot beyond outer edge of pipe or duct.

B. Unsuitable Material: Topsoil, peat, organic soils, and materials containing slag, cinders,

foundry sand, debris, and rubble or soil with less than required bearing capacity. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing performed and paid for by CONTRACTOR.

02225 - 1 Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02225.docx Becker County Transfer Station

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. CONTRACTOR shall submit source testing results of materials supplied to show conformance with Specifications.

B. Shoring, Bracing, and Sheet Piling Construction Procedures and Details: Submit procedures and material lists to be used in new construction.

C. Submit prior to beginning Project.

1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Coordinate berm construction, trenching, backfilling, and compacting within influence zone of existing or future structures.

B. Sheeting, Bracing, and Shoring:

1. When close sheeting required, drive to prevent soil from entering trench below or through

sheeting. 2. Fill voids remaining after sheeting pulled with sand or other approved material.

C. Check location of utilities prior to beginning work.


A. Work including materials specified in and performed under this section is included in CONTRACTOR'S lump sum price as stated in the Contract Agreement and no further compensation will be made.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE BEDDING

A. Coarse Aggregate: granular material, bank-run sand and bank-run gravel, consisting of rounded durable particles. Crushed aggregate not allowed.

1. Grain size: Range from maximum diameter of 1½ inches to minimum diameter of _ inch

(maximum 5 percent by weight passing #4 sieve). 2. Uniformity coefficient: less than 4.

2.02 STRUCTURAL FILL

A. Well-graded sand, well-graded sand and gravel, crushed stone or other approved granular material, of 2-inch maximum size, free from organic and deleterious materials.

B. Plasticity Index: With ASTM D4318, 6 or less. C. Less than 5% of the particles by weight passing a number 200 sieve.

D. Uniformity Coefficient: 10 or greater.



A. Examine and verify in writing acceptability of surface(s) to receive installation of materials. 3.02 PREPARATION

A. Notify corporations, companies, individuals or authorities owning above or below ground conduits, wires, pipes or other utilities running to property or encountered during excavating operations.

B. Cap or remove and relocate services in accordance with repairment by owners of services.

C. Protect, support, and maintain conduits, wires, pipes, and other remaining utilities in

accordance with requirements of owners of services.

D. Remove and replace or compact natural soils or compacted fills softened by frost, flooding or weather.

E. Remove unsuitable material from within trenches.

F. Stabilize trench bottom and replace unsuitable material with coarse aggregate.

G. Dewatering (if necessary):

1. OWNER approval required prior to constructing dewatering system(s). 2. Keep construction site free-draining. 3. Keep excavations free from water. 4. Maintain groundwater minimum of 12 inches below excavations. 5. Remove soil disturbed by pressure or flow of groundwater and replace with free draining

material. 6. Maintain dewatering systems to prevent uplifting of structures. 7. Protect adjacent properties from damage resulting from dewatering operations. 8. Dewatering wells shall be drilled, maintained, and abandoned in accordance with federal,

state, and local ordinances. 3.03 EXCAVATION

A. Excavate to elevations, dimensions, and in locations as shown on Drawings.

B. Trenching Tolerances:

1. Excavate to enable laying of pipe trenches straight at uniform grade, without sags or humps, between elevations shown on Drawings.

2. Maximum width of excavation as shown on Drawings. When stringers and sheathing required, width of trench may be increased to allow for their use.

C. Do not advance excavation of trenches beyond footage of pipe to be laid that day.

D. Do not excavate for manholes or other structures until scheduled for construction.

E. Upon completion of excavation, notify OWNER before proceeding with further Work.



A. Notify OWNER or OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE prior to placing fill material.

B. Do not use frozen material or place fill on frozen subgrade.

C. Install and compact bedding material in 6-inch maximum layers.

D. Initial backfill shall be installed and compacted to a minimum 6 inches above pipe crown.

E. Place fill simultaneously on both sides of free-standing structures.

F. Compaction

1. Mechanical compaction for cohesive material and vibratory compaction for granular materials. Do not use hydrohammer-type compaction unless prior approval by ENGINEER.


A. Testing for conformance performed by CONTRACTOR. ***END OF SECTION***


SECTION 02271

RIPRAP PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work described in the Section includes riprap for erosion protection at ends of

drainage culverts. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Location of source of riprap material. B. Test results. C. Submit in accordance with Section 01300. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing shall be provided by CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section 01410

and this section. 1. One gradation for each source and class of riprap. 2. One test on each source and class of riprap for soundness as required herein. B. Work shall be in accordance with conditions and practices as set forth in Section

2511 of “Standard Specifications.” PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Riprap shall be in accordance with Section 3602 of “Standard Specifications.” B. Geotextile in accordance with Section 02921. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 FILL USAGE A. Class II riprap 1. At ends of drainage culverts.

02271 - 1 Riprap T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02271-Riprap.doc Becker County Transfer Station

3.02 PREPARATION A. Areas on which bedding material and riprap are to be placed shall be graded and

dressed to lines and grades shown on Drawings or as required by ENGINEER. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Place riprap in areas as shown on Drawings and in accordance with ‘Standard

Specifications.”


02271 - 2 Riprap T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02271-Riprap.doc Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 02276 MODULAR CONCRETE RETAINING WALLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Work includes furnishing and installing concrete modular block retaining wall units to the lines and grades shown on the construction drawings and as specified herein.

B. Work includes preparing foundation soil, furnishing and installing leveling pad, unit fill and

backfill to the lines and grades shown on the construction drawings.

C. Work includes furnishing and installing geogrid reinforcement and backfill to the lines and grades designated on the constructed drawings.

1.02 RELATED SECTION

A. Section 02200 - EARTHWORK

B. Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.

B. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

C. ASTM C 331 - Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units.

D. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw Calcined Natural Pozzolan for

Use As a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.

E. ASTM C 989 - Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars

F. ASTM D 698 - Standard Method of Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3) 600kN-m/m3)).

G. ASTM D 1557 - Standard Specification for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soils

Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN-m/m3)). 1.04 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Geogrid: A structural element formed by a regular network of integrally connected tensile elements with apertures of sufficient size to allow interlocking with surrounding soil, rock, or earth and to function primarily as reinforcement.

B. Modular Unit: A concrete retaining wall element machine made from Portland cement, water,

and aggregates.

02276 - 1 Modular Concrete Retaining Walls T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02276.docx Becker County Transfer Station

C. Unit Fill: A drainage aggregate which is placed within and immediately behind the modular concrete units.

D. Reinforced Backfill: A compacted soil which is placed within the reinforced soil volume as

outlined on the plans. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data of proposed materials and method of installation.

C. Samples: Submit samples of each product used in the work of this section.

D. Certifications: Submit a manufacturer's certification, prior to start of work, that the retaining

wall system components meet the requirements of this specification.

1. CONTRACTOR'S submittal package shall include but not limited to actual test results for tension/creep, durability/aging, construction damage, geogrid/facing connection, pullout, and quality control.

2. CONTRACTOR shall submit certification, prior to start of work, that the retaining wall system (modular concrete units and specific geogrid): a. Has been successfully utilized on a minimum of five (5) similar projects, i.e., height,

soil, fill types, erection tolerances, etc.; and b. Has been successfully installed on a minimum of 1 million (1,000,000) square feet of

retaining walls.

E. Test Reports: Submit test reports documenting strength of specific modular concrete unit and geogrid reinforcement connection. The maximum design tensile load of the geogrid shall be equal to the laboratory tested ultimate strength of geogrid/facing unit connection at a maximum normal force limited by the "Hinge Height" of the structure divided by a safety factor of 1.5. The connection strength evaluation shall be performed in accordance with NCMA test method SRWU-1.

F. CONTRACTOR shall submit engineering plans prepared by a professional ENGINEER

experienced with Mechanically Stabilized Earth retaining wall systems and registered in the state of the project location. The engineering designs, techniques, and material evaluation shall be in accordance with the KEYSTONE Design Manual, 1994, NCMA Design Guidelines for Segmental Retaining Walls, 1993, or the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Brides, Section 5.8, 1993 Interim, whichever is applicable.

G. Submit a list of previous projects where the specific retaining wall system has been used

successfully. Contact names and telephone numbers shall be listed for each project. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. OWNER will engage and pay for independent soil testing services during earthwork operations.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. CONTRACTOR shall check the materials upon delivery to assure that proper materials have been received.


B. CONTRACTOR shall prevent excessive mud, wet cement, epoxy, and similar materials

(which may affix themselves) from coming in contact with the materials.

C. CONTRACTOR shall protect the materials from damage. Damaged materials shall not be incorporated into the retaining wall structure.

D. Geogrids shall be stored above -20 degrees F.

E. Rolled geogrid material may be laid flat or stood on end for storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Provide modular concrete retaining wall units and accessory materials fabricated by authorized licensed manufacturers of Keystone Retaining Wall Systems, 4444 West 78th Street, Minneapolis, MN 55435. Telephone 612-897-1040; 800-747-8971. Fax 612-897-3858 or approved equipment.

1. Substitutions provide they comply with the requirements will be considered under normal

substitution procedures. 2.02 MODULAR CONCRETE RETAINING WALL UNITS

A. Modular concrete units shall conform to the following architectural requirements:

1. Face color: Manufacturer's standard color. 2. Custom face color: Gray. 3. Face finish: Sculptured rock face in angular multiplaner configuration. Other face

finishes will not be allowed without written approval. 4. Bond configuration - running with bonds nominally located at midpoint vertically adjacent

units, in both straight and curved alignments. 5. Exposed surfaces of units shall be free of chips, cracks or other imperfections when

viewed from a distance of 10 feet under diffused lighting. 6. Corners: Provide 90 degree corners, finished two sides, where indicated. 7. Cap units: Provide solid cap units with parallel sides for straight walls and convex walls,

angular sides for concave walls.

B. Modular concrete units shall conform to the following applicable requirements:

1. Cement: Materials shall conform to the following applicable specifications. a. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150. b. Modified Portland Cement: Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, modified

as follows: 1) Limestone - calcium carbonate, with a minimum 85% content, may be added to

the cement, provided these requirements of C 150 as modified are met: a) Limitation on insoluble reside 1.5%. b) Limitation on air content of mortar by volume: 22% maximum. c) Limitations of loss of ignition: 7%.

c. Blended Cements: ASTM C 618. d. Pozzolans: ASTM C 618. e. Blast Furnace Slag Cement: ASTM C 989.


2. Aggregates: Conform to the following specifications: a. Normal Weight Aggregates - ASTM C 33. b. Lightweight Aggregates - ASTM C 331.

3. Other Constituents: Air entraining agents, coloring pigments, integral water repellents, finely ground silica, and other constituents shall be previously established as suitable for use in modular concrete retaining wall units and shall conform to applicable ASTM standards or, shall be shown by test or experience to be not detrimental to the durability of the modular concrete units or any material customarily used in retaining wall construction.

C. Modular concrete units shall conform to the following structural and geometric requirements:

1. Compressive strength: 3000 psi minimum. 2. Absorption: 8% maximum for standard weight aggregates. 3. Unit width to height ratio: 2.25 to 1. 4. Unit depth:

a. Standard units: 20 inches minimum. b. Compact units: 12 inches minimum.

5. Unit weight: a. Standard units: 90 lbs/unit minimum for standard weight aggregates. b. Compact units: 75 lbs/unit minimum for standard weight aggregates.

6. Inter-unit shear strength: a. Standard units: 1500 plf, minimum, at 2 psi normal pressure. b. Compact units: 400 plf, minimum, at 2 psi normal pressure.

7. Geogrid/unit peak connection strength: a. Standard units: 1000 plf, minimum at 2 psi normal force. b. Compact units: 600 plf minimum at 2 psi normal force.

8. Maximum horizontal between erected units: ½ inch.

D. Modular concrete units shall conform to the following constructibility requirements: 1. Vertical setback; 1-_" ± per course. 2. Alignment and grid positioning mechanism: Fiberglass pins, two per unit minimum.

2.03 SHEAR CONNECTIONS

A. Strength of shear connections between vertical adjacent units shall be applicable over a design temperature of 10 degrees F to + 100 degrees F. Shear connectors shall be ½ inch diameter thermoset isopthalic polyester resin-pultruded fiberglass reinforcement rods. Connectors shall have a minimum flexural strength of 128,000 psi and short berm shear of 6,400 psi.

B. Shear connectors shall be capable of holding the geogrid in the proper design position during

grid pre-tensioning and backfilling. 2.04 ADHESIVE

A. Construction adhesive as supplied by manufacturer of modular concrete units. 2.05 BASE LEVELING PAD MATERIAL

A. Material shall consist of a compacted crushed stone base or non-reinforced concrete as shown on the drawings.


2.06 UNIT FILL

A. Unit fill shall consist of clean crushed stone or crushed gravel meeting the gradation listed below:

Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 100 ¾ 75-100 No. 4 0 - 10 No. 50 0 - 5

B. Pea gravel is not acceptable.

2.07 REINFORCED BACKFILL

A. Reinforced backfill shall be free of debris and meet the following gradation requirements.:

Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 100 ¾ 75-100 No. 4 0 - 10 No. 50 0 - 5

B. The maximum aggregate size shall be limited to 3/4 inch unless field tests have been or will be

performed to evaluate potential strength reductions to the geogrid design due to damage during construction.

C. Material can be site excavated soils where the above requirements can be met. Unsuitable

soils for backfill (high plastic clays or organic soils) shall not be used in the backfill or in the reinforced soil mass.

D. CONTRACTOR shall submit reinforced fill sample and laboratory test results to the

Architect/ENGINEER for approval prior to the use of any proposed reinforced fill material. 2.08 GOEGRID

A. Material: Geogrid products shall be high-density polyethylene or polypropylene expanded sheet or polyester woven fiber materials, specifically fabricated for use as soil reinforcement.

B. Ta, Allowable Tensile Design Load, shall be determined as follows:

1. TA = Tcr/(FD*FC*FS) 2. TA shall be evaluated based on a 75-year design life.

C. Tcr, Creep Limited Tensile Load: Tcr shall be determined from 10,000 hour creep testing

performed in accordance with ASTM D5262.

D. FD, Factor for Durability/Aging: FD shall be determined from polymer specific durability testing covering the range of expected soil environments.

E. FC, Factor for Construction Damage: FC shall be determined from product specific

construction damage testing performed in accordance with GRI-GG4. Test results shall be provided for each product to be used with project specific or more severe soil type.


F. FS, Overall Factor of Safety: FS shall be 1.5 unless otherwise noted.

G. The maximum design tensile load of the geogrid shall not exceed the laboratory tested ultimate strength of the geogrid/facing unit connection as limited by the "Hinge Height" divided by a factor of safety of 1.5. The connection strength testing and computation procedures shall be in accordance with NCMA test methods.

H. Soil Interaction Coefficient, Ci: Ci values shall be determined per GRI:GG5 at a maximum

0.75 inch displacement.

I. Manufacturing Quality Control: The geogrid manufacturer shall have a manufacturing quality control program that includes QC testing for each 40,000 SF of production, each lot, or each production day. The QC testing shall include:

1. Tensile Modulus 2. Specific Gravity 3. Melt Flow Index (PP & HDPE) 4. Molecular Weight (PETP)


A. Verify that layout dimensions are correct and substrate is in proper condition for installation. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 EXCAVATION

A. CONTRACTOR shall excavate to the lines and grades shown on the construction drawings.

B. CONTRACTOR shall be careful not to disturb embankment and foundation materials beyond lines shown.

3.03 BASE LEVELING PAD

A. Leveling pad material shall be placed to the lines and grades shown on the construction drawings.

B. Soil leveling pad material shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% standard or 90% modified

Proctor.

C. Leveling pad shall be prepared to ensure full contact to the base surface of the concrete units. 3.04 MODULAR UNIT INSTALLATION

A. First course of units shall be placed on the leveling pad, and alignment and level checked. Pins or molded surfaces of modular concrete units shall be used for alignment control.

B. Ensure that all units are in full contact with base and properly seated.

C. Install fiberglass connecting pins and fill all voids in and around the modular units with unit

fill material. Tamp or rod unit fill to ensure that all voids are completely filled.


D. Sweep excess material from top of units and install the next course. Ensure that each course is completely unit filled, backfilled and compacted prior to proceeding to next course.

E. Place each subsequent course ensuring that pins protrude into adjoining courses a minimum of

1 inch. Two pins are required per unit. Pull each unit forward, away from the fill zone, locking against the pins in the previous course and backfill as the course is completed. Repeat procedure to the extent of wall height.

F. Follow wall erection and unit fill placement closely with any other backfilling required.

G. Position vertically adjacent modular concrete units as recommended by the manufacturer.

H. Maximum stacked vertical height of wall units, prior to wall drain fill and backfill placement

and compaction, shall not exceed two courses.

I. One cubic foot, minimum, of drain fill shall be used for each square foot of wall face. Drain fill shall be placed within cores of, between, and behind units to meet this requirement.

J. Whole, or cut, units on curves and corners too shall be erected with running bond

approximately centered on units above and below.

K. Cap Installation: Apply adhesive to top surface to unit below and place cap unit into position over projecting pins from units below.

3.05 STRUCTURAL GEOGRID INSTALLATION

A. Geogrid shall be oriented with the highest strength axis perpendicular to the wall alignment.

B. Geogrid reinforcement shall be placed at the elevations and to the extent shown on the construction drawings or as directed by ENGINEER.

C. The geogrid shall be laid over the fiberglass pins of the modular wall units and extended

horizontally on compacted backfill. Place the next course of modular concrete units over geogrid. The geogrid shall be pulled taut, and anchored prior to backfill placement on the geogrid.

D. Follow manufacturer's guidelines relative to overlap requirements of uniaxial and biaxial

geogrids.

E. Geogrid reinforcements shall be continuous throughout their embedment lengths. Spliced connections between shorter pieces of geogrid is not allowed unless pre-approved by the Architect/ENGINEER prior to construction.

3.06 REINFORCED BACKFILL PLACEMENT

A. Reinforced backfill shall be placed, spread, and compacted in such a manner that minimizes the development of slack in the geogrid.

B. Backfill shall be placed from the wall back towards the embankment to ensure that the geogrid

remains taut.

C. Reinforced backfill shall be placed and compacted in lifts not to exceed 8 inches where hand compaction is used, or 12 inches where heavy compaction equipment is used.


D. Reinforced backfill shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D698. The moisture content of the backfill material prior to and during compaction shall be uniformly distributed throughout each layer and shall be within 2 percentage points dry of optimum.

E. Place the top 8 inches of the structure fill using low permeability soil.

F. Only lightweight hand-operated equipment shall be allowed within 3 feet from the tail of the

modular concrete unit.

G. Tracked construction equipment shall not be operated directly upon the geogrid reinforcement. A minimum fill thickness of 6 inches is required prior to operation of tracked vehicles over the geogrid. Tracked vehicle turning should be kept to a minimum to prevent tracks from displacing the fill and damaging the geogrid.

H. Rubber-tired equipment may pass over geogrid reinforcement at slow speeds, less than 10

MPH. Sudden braking and sharp turning shall be avoided.

I. At the end of each day's operation, the CONTRACTOR shall slope the last lift of reinforced backfill away from the wall units to direct run-off away from wall face. The CONTRACTOR shall not allow surface run-off from adjacent areas to enter the wall construction site.

3.07 UNREINFORCED BACKFILL PLACEMENT

A. Place and compact backfill in lifts not to exceed 8 inches.

B. Backfill shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D698.

C. Place the top 8 inches of the structure fill using low permeability soil.

D. Only lightweight hand-operated equipment shall be allowed within 3 feet from the tail of the modular concrete units.

E. At the end of each day's operation, the CONTRACTOR shall slope the last lift of reinforced

backfill away from the wall units to direct run-off away from wall face. The CONTRACTOR shall not allow surface run-off from adjacent areas to enter the wall construction site.



SECTION 02277 EROSION CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Heavy duty silt fence and bale checks shall be installed for erosion control as shown on CONTRACTOR'S Erosion Control plans and NPDES SWPPP.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The heavy duty silt fencing shall conform to MN/DOT Specification Number 3886. 1.03 UNIT PRICE MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

A. Work, including materials, specified and performed under this section is included in CONTRACTOR'S Lump Sum Contract for erosion control as stated on the bid form.

PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.01 GENERAL

A. A heavy duty silt fence shall consist of a composite of woven wire fence fabric, posts, geotextile, and fasteners to be assembled by the CONTRACTOR.

B. Woven wire fence fabric shall be a standard field fence type minimum 30 inches high,

maximum mesh spacing of 6 inches and minimum 14½-gauge wire. 2.02 GEOTEXTILE PROPERTIES SHALL MEET OR EXCEED THE FOLLOWING:

A. Width - 36 inches Grab tensile strength ASTM D4632 -100 pounds Apparent opening size, AOS, ASTM D4751 - Range 20-70 Sieve U.V. Stability, after 500 Xenon Weatherometer Hours - Not less than 70%

2.03 GEOTEXTILE MATERIAL

A. The net backing shall consist of an industrial polypropylene mesh which is joined to the geotextile at both top and bottom with double stitching of heavy duty cord.

2.04 POSTS

A. Posts shall be metal or wood with a minimum length of 5 feet. Metal posts shall be "studded tee" or "U" type with a minimum weight of 1.3 lbs/linear feet. Wood posts shall have a minimum diameter of 3 inches. Staple fasteners for wood posts shall be at least 1½ inches long.

02277 - 1 Erosion Control T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02277.docx Becker County Transfer Station

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SILT FENCE INSTALLATION

A. Silt fence shall be trench in with a minimum of six inches of fabric buried.

B. Post shall be driven a minimum of 12 inches into the ground and in a straight and vertical position.

C. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintenance and repair of silt fence until final

acceptance of the project. 3.02 REMOVAL OF SILT FENCE

A. CONTRACTOR shall remove and dispense of silt fence around completion of project and the establishment of vegetation.


02277 - 2 Erosion Control T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02277.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 02510

WATER SUPPLY WELL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. It is the intent of these specifications to secure a water supply well capable of producing a minimum 10 gallons per minute (GPM) of potable sand free water with a reasonable drawdown. The well will supply water for drinking and for other use at the Transfer Station.

1.02 WORK TO BE ACCOMPLISHED

A. The work to be accomplished under these specifications consists of drilling and testing a water

supply well and installing a pump, pressure tank, controls and related piping. It includes developing, testing and disinfecting the well. The contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, tools and labor required to complete this work.

1.03 SUPPLIES

A. The Contractor shall make arrangements to ensure the availability of water, electricity and

other required supplies.

1.04 LOCATION A. The approximate location of the well is shown on the Plan Drawings. The exact location will

be staked by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the OWNER.

1.05 WORK SITE

A. The Owner shall provide land or right-of-way for work described in these specifications. The Contractor shall not enter on or occupy with men, tools, equipment or material any ground outside the property specified for use by the owner without written authorization of the owner for such ground.

B. The Contractor shall satisfy himself regarding all local conditions affecting his work by

personal investigation and no information contained in these specifications or derived from plans or maps, or obtained from the Owner or his agents or employees shall act to relieve the Contractor from any responsibility hereunder or from fulfilling any and all terms and requirements of the contract.

C. Agents of the owner may for necessary purposes enter upon the worksite and premises used by

the Contractor. The Contractor shall conduct his work in such a way that it will not unnecessarily impede any work being done by others on or adjacent to the site.

02510-1 Water Supply Well T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02510.docx Becker County Transfer Station

1.07 PROTECTION OF SITE AND CLEANUP

A. Excepting as otherwise provided herein, the Contractor shall protect all farm crops, trees, shrubberies, structures, pipelines etc., during the course of his work and shall remove from the site any unused or discarded materials, properly dispose of well cuttings and water from testing and shall, upon completion of the work, restore the site as nearly as possible to its original condition.

1.08 PERMITS, LICENSES, CODES AND REGULATIONS

A. The Contractor shall be a licensed water well driller in the state of Minnesota and shall, at his

own expense, procure all permits, certificates and licenses required of him by law for the execution of his work. He shall comply with all Federal, state or local laws, ordinances or rules and regulations relating to the performance of the work. All work shall conform to applicable sections of the "Water Well Construction Code" published by the Minnesota Department of Health, Environmental Health Division. •

1.09 DAILY REPORTS AND RECORDS

A. The Contractor shall maintain a daily log describing the nature of the material encountered

during drilling and the work done during each day, as well as such other pertinent data as requested by the Owner. The Contractor shall also keep an accurate record of all material and equipment installed in the well. The log shall be available to the Owner whenever the Contractor is on the work site.

1.10 FIELD SUPERVISION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide full cooperation and access to the work for the OWNER.

PART 2 - DRILLING OPERATIONS

2.01 BOREHOLE SPECIFICATIONS

A. The diameter of the borehole shall be sufficient to accommodate 4 inch ID casing. The well must be drilled in a neat and workmanlike manner and the borehole must deviate no more than 3 inches from the vertical in 100 feet.

2.02 LOGGING AND SAMPLING

A. The Contractor shall keep an accurate log of the geological formations encountered during

drilling operations. samples shall be taken at changes in lithology and at intervals not to exceed 5 feet. Each sample shall be visually and manually described and classified in accordance with appropriate ASTM standards. Representative portions of each sample shall be placed in an appropriate container, sealed and clearly marked as to location and depth. These samples shall remain the property of the owner. A portion of each sample shall be preserved, labeled and supplied to the Minnesota Geological Survey as required by the Water Well Construction Code.


PART 3 - WELL DESIGN

3.01 The contractor shall submit with his proposal, a proposed well design which will accomplish the

stated intent of, and meet the design constraints contained within these specifications. The actual construction of the well will depend on the conditions encountered and final design will require approval by the OWNER.

3.02 MATERIALS AND METHODS

The design, construction materials and construction methods shall conform to the appropriate sections of Minnesota Department of Health Water Well Construction Code. The design shall include provision for:

A. CASING - The casing shall be constructed of PVC with an internal diameter of 4 inches. B. PITLESS ADAPTOR - The pitless shall be buried sufficiently deep to be below maximum

frost depth. C. SCREEN - The screen shall be constructed of stainless steel. Slot size shall be sized to fit the

formation. Length shall be sufficient to allow meaningful testing of the aquifer's yield. D. PACKERS - Any packers used shall be of such material as will impart no undesirable quality

to the well water.

3.03 WELL DEVELOPMENT

A. The Contractor shall include 24 hours of well development in his proposal. Additional development time which may be required by the OWNER shall be compensated in accordance with the unit price stated in the contract. The well shall be developed until sand free water is produced. Five ppm or less of sand is considered acceptable.

3.04 DISINFECTION

A. After the well has been completely constructed, thoroughly cleaned of all foreign substances

and in accordance with Part4725.6500 of the Construction Code, State of Minnesota. B. It shall be disinfected Water Well

3.05 WELL TESTING

A. The contractor shall include a preliminary well test procedure in his proposal, this test design

may be modified for actual conditions encountered with the approval of the OWNER. After the well has been completely constructed and cleaned out, and the depth accurately measured, the Contractor shall, in consultation with the OWNER, make the necessary arrangements for conducting the pumping test.


C. The pumping test shall utilize a variable rate system and be designed to determine:

i. That the well has the capacity to produce acceptable quality water at a continuous rate of 10 GPM.

ii. The maximum feasible design capacity for a well in the aquifer.

3.06 WATER SAMPLES

A. Upon completion of testing, the Contractor shall collect one or more samples of water and submit them to the Minnesota Department of Health or a laboratory certified by the MDH for water quality analysis. The time collected, location, sample temperature, pH and rate of pumping shall be noted for each sample. The cost of collecting and analyzing the samples shall be included in the contractors proposal.

3.07 WELL PRODUCTION SYSTEM

A. The production system shall be designed to deliver a m1n1mum volume of 10 GPM and maintain water pressure between 30 and 50 pounds per square inch (PSI). It shall include the pump and controls, pressure tank and associated piping to connect the well to the transfer station.

3.08 WELL PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT

A. Upon satisfactory completion of testing, the Contractor shall prepare the well for production.

This will include furnishing and installing the following equipment:

i. PUMP & CONTROLS -The pump shall be efficiently supplying transfer station. ii. PRESSURE TANK of submersible design, capable of the desired volume of water to

the pressure tank shall have a capacity of at least 20 gallons. The tank will be installed within the transfer station.

iii. PIPING - The necessary piping to connect the well to the tank.

B. 480V, 3 Phase power shall be available per Electrical Specifications.

***End of Section***


SECTION 02540

SEPTIC SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes installation of two (2) holding tanks to serve the new transfer station. One tank is for leachate generated within the transfer station, while the other tank is for septic waste from the transfer station.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 COMPLETION OF WORK

A. CONTRACTOR shall provide and install the septic holding tank in accordance with the Becker County Individual Sewage Treatment System Ordinance.

B. CONTRACTOR shall obtain all required approvals and permits for completion of this work.

C. Site location of the two tanks is shown on Plan Drawings.


02540 - 1 Septic Systems T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02540-Septic Systems.doc Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 02600 GRAVEL BASE AND BITUMINOUS SURFACING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION IN INCLUDES

A. Gravel base on driving surfaces. Gravel base material to be provided by the OWNER and stockpiled on-site.

B. Bituminous surfacing.


A. Section 03200 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

B. Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.03 REFERENCE SECTION

A. The Minnesota Department of Transportation (MNDOT) "Standard Specifications for Construction." The numbers in parenthesis in the following provisions refer to the section number of the above-referenced specification.

B. The City Engineers Association of Minnesota (CEAM) "The Standard Utilities Specification",

1988 edition. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AGGREGATE BASE (2211)

A. The aggregate thickness shall be as shown on the Plans. Aggregate shall be Class 5, as specified in MNDOT Standard Specifications. Aggregate base construction shall be performed only after approval of the subgrade condition and grade has been received.

B. Compaction of the base shall be by the method of ordinary compaction.

2.02 PLANT-MIXED BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT (2331)

A. The plant-mixed bituminous pavement shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of 2331 and 2341, except as modified as follows.

B. The bituminous surfacing shall not begin until the condition of the base has been reviewed by

the ENGINEER or the OWNER.

C. Bituminous material for mixture shall be an asphaltic cement with a 120/150 penetration.

02600-1 Gravel Base and Bituminous Surfacing T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02600.docx Becker County Transfer Station

D. A MNDOT approved mix design for the aggregate source being used shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at least five (5) days prior to beginning the asphalt paving. If no approved mix design is available, the CONTRACTOR shall employ an independent testing laboratory, at his own expense, to perform the mix design.

E. Compaction shall be obtained by the Ordinary Compaction Method.

F. Section 2331.3H, paragraph two (2) is modified in that the CONTRACTOR is required to use

the self-propelled pneumatic tire roller as an intermediate roller for the purpose of achieving a tighter surface.

G. All bituminous pavement thicknesses shall conform to the requirements of the Plan. The base

course shall be constructed with a maximum deviation of plus or minus ½" from the planned compacted thickness. The surface course shall be constructed with a maximum deviation of plus or minus ¼" from the planned compacted thickness.

H. Three (3) random, three-inch diameter samples shall be taken by the CONTRACTOR as a

check of the compacted thickness of the finished bituminous structure. Core samples shall be at locations designed by the ENGINEER and made with a drilling device that produces clean, sharp, vertical edges. If any cores prove deficient, additional cores shall be made at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. (Patching of holes resulting from core samples shall be the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility.)

2.03 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT (2357)

A. Bituminous tack coat shall be constructed in accordance with the provisions of 2357, except as modified below.

B. The bituminous materials for tack coat shall be CRS-1 or CRS-2.

C. The contact surface of all field structures, including existing pavement surfaces, shall be given

a tack coat as specified. Tack coat shall be applied between all bituminous lifts. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT (2105)

A. Excavate the area to the elevation required.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall use selected material from the excavation for embankment and backfilling operations. All excess material shall be disposed where directed by the OWNER.

C. Compaction of the subgrade and embankment shall be by the method of ordinary compaction.

D. Topsoil shall be salvaged from the excavation for backfilling.

3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION (2112)

A. The CONTRACTOR shall scarify, shape and compact the upper six (6) inches of the subgrade adding water or drying as may be necessary to give uniform and desired density.

B. The CONTRACTOR shall regrade the existing Class 5 base material before construction of the

bituminous surfacing. The purpose of the regrading is to smooth out any surface irregularities.


3.03 APPLICATION OF WATER (2130)

A. The CONTRACTOR shall apply water as may be required to obtain the proper compaction for the subgrade. The application of the water shall be considered incidental to the construction of the project.



SECTION 02610 PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work under this section includes piping for stormwater drainage and collection.

B. Extent of pipe and fittings required by this section indicated on Drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 02201 - SITE GRADING, TRENCHING, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTING 1.03 METHOD OF PAYMENT

A. Work, including materials, specified in and performed under this section for the stormwater drainage, and under Section 02606 - MANHOLES AND CATCH BASINS, is included in the CONTRACTOR'S Lump Sum Price as stated in the Contract Agreement and no further compensation will be made.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. Minnesota Department of Transportation (MNDOT), Standard Specifications for Construction, latest Edition with revisions.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA).

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM D638-84 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 2. ASTM D790-84 - Test Method for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced

Plastics and Electrical Insulating. 3. ASTM D1238-82 - Test Method for Flow Rates of Thermoplastics by Extrusion

Plastometer. 4. ASTM D1248-81A - Specification for Polyethelene Plastics Molding and Extrusion

Materials. 5. ASTM D1505-68 (1979) - Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient

Technique. 6. ASTM D1693-70 (1980) - Test Method for Environmental Stress Cracking of Ethylene

Plastics. 7. ASTM D2837-76 (1981) - Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for

Thermoplastic Pipe Materials. 8. ASTM D3350-83 - Standard Specification for Polyethelene Pipe and Fittings Material. 9. ASTM D2122 - Standard Test Method of Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic Pipe

and Fittings. 10. ASTM D3035-88 - Polyethylene Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Controlled Outside

Diameter. 11. ASTM D2513-88b - Standard Specifications for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing

and Fittings. 12. ASTM D3261 - Standard Specification for Butt Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings

02610-1 Piping T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02610.docx Becker County transfer Station

for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's certificates indicating conformance test results of furnished material to Specifications.

B. Provide information where applicable as follows:

1. Manufacturer's name. 2. Nominal pipe size. 3. Poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) and fittings, Schedule 80, ASTM D1785. 4. Use for each type and size of pipe. 5. Extrusion date. 6. Lot number.

C. Stock density, melt flow, flexural modulus tensile strength, coloration, resin type and cell

classification where applicable.

D. Provide instructions on special handling during transportation and storage.

E. Aforementioned submittals provided to OWNER a minimum of 30 days prior to beginning work on Project.

1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handle and protect product to ensure product is not damaged.

B. Cover pipe with impermeable opaque cover during outdoor storage. Not required if stored in an enclosed building. Elevate material above grade.

C. Provide factory applied basic end caps on each length of PVC pipe. Maintain caps during

shipping, storage, and handling to prevent end damage.

D. Provide protection for flanges and fittings by storing inside or packaging with impermeable opaque material.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PVC: PVC pipe and fittings shall be Schedule 80 ASTM D1785 or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXECUTION

A. Examine and verify acceptability of surface to receive product. 3.02 PVC INSTALLATION

A. Trench, backfill and compact in accordance with Section 02211 - SITE GRADING and Section 02225 - TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION.


B. Location, lines, and grades as shown on Drawings.

C. Joints

1. Joints outside of manholes shall be either 0-ring rubber gasket or solvent, cemented according to manufacturer's specifications.

D. No defective pipe installed. Defective pipe removed from site and replaced at

CONTRACTOR'S expense. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Pipe may be rejected for failure to conform to specification, or:

1. Fractures or cracks passing through pipe wall, except single crack not exceeding 2 inches in length at either end of pipe which could be cut off and discarded. Pipes within one shipment will be rejected if defects exist in more than 5 percent of shipment or delivery.

2. Cracks sufficient to impair strength, durability or serviceability of pipe. 3. Defects indicating improper proportioning, mixing, and molding. 4. Damaged ends, where damage would prevent making satisfactory joint. 5. Noticeable variations from true alignment and grade sufficient cause for rejection of

Work.

B. Acceptance of fittings, stubs or other specially fabricated pipe sections based on visual inspection at site and documentation that they conform to these specifications.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Test piping in accordance with Section 01669 - TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS.

***END OF SECTION**


SECTION 02624

REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Work under this section includes furnishing and installing reinforced concrete pipe (RCP) for stormwater culvert.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Minnesota Department of Transportation (MNDOT), “Standard Specifications for Construction”, latest edition with revisions and supplements.

1.03 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Piping distances are not field measurements. B. Verify distances and alignment in field for length and fittings prior to beginning construction.

If discrepancies are identified, contact ENGINEER. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Handle and protect product to ensure product is not damaged and store in such a manner that pipes will not roll.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BEDDING AND BACKFILL A. Bedding materials shall conform to Section 02208. B. Backfill materials shall conform to Section 02225. 2.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE (RCP)

A. Materials:

1. Materials in accordance with MNDOT Standard Specifications Section 3236. 2. Pipe shall be Class III. 2. RCP dimensions as shown on Drawings. 3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, reinforced concrete pipe joints shall utilize a

rubber gasket and shall conform to ASTM C361.

02624-1 Reinforced Concrete Pipe T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02624-Reinforced Concrete Pipe.doc Becker County Transfer Station

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The pipe shall be visually inspected for cracks or broken ends. Any pipe cracked or broken shall be rejected and returned to the manufacturer. Examine and verify acceptability of surface to receive product.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. In accordance with MNDOT Standard Specification Section 2501. B. Location, lines, and grades as shown on Drawings.

C. No defective pipe installed. Defective pipe removed from site and replaced at CONTRACTOR'S expense.

3.03 EXCAVATION AND PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE A. Excavate and prepare subgrade as specified in Section 02225, and as shown on Drawings. 3.04 BACKFILL A. Above the granular bedding material, backfill as specified in Section 02225. 3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove all sediment and debris from pipe interior following installation. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Pipe may be rejected for failure to conform to Specifications, or:

1. Fractures or cracks passing through pipe wall, except single crack not exceeding 2 inches in length at either end of pipe which could be cut off and discarded. Pipes within one shipment will be rejected if defects exist in more than 5 percent of shipment or delivery.

2. Cracks sufficient to impair strength, durability or serviceability of pipe. 3. Defects indicating improper proportioning, mixing, and molding. 4. Damaged ends, where damage would prevent making satisfactory joint. 5. Noticeable variations from true alignment and grade will be sufficient cause for rejection of

Work.

B. Acceptance of fittings, stubs or other specially fabricated pipe sections based on visual inspection at site and documentation that they conform to these specifications.


02624-2 Reinforced Concrete Pipe T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02624-Reinforced Concrete Pipe.doc Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 02700

SCALE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 Furnish and install one concrete deck motor truck scale and associated electronic controls.

Acceptable Manufacturers: Mettler Toledo or approved equal. 1.02 The scale shall have a clear and unobstructed weighing surface of not less than 70’ feet long and

11’ feet wide, perform as a single platform and be flat-top design. 1.03 The scale shall be fully electronic in design and shall not incorporate any mechanical weighing

elements, check rods, or check stays.

1.04 The scale shall have a gross weighing capacity of 100 tons.

1.05 The scale shall have a Concentrated Load Capacity (CLC) of 100,000 pounds.

1.06 The scale shall be calibrated to a minimum of 120,000 pounds by 20-pound increments and not to exceed 200,000 pounds. System configurations with increments greater than 20-pound increments will not be accepted.

1.07 The load cells shall be stainless steel and hermetically sealed. Load cell mounting hardware shall be stainless steel. The load cell cables shall be stainless steel sheathed for rodent protection.

1.08 The scale shall meet the requirements set forth by the current edition of the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook 44 (NIST H-44). The scale manufacturer shall provide a Certificate of Conformance (NTEP Certification) to these standards upon request.

1.09 The scale shall be a Mettler-Toledo, Inc. Model VTC221 or equal.

PART 2 - SCALE FOUNDATION REQUIREMENTS 2.01 The foundation shall meet all local requirements and the minimum specifications as stated in this

section, including but not limited to required clearance from bottom of weighbridge to top of clean out slab for pit-less scales or top of pit floor for pit-type scales, approach length, approach slope and drainage.

2.02 The minimum soil bearing required shall be 2,500 pounds per square foot (psf) for a variable footer and 2,000 psf for a pit foundation. The Owner shall be responsible for determining whether or not the soil conditions are adequate.

2.03 The foundation shall be poured and constructed of concrete with a minimum strength of 3,000 psi at a 28-day cure with 5 to 7% air entrainment.

2.04 The foundation shall be reinforced in all load-bearing areas and footer depth will be below local frost line.

02700-1 Scale T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 02_Sitework\SECTION 02700 - Scale.docx Becker County Transfer Station

2.05 The foundation shall be designed in accordance with manufacture’s recommendations, local regulations and the guidelines of NIST H-44.

PART 3 - WEIGHBRIDGE SPECIFICATIONS 3.01 The scale weighbridge shall be constructed of prefabricated scale modules The prefabricated scale

modules shall be so designed to enable field pouring of the concrete without additional field forming. No field added steel reinforcing bar shall be required for installation. Field reinforcement of concrete decks shall be accomplished through the use of polypropylene fibers such as Fiber-Lok or equal.

3.02 For concrete decks, the deck shall be poured and constructed of concrete with a minimum strength of 4,000 psi at a 28-day cure with 5 to 7% air entrainment.

3.03 For steel deck scales to be acceptable, the deck plate shall be at least 5/16” thick tread plate.

3.04 All factory welding shall be completed in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 Structural Welding Code. There shall be no field welding or field fabrication required for the installation of the scale.

3.05 All enclosed chambers created by joining two or more steel members must be hermetically sealed to eliminate internal corrosion.

PART 4 - SURFACE PREPARATION AND FINISH 4.01 The weighbridge shall be shot blasted to a minimum SSPC-SP6 specification prior to painting.

4.02 All exterior surfaces of the scale shall have a two component, high build epoxy finish, impregnated

with aluminum flake for increased corrosion resistance and UV protection, providing total Dry Film Thickness of 5-7 mils; International/Akzo Nobel Intergard 7562 or equal.

PART 5 - LOAD CELL SPECIFICATIONS 5.01 Each load cell shall have a minimum capacity of 50 metric tons (110,000 pounds).

5.02 Load cells shall be NTEP certified, meet the specifications set forth by NIST H-44 for Class IIIL

devices and have a Certificate of Conformance to these standards.

5.03 Load cells systems shall be self-diagnosing to the individual load cell level, through either microprocessors in the cells or intelligent junction boxes. The load cell shall be of stainless steel construction and hermetically sealed with a minimum NEMA 4X (waterproof) to NEMA 6P / IP68 (submersible) rating.

5.04 The load cell interface cable shall be stainless steel sheathed for environmental and rodent protection. Neoprene covered load cell cable shall not be permitted.

5.05 Conduits provided by Contractor; Scale Contractor responsible to install cables.


5.06 Load cells shall be Mettler-Toledo, Inc. POWERCELL PDX load cell or equal.

PART 6 - SCALE INSTRUMENT SPECIFICATIONS 6.01 The scale instrument shall be designed for use in vehicle scale weighing applications. The

Indicator shall be compatible with Management Software, and shall include a basic truck in/out program for managing multiple transactions simultaneously, without the installation of additional software.

6.02 The scale instrument shall have the following keyboard operations: • 0-9 Numeric Keys • (Decimal Point) • Clear • Tare • Zero • Print • Select Scale • Four Application-Specific Assignable Soft Keys • Five Scale-Function Soft Keys • Screen Navigation Keys for Up, Down, Left, and Right Commands • Enter

6.03 The scale instrument shall have the following service characteristics: • Set-up and navigation through all phases of set-up, calibration, and testing shall be intuitive

through a decision-tree format. • Capable of performing calibration, span, zero, and shift adjustment through software

calculations that require no in-scale adjustment. • Entry of information shall be accomplished through the instrument’s keyboard only. • Ability to identify and to immediately display an error condition associated with an individual

load cell in the event of a failure or out-of-tolerance condition. The displayed message shall identify the failed load cell and the cause of the failure to avoid an invalid weighment on the scale.

• Ability to monitor and display health of load cell network and to compare the current network status to the values captured during calibration.

• Ability to access system status data through an Ethernet connection using a webserver residing on the instrument.

6.04 The scale instrument shall be NTEP certified, meet or exceed the specifications set forth by NIST H-44 for Class II, III, and IIIL Devices and have a Certificate of Conformance.

6.05 The scale instrument shall be housed in a metal enclosure that is suitable for desk or wall mounting.

6.06 The scale instrument shall have the following data communications capabilities: • One com port RS232 • One com port RS232, RS422, or RS485 • One TCP/IP 10 Base-T Ethernet


6.07 The scale instrument shall output the following information:

• Gross, Tare, and Net Weight • ID • Transaction Counter • Time and Date • Variable Application-Specific Information • Standard Reports Generated by the Scale Instrument

6.08 The scale instrument shall be UL/cUL listed.

6.09 The scale instrument shall be a Mettler-Toledo, Inc. Model IND560 PDX or equal.

PART 7 - PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS – TICKET PRINTER 7.01 The printer shall be housed in a suitable enclosure for desktop mounting.

7.02 The printer shall interface with the scale instrument using a singular cable with quick connectors

on each end and shall not require any modifications to the instrument or printer.

7.03 The printer shall have a serial interface capable of communicating with the instrument using an RS232C interface with selectable transmission rates from 300 to 9,600 baud. Transmission must be on demand.

7.04 The printer shall have an easily replaceable ink ribbon cartridge that shall be rated for a minimum life of 1.2 million characters.

7.05 The printer shall provide friction-feed paper advance.

7.06 The printer shall have a minimum buffer memory capable of storing at least 2000 bytes.

7.07 All materials, components, and electrical design shall comply with UL and CSA standards and requirements.

7.08 The printer shall be a Mettler-Toledo, Inc. APR 310 or equal.

PART 8 - OUTDOOR REMOTE DISPLAY AND KIOSK (optional) 8.01 4” High, 6 Digits, LED, Weather-tight Enclosure

8.02 Mettler Toledo ADI310 or equal (price as an option with ___ ft cable)

8.03 INBOUND TRUCK IDENTIFICATION KIOSK

8.04 Weather tight, Stainless Steel Enclosure, Housing:

8.05 Four Line Prompting Display (Vorne or Equal);


8.06 Hoffman Heater;

8.07 Aiphone Intercom Substation #LE-SSV including audio and video capabilities;

8.08 Enclosure large enough to house future RFID Reader, Printer and Keypad for future unattended scale operation;

8.09 4” Diamter x 8’ Mild Steel, Painted Pole for mounting Kiosk;

8.10 Aiphone AP5 or equal Intercom Master to be located in Scale Office.

PART 9 - SURGE VOLTAGE/LIGHTNING PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS 9.01 A comprehensive lightning protection system shall be provided with the scale.

9.02 The system shall not require complicated wiring or devices to provide this protection.

9.03 Major scale components including load cells and scale instrument shall be included in the

lightning protection system.

9.04 Grounding of all scale components including load cells and scale instrument shall be to one common point. Systems with multiple ground points are not acceptable.

9.05 An AC line surge protector shall conveniently plug into a common electrical outlet and have receptacles for the scale instrument.

9.06 Each AC line surge protector required shall have one isolated ground, hospital-grade duplex receptacles, and an internal 15-amp circuit breaker.

9.07 Verification of the lightning protection system’s performance shall be available in writing from a third-party verification laboratory upon request. Proposals submitted without 3rd party confirmation that the load cells, cables and instrument as a system have been able to withstand the equivalent of a lightning strike with 80,000 amperes will be rejected.

9.08 The lightning protection system shall be a Mettler-Toledo, Inc. StrikeShield Lightning Protection System or equal.

PART 10 - WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS 10.01 The scale manufacturer shall warrant the scale assembly including all load cells, weighbridge

structure, scale instrument, junction boxes, and associated cables from failures due to a defect in manufacturing, workmanship, lightning, or surge voltages.

10.02 The guarantee will warrant the product for a period of 5 years from date of installation or 62 months from date of shipment to the Buyer, whichever occurs first. Bidder shall promptly correct any such defect appearing within the warranty period.

10.03 The guarantee shall support 100% coverage of repair parts, labor, travel time, and mileage from the closest service location, or replacement of the product under warranty. The warranty shall


cover all costs associated with replacement parts, travel, mileage, on-site labor and recalibration after repair, the full cost of which shall be supported solely by the manufacturer and not in part by any other 3rd party

10.04 The manufacturer or bidder shall provide with the bid proposal a listing of the total cost (labor, parts, travel time and mileage) for two service technicians to travel to the scale site with a heavy duty test truck, stay on site for four (4) hours to troubleshoot and replace one load cell in the scale and the main printed circuit board in the weight display. This listing shall be provided for service in the following three timeframes: 6 months after installation, 36 months after installation, and 54 months after installation. Listings of the same costs at these three time periods must also be provided assuming the failure is the result of a lightning strike. The cost of recalibration must be included in each service cost summary.

Any exception to the stated specifications will be expressly noted in the bidder’s proposal. The owner has the absolute right to determine the acceptability of any scale in meeting the intent of these specifications.


Division 3 Concrete

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN SECTION 03200 STEEL BAR AND WELDED WIRE FABRIC REINFORCEMENT PART I - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Cast-In-Place Concrete: Section 03300 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Regularly engaged in manufacture of steel bar and welded wire fabric reinforcing in

continental United States. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Three (3) years experience in installation of steel bar and welded wire fabric reinforcing in

continental United States. 2. Welders qualified in accordance with AWS D12.1 - Latest Edition. C. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Fabrication: a. Sheared length: +/- 1/4 inch. b. Depth of truss bars: + 0, - 1/2inch. c. Stirrups, ties and spirals: +/- 1/2 inch. d. All other bends: +/- 1 inch. 2. Placement: a. Concrete cover to form surfaces +/- 1/4 inch. b. Minimum spacing between bars: 1/4 inch. c. Top bars in slabs and beams: (1) Members 8 inches deep or less: +/- 1/4 inch. (2) Members more than 8 inches but not over 2 feet deep: +/- 1/2 inch. (3) Members more than 2 feet deep: +/- 1 inch. d. Crosswise of members: (1) Spaced evenly within 2 inches +/- 1 inch. e. Lengthwise of members: (1) Plus or minus 2 inches.

REINFORCING 03200-1

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 3. Maximum bar movement to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits or

embedded items: a. 1 bar diameter. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Show sizes and dimensions for fabrication and placing of reinforcing steel and bar supports. 2. Indicate bar schedules, stirrup spacing and diagrams of bend bars. 3. Submit four (4) copies for approval prior to fabrication. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver reinforcement to project site in bundles marked with metal tags indicating bar size and length. B. Handle and store materials to prevent contamination.

C. Sort reinforcement according to size, shape and length for final placement immediately after delivery. 1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS A. ACI Building Code ACI 318-latest edition, and Chapter 5 of ACI 310-latest edition. B. "Manual of Standard Practice", latest edition, (CRSI publication). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Bars: deformed billet steel (ASTM A 615-latest edition, Grade 60 unless noted on drawings).

B. Wire Fabric: Welded Steel (ASTM A185-latest edition).

C. Tie Wire: FS-QQ-W-461-G, annealed steel, black, 16 gauge minimum.

D. Welding: Electrodes: AWA A5.1-latest edition, low hydrogen E70 series. No welding will be allowed on bars unless approved by Engineer.

E. Bar Supports: Conform to "Bar Support Specifications", CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. In accord with CRSI Manual of Standard Practices. PART 3 - EXECUTION REINFORCING 03200-2

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Placement: ACI 301-latest edition (5-505)

B. Steel Adjustment: 1. Move within allowable tolerances to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits,

embedded items. 2. Do not move bars beyond allowable tolerances without concurrence of Engineer. 3. Do not heat, bend, or cut bars without concurrence of Engineer.

C. Splices: 1. Lap Splices: Tie securely with wire to prevent displacement of splices during placement of

concrete, A.C.I. Class B minimum with development length multiplier of 2.0 of A.C.I. - 318 Section 12.2.3.

2. Do not splice bars except at locations shown on drawing without concurrence of Engineer. 3. Welding: Perform in accordance with AWS 12.1. D. Wire Fabric: 1. Install in longest practicable length. 2. Lap adjoining pieces one full mesh minimum and lay splices with 16 gauge wire. 3. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams or directly over beams of continuous

structures. 4. Offset and laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps.

E. Cleaning: 1. Remove dirt, grease, oil, loose mill scale, excessive rust and foreign matter that will reduce

bond with concrete.

F. Protection During Concreting:

1. Keep reinforcing steel in proper position during concrete placement.

END DOCUMENT 03200

REINFORCING 03200-3

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN SECTION 03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide cast-in-place concrete for general building construction, including, without limitation: 1. Footings and foundations. 2. Interior slab on grade. 3. Exterior sidewalks, curb & gutter, and ramps at overhead doors 4. Retaining walls, push walls and fire barrier wall. 5. Interior walls . 6. Requirements (materials, mixes, finishes) apply to concrete work specified in other

sections, such as bollard concrete fill, bond beam fill and core fill. B. Related work specified elsewhere: 1. Earthwork: Section 02200 2. Steel Bar and Welded Fabric: Section 03200. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design parameters: 1. ACI 318-latest edition, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." B. Construction Methods: 1. ACI 301-latest edition, "Specifications for Structural Concrete in Building." 2. ACI 304 - latest edition, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting,

and Placing Concrete." C. Tolerances: 1. Troweled finished slabs - depressions between high spots shall not exceed 1/8" under

a 10'-0" straightedge. D. Compression tests: 1. Standard 6" diameter concrete compression test cylinders shall be prepared in the

field by the testing agency in accordance with ASTM C31-69 and C172-71 and delivered to an independent testing laboratory for curing and testing in accordance with ASTM C31 and C39-72. The Owner will pay the cost of laboratory testing. Test reports shall be submitted to the Contractor and the Engineer in duplicate.

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 2. At least one set of test cylinders shall be made for each day's pour in excess of one

cubic yard for each type of concrete. If a day's pour exceeds 25 cubic yards, one set of test cylinders shall be made for each additional 50 cubic yards of fraction thereof.

3. Each set of test cylinders shall consist of three cylinders. Two cylinders (laboratory

cylinders) shall be kept in a 60 degree to 80 degree F. temperature range and protected form moisture loss at the job for a period of 24-48 hours. They shall then be delivered to the laboratory, laboratory cured, tested at 7 and 28 days respectively. Handle cylinders carefully to prevent damage. If high-early strength concrete is used, the laboratory cylinders shall be tested at 3 and 28 days respectively.

4. The third cylinder (field cylinder) shall be placed as near as possible to and protected

and cured in the same manner as the in-place concrete from which taken. This cylinder shall be completely job cured and delivered to the laboratory for testing at 28 days, or at an earlier date as directed by the Engineer.

5. In cases where samples have not been taken or tests conducted as specified or the

strength of the laboratory test cylinders for a particular portion of the structure fails to meet the requirements of ACI 318, Section 4.3, for evaluation of concrete strength, the Engineer shall have the right to order compressive and flexural test specimens taken from the hardened concrete according to ASTM C42-68, load tests according to ACI 318, Chapter 20, or such other tests as may be necessary to clearly establish the strength of the concrete and such tests shall be paid by the Contractor.

6. Entrained air tests shall be made at the site by the testing agency in accordance with

ASTM C231075. The testing agency shall furnish and maintain a properly calibrated pressure-type air meter, test the first batch of air entrained concrete delivered for each day's pour, and test additional batches as necessary to ensure that the air content is within the specified limits. Perform additional tests in the presence of the Engineer as directed.

7. Slump tests shall be made at the site by the testing agency in accordance with ASTM

C143-74. The testing agency shall furnish and maintain a mold and tamping rod. Test the first batch of every type of concrete delivered for each day's pour and test additional batches whenever the appearance of the concrete indicates a change in consistency. Perform additional tests in the presence of the Engineer as directed.

8. Concrete sampling methods shall be as required in ASTM C-172-71 "Sampling Fresh

Concrete." 9. If test results do not achieve the required level, the Engineer reserves the right to

order the mix design changed to a lower water-cement ratio so that the required strength level is achieved.


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Mix Designs: 1. All mix designs shall be prepared by an independent testing laboratory and be

proportioned in accordance with Section 4.3 (field experience) or Section 4.4 (trial batches) of ACI 318-latest edition. Submit proposed mix design at least fourteen (14 days) days prior to first pour and include:

a. All ingredients listed by weight. b. Quantities, type and name of admixtures. c. Standard deviation analysis of trial batch test results. 2. All proposed mix designs must be accompanied by standard deviation analysis or trial

batch test data. B. Test Reports: 1. Reports of compressive strength and slump. C. Compliance Reports: 1. Submit substantive data to verify conformance when materials are specified by ASTM

procedure number. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: ASTM C94 - latest edition. 1. Cement a. Type I or Type III - ASTM C150 latest edition. Cement to be normal portland

cement of a uniform grey color from the same manufacturer throughout project. 2. Admixtures a. Prior approval of all admixtures must be made by Engineer. b. Air Entraining: ASTM C260, add only to normal portland cement. c. Water Reducing: ASTM C494, Type A. d. Non-Chloride Accelerator (If approved by Engineer prior to use, cold weather

protection must be followed under all conditions. Use of calcium chloride or Tri-Mix additive is SPECIFICALLY NOT ALLOWED.): ”Accelguard 80" by the Euclid Chemical Company. The admixture shall not contain more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water.


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 3. All fine and coarse aggregates shall conform with ASTM C33 - latest edition. (No

shale): a. Provide natural sands and gravels, washed and cleaned. b. Fine aggregate shall be hard, clean, sand. c. Maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate: (1) Footings: 1-1/2". (2) All other concrete: 3/4". 4. Water (used in mixing concrete): a. Clear and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalies or organic

materials. 5. Slump: (Admixtures must be approved by Engineer prior to use) a. All concrete containing an approved high range water reducing admixture

(superplasticizer) shall have a maximum slump of 8" unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Concrete shall arrive at the job site at a slump of 2" to 3", be verified, then the high range water reducing admixture added to increase the slump to the approved level.

b. All other concrete shall have a maximum slump of 3" for slabs and 4" for other members.

6. Air Content: ASTM C173 - latest edition (Volumetric Method) or ASTM C231 - latest

edition (Pressure Method). (Must be approved by Engineer prior to use). a. All interior slabs subject to abrasion shall have a maximum air content of 3%. b. All exterior concrete shall be air entrained and have an air content of 5%-7%. 7. Concrete Requirements (See structural notes on drawings for exceptions). a. 3000 psi concrete at twenty-eight (28) days. b. 4000 psi concrete at twenty-eight (28) days. c. 6000 psi in tipping floor slab d. Water-Cement Ratio: Concrete in concrete unit masonry and footings shall

have a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.55. All other concrete shall have a maximum water-cement ratio of 0.45.

B. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. “Euco NS” (non-metallic) by the Euclid Chemical Company; “Sonogrout” (non-metallic)

by Sonneborn-Contech; and “Masterflow 117" (non-metallic) by Master Builders. The grout shall conform to CRD-C-621 - latest edition, "Corps of Engineers Specifications for Non-Shrink Grout."

C. Waterproof paper for curing shall conform to ASTM C171-69. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN D. Polyethylene film for curing shall conform to ASTM C171-69.

E. Curing Compound (Typical at all interior floors that do not receive hardener/sealer specified in Paragraph F. & G. below. Verify compatibility with finished floor surface): Water based acrylic cure and sealer, ASTN C 309, Type I, ID. “Dress & Seal WB” (L&M Construction Chemicals); “Kure-N-Seal W” (Sonneborn Chemical Corp.);”Horn Clear Seal EM 180" (A.C. Horn); “Aqua Cure Vox” (Euclid); or approved equal.

F. Chemical Hardener Compound Sodium silicate based cure and hardener, “Chem Hard” by L&M Construction Chemicals or approved equal. Five year warranty minimum against dusting. Use two coats with the first acting as a curing compound and the second as a hardener.

G. Chemical Sealer/ Water Repellant Compound (Typical at Drive Aisle Rm. #102: Silane based water repellant for heavy exposure to salt and water, minimum 40% active ingredients, “Pentane 40” by L&M Construction Chemicals or approved equal. Ten year warranty minimum.

H. Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D175; Non-extruding type, fiber with asphalt binder.

I. Patching and Surfacing Compound (epoxy type): “Euco Epoxy #460 Mortar” (The Euclid Chemical Company); “Sikaclur Lo-Mod Mortar” (Sika Chemical Co.); “Duralcast #215" (Dural International Corp.); or approved equal.

2.02 MIXES A. ASTM C-94 - latest edition. B. Mix concrete only in quantities for immediate use. C. Do not retemper or use set concrete.

D. Each truck shall have time of departure from mixing plant stamped on ticket. One hour is the maximum time between time concrete mix is placed in truck and the placing of concrete mix in forms.

2.03 FORMWORK

A. Provide form materials with sufficient stability to withstand pressure of placed concrete without bow or deflection.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FORMWORK: ACI 301 - latest edition, Ch. 4. A. Contractor is responsible for design, structural soundness and construction of formwork. B. Calculate accurately the anticipated form deflection due to weight of plastic concrete. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN C. Make compensating adjustments to form design as necessary.

D. Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position.

E. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

F. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement. Apply form release agents or wet forms, as required. Retighten forms during concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.

3.02 INSPECTION

A. Assure that excavations and formwork are completed and that excess water is removed.

B. Check that reinforcement is secured in place.

C. Verify that expansion joint material, anchors, and other embedded items are secured in position.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Provide sufficient bar supports, ties, anchors, and other accessories to hold all bars and embedded items securely in place. Tie all bars to supports .

3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONCRETE A. Preparation 1. For slabs on grade, place granular fill below all on grade concrete slabs in a layer six

(6) inches thick consisting of clean crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM C33, size 67, graded. Compact with vibrating mechanical tamping equipment to proper elevation and density immediately prior to concrete placement.

2. For slabs on grade, place vapor barrier below all interior concrete slabs, under

granular fill and over perimeter insulation. Lap all joints at least six (6) inches and seal with asphalt.

3. Clean debris, sawdust, dried concrete, ice, etc., from form bottoms. B. Protection From Weather: 1. In cold weather, concrete shall not be placed when temperature is, or predicted to be

within the following 48 hours, below 40 degrees F., unless proper provisions have been made for heating and protecting concrete in accordance with ACI 306. In hot weather, follow the recommendations of “Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting” ACI 305.

C. Placing Concrete: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 1. Convey concrete from mixer to final position by method which will prevent separation

or loss of material. 2. Maximum height of concrete free fall: Four (4'-0") feet. 3. Regulate rate of placement so concrete remains plastic and flows into position. 4. Deposit concrete in continuous operation until panel or section is completed. 5. Place concrete in horizontal layers eighteen (18") inches maximum thickness. D. Consolidating Concrete: 1. Use mechanical vibrating equipment for consolidation in accordance with the

recommendations of ACI 309, "Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete" - latest edition.

2. Vertically insert and remove hand-held vibrators at points eighteen (18") inches apart. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete in forms. 4. Lower frequency vibrators may be used for "flowing" concrete (concrete containing a

high range water reducing admixture). 5. Vibrate concrete thoroughly to properly consolidate it. E. Isolation/Expansion Joints: 1. Provide isolation/expansion joints where indicated on the drawings and whenever

concrete walks or slabs on the exterior abut the building including ramps, mechanical pads, walks, and concrete aprons, etc. Form isolation/expansion joints with 1/4" thick, asphalt impregnated type isolation joint filler extending the full depth of the slab.

F. Finishing: 1. All concrete floors and top of footings at finished floor level shall be screeded to an

even, level plane, floated and given a troweled finish as specified in ACI 301, section 11.7.3. Finished surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in 10'.

2. Provide a non-slip surface with a medium textured, broom finish at exterior aprons

and stoops. Finish lines shall be transverse to the dominant traffic flow. 3. Remove all fins, form joint marks, rough spots, and other defects by grinding or

rubbing with a carborundum stone and patching with patching compound. G. Curing: 1. Freshly deposited concrete shall be protected form premature drying and excessively CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-7

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN

hot or cold temperatures, and shall be maintained with a minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature above 55 degrees F for a total of ten (10) days for normal concrete or three (3) days for high-early strength concrete.

2. Curing of floors and other unformed surfaces shall start immediately after finishing operations are complete. All interior floors shall be cured by a spray on curing compound that is compatible with the final floor finish. If a compatible sealer/curing compound cannot be found then the floor shall be wet cured as described in items #3 and #4 below. Floors that will remain exposed shall be sealed with a second coat of curing compound placed near the completion of construction.

3. Wet Curing: Surfaces shall be kept continuously moist by ponding or continuous

sprinkling or by the use of absorptive mats or fabrics kept continuously wet for a period of 12-24 hours.

4. The same methods may be continued for the remainder of the curing period, or

surfaces may be covered with waterproof paper or polyethylene membrane lapped 4" at edges and ends and sealed. Keep concrete wet during application of covering. Covering shall be weighted to prevent displacement, and tears or holes appearing during the curing period shall be immediately repaired by patching.

5. Protect concrete from excessive changes in temperature during the curing period and

at the termination of the curing process. Changes in the temperature of the concrete shall be as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 50 degrees F in any 1 hour or 50 degrees F in any 24 hour period.

6. Protect concrete from injury from the elements until full strength is developed. Protect

from mechanical injury and tire markings. H. Construction & Control Joints: 1. Construction joints shall be made as detailed on the drawings and conform to ACI

318. Construction joints shall be placed between all adjacent slabs poured at different times.

2. Maximum spacing for control joints in concrete slabs shall be 15'-0". 3. A 15'-0" maximum spacing of control joints may not insure complete control of

shrinkage cracks. A closer spacing may be used by request of owner if more complete shrinkage crack control is desired. Contractor to verify with owner.

4. Construction joints in concrete foundation walls shall be located so no single pour is

longer than 40 feet.

I. Concrete Curb & Gutter: Construct concrete curb and gutter as shown on the drawings and conforming to Mn/DOT Specification 2531 with the following exceptions:

1. The Contractor shall have the option to furnish high early strength concrete where

necessary to accommodate traffic, facilitate construction or comply with traffic provisions CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8


or at other locations as the Engineer may deem necessary. Furnishing of high early strength concrete shall be considered incidental with no additional compensation made therefor.

2. Concrete Mix No. 3B32 will be permitted in lieu of Mix No. 3A32. 3. Expansion joints shall be required as detailed in Specification 2531.3C, at all catch

basin castings, and unless otherwise specified in the plans or detail plates, at a maximum of 200 foot spacing.

4. Catch basin inlet castings where shown shall be depressed 0.10 feet below the

design gutter flow line elevation. Castings constructed in violation of this specification shall be corrected with no additional compensation made.

5. Reinforcing shall be placed in segments of curb over all utility trenches and at all

catch basins. Reinforcing shall consist of two (2) #4 deformed reinforcing bars placed in the lower portion of the curb. Reinforcing bars shall be 20 feet in length and centered over the catch basin or utility trench. The furnishing and placement of reinforcing shall be considered incidental with no additional compensation made therefor.

6. Backfilling of the curb and gutter shall proceed as soon as practical after placement

of the curb and gutter. Backfilling shall be considered incidental with no additional compensation made therefor.

7. All concrete testing shall be the responsibility of the Owner. Any curb and gutter

placed that has a strength below 3,300 psi shall be removed and replaced at the contractor's expense. Any curb placed that has a strength between 3,300 and 3,900 psi shall be either removed and replaced or shall remain in place with no payment, at the contractor's option. All strengths indicated above are the result of a 28 day cylinder break. Upon finding cylinders that break below 3,900 psi, rebound hammer tests shall be taken to establish the extent of the failing curb. All costs associated with testing required to determine the extent of failing work will be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be deducted from monies due to the Contractor.

All costs for additional or repeated testing, inspection or administration associated with

failing test results will be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be deducted from monies due to the Contractor.

8. Construction of "beavertail" end transitions, drop sections at driveways and other

similar minor variations from the standard curb and gutter section shall be considered incidental with no additional compensation made therefor.

9. Any existing curb and gutter damaged due to the negligent operation of the

Contractor shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Keep rubber tired machines off floor for seven (7) days after placement. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN B. Allow no full construction traffic on floor for fourteen (14) days after placement. C. Keep floors, when used, cleaned of nails, sand, and other abrasive material. 3.06 REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE AREAS

A. Bonding grout shall be approximately one part Portland cement to one part fine sand passing a No. 30 sieve, mixed to a creamy consistency.

B. Patching mortar shall be made of the same material and of approximately the same proportions as used for the concrete, except the coarse aggregate shall be omitted and the mortar shall consist of not more than one part Portland cement to 2 1/2 parts damp loose sand by volume. Combine white and gray Portland cement as necessary to match the color of the surrounding concrete. Use no more mixing water than necessary for handling and placing. Mix patching mortar in advance and allow to stand with frequent mixing with a trowel without adding water until it has reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing.

C. Remove honeycombed and other defective concrete down to sound concrete. Dampen area to be patched and at least 6" surrounding the area. After water has evaporated from the surface, brush a coat of bonding grout into the surface. When the bonding grout begins to lose the water sheen, apply the patching mortar, thoroughly consolidate, and strike off slightly higher than the surrounding surface. Allow patching mortar to set undisturbed for at least 1 hour before final finishing. Do not finish patches on exposed surfaces with metal tools. Damp-cure patches for ten (10) days.

3.07 NON-SHRINK GROUT

A. All column base plates, equipment bases and other locations so noted on the structural drawings, shall be grouted with the specified non-shrink non-metallic grout.

3.08 SEALERS

A. Use only manufacturer and dealer approved installers.

B. Surface Preparation: Remove all dirt, grease, curing compounds, or other foreign matter. Surface must be completely dry before application.

C. Strictly follow the manufacturer's recommendations for installation.

END DOCUMENT 03300


Division 4 Masonry

(Not Used)

Division 5 Metals


SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS


A. Provide miscellaneous metal items fabricated from heavy gage ferrous and aluminum metals and not provided with pre-engineered structural steel system:

1. Handrails, walkway and railing; loading to comply with Code. 2. Loose lintels as required. 3. Sill angles. 4. Miscellaneous framing and supports. 5. Guardposts, guardrails, corner guards and pipe bollards. 6. Trench drain covers 7. Sloped drip cover at loading bay 8. Concrete drip edge material. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval samples for items exposed to view, shop drawings, product data, test

reports. B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products or acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Materials: 1. Steel plates, shapes and bars: ASTM A36 2. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, schedule 40. 3. Bolts: ASTM A 325. 4. Fasteners: Zinc coated fasteners designed for loading and use. 5. Grout: Non-shrink non-metallic grout. 6. Furnish and install Gray Iron wheelguards by Neenah where shown on plan. #R-4984-B

7. Furnish and install Neenah Series #R-4990 Heavy Duty trench frames with grated Cover. #R4990 DX 12” wide trench and Type A (33lb/lin.ft.).

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-1

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication. Do not delay job; allow for cutting and fitting if field measurement not practical. B. Form work true to line with sharp angles and edges. Weld continuously, grind flush and make smooth on exposed surfaces.

C. Install work plumb and level with hairline joints and ground flush welds.

D. Touch-up damaged coatings with shop primer and galvanize repair paint. Paint items scheduled in accordance with Section 09900 - Painting.

END SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS 05500-2

Division 6 Wood and Plastic


SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY


A. Provide rough carpentry work, including installation of door frames, windows,doors, hardware, toilet accessories, fire extinguishers and grab bar installation.

B. Related work in other Sections: 1. Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for approval. B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Lumber: Finished 4 sides, 19% maximum moisture content. Pressure preservative treat items in contact with roofing, flashing, waterproofing, masonry, concrete or the ground. Provide blocking for all mounted items.

B. Plywood, APA rated for use and exposure. C. Building paper: Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, ASTM D226, Type 1.

D. Preservative Treatment: Pressure-treated with waterborne preservatives, to comply with AWPB LP-2 for above-ground items LP-22 for ground contact items. Kiln dry after treatment to 19% maximum moisture content for lumber and 15% for plywood. Treat above-ground wood exposed to deterioration by moisture and all wood in contact with the ground or fresh water.

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Provide nailers, blocking and grounds where required. Set work plumb, level and accurately cut.

B. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with other work.

C. Comply with manufacturer's requirements for cutting, handling, fastening and working treated materials.

D. Restore damaged components. Protect work from damage.

END SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2

Division 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection


SECTION 07200 INSULATION

PART I - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide building insulation of wall and ceiling board type as applicable. B. Related work specified elsewhere: Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03300 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval product data and test reports. B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for three years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: "Dow Styrofoam" square edge or approved equal. R = 5.0 per inch minimum. In thicknesses and configuration to achieve minimum "R" values as indicated on Drawings.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: FS HH-I-1972/1, Class 2, closed cell glass fiber reinforced polyisocyanurate insulation board; square edges. "Thermax Insulation Board" as manufactured by The Celotex Corporation or approved equal. R = 7.20 per inch minimum. In thicknesses and configuration to achieve minimum "R" values as indicated on Drawings.


A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction. Coordinate with work of other sections. Provide full thickness in one layer over entire area, tightly fitting around penetrations.

B. Protect installed insulation.

END SECTION 07200

INSULATION 07200-1


SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide sealants at intersection of building components and at control and expansion joints. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval samples and product data. B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE


B. Caulking and sealing shall accomplish its purpose to prevent admittance of air and water. Remove and replace defective caulking and sealants. Requirements herein specified are minimum requirements as to materials and methods. The following types of failure will be adjudged defective work: (1) leakage of air or water; (2) hardening; (3) cracking; (4) pulling away from adjacent surfaces; (5) loss of bond; (6) crumbling; (7) sagging; (8) shrinking; (9) running of compound; (10) staining of adjacent work by compound; (11) improper levels; and (12) surfaces which are not smooth.

1.04 GUARANTEE

A. Caulking and sealant subcontractor shall guarantee all exterior caulking and sealants work against defective workmanship and materials and against leakage for a period of 5 years after acceptance of building. In event of leakage or other failure, corrections shall be made immediately.


A. Polyurethane Sealant: PECORA Dynatrol, Sonolastic NP-1, TREMCO Dymeric, Vulkem 116, or approved equals.

B. Silicone Sealant: "Silpruf" by General Electric Corporation or approved equal. C. Acrylic Sealant: "Mono" by Tremco or approved equal. D. Expansion Joint Filler: Non-extruding resilient bituminous type conforming to ASTM D 1751.

JOINT SEALERS 07900-1


E. Joint Sealant for horizontal joints in interior slab on grade: Two-part semi-rigid epoxy 100% solids sealant - Metzger/McGuire MM-80 as manufactured by Metzger McGuire or Masterbuilders Masterfil CJ or approved equal.

F. Airtight Expansive Foam Filler: Provide one-component rigid urethane foam material, Class 1, as manufactured by Insta-Foam Products, Inc., Joliet, Illinois or approved equal.

G. Primer: When required, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

H. Back-up: (Use open cell polyurethane or closed cell polyethylene per sealant manufacturer’s recommendation and warranty for each application).

1. Open Cell Polyurethane: "Denver Foam" by Backer Rod Manufacturing, Inc. or

approved equal. 2. Closed Cell Polyethylene: "Mile High" by Backer Rod Manufacturing, Inc, "Green-Rod"

by NMC of North America, "Sonofoam" by Sonneborn or approved equal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Examine substrate; report unsatisfactory conditions in writing. Beginning work means

acceptance of substrates. B. Provide sealants in colors as selected from manufacturer's standards.

C. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections. Clean and prime joints, and install bond breakers, backer rod and sealant as recommended by manufacturers.

D. Cure and protect sealants as directed by manufacturers. Replace or restore damaged

sealants. Clean adjacent surfaces to remove spillage.

END SECTION 07900

JOINT SEALERS 07900-2

Division 8 Doors and Windows


SECTION 08100

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide hollow metal steel doors and frames in the sizes and locations indicated on the Drawings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval, samples, shop drawings and product data. B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE


1.04 STANDARDS

A. Steel Doors and Frames in this section must meet all standards as established by the following listing:

1. Door and Hardware Preparation ANSI 115.1. 2. Life Safety Codes NFPA-101 (Latest edition) 3. Fire Doors and Windows NFPA-80 (Latest edition). 4. Steel Door Institute ANSI/SDI-100 (Latest edition)

5. UL10C and UBC 7 – 2 Positive Pressure fire testing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Doors: 1- 3/4" thick steel flush doors, ANSI/SDI 100-91 Grade III, Extra Heavy-Duty Level A, Model 2 and 2A seamless construction. Polyurethane foam insulation at exterior doors.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08100-1

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 1. Interior doors: ASTM A366 or A320 16 gage steel face sheets, 20 gage steel

stiffeners, 7 gage (3/16") 1 1/4" X 9" plate or continuous 12 gage channel hinge reinforcement, and 12 gage closer reinforcement. “Medallion” by Ceco or approved equal.

2. Exterior Doors: ASTM A526 A60 hot dipped galvanized 14 gage steel face sheets,

foamed-in-place polyurethane foam core, 7 gage (3/16") 1 1/4" X 9" plate or continuous 12 gage channel hinge reinforcement, and 12 gage closer reinforcement. “Imperial Maxim” by Ceco or approved equal.

B. Interior Metal Frames: Cold-rolled steel sheet, 16 gage ASTM A366 or A320 steel with fully welded and mitered corners. Series SF by Ceco or approved equal.

C. Exterior Metal Frames: Cold-rolled steel sheet, 14 gage steel with ASTM A526 A60 galvanizing and fully welded and mitered corners. All exterior frames shall incorporate a positive, integral, thermal break and include all required thermally broken anchors. Series TB “Thermal Break Frames” by Ceco Door Products or approved equal.

D. Finish: Rust-inhibiting primer.

E. Labeled Doors and Frames: 1. Construct and install doors and frames to comply with current issue of National Fire

Protection Association (NFPA) Standard Number 80, as herein specified. 2. Doors and/or frames for labeled openings shall bear either a stamped or applied label

from Warnock Hersey or Underwriters Laboratory. 3. All doors and frames are to have been tested in accordance with UL10C and UBC 7–

2 Positive Pressure. F. Anchors and Accessories: 1. Floor anchors shall be provided at each jamb. 2. Anchors for CAST-IN-PLACE walls will be of the drilled type. 3. Dust boxes to be no less than 26 gage. 4. All frames are to be welded and be provided with a steel spreader temporarily

attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not be used to size the frame opening.


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 5. Loose glazing stops are to be 16 gage galvanized, butted at corner joints and secured

to the frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-plated screws 6. Except on weather-stripped doors, punch stop for 3 silencers on single door and 2

silencers for double door frames. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate work to be rigid, neat and free from seams, defects, dents, warp, buckle, and exposed fasteners. Install doors and frames in compliance with ANS1 SDI-100, NFPA 80, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Fill frames in masonry walls with mortar.

B. SDI-105, “Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames” shall indicate the proper installation procedures.

C. Hardware: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware on final schedule. Provide for three silencers per strike jamb and two per head for pair of doors. Comply with the recommendations of “Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware” published by the Door hardware Institute (DHI).

D. Shop Finish: Clean, treat and prime paint all work with rust-inhibiting primer compatible with finish paint specified in Section 09900-Painting. Provide asphalt emulsion sound deadening coating on concealed frame interiors.

E. Touch-up damaged coatings and leave ready to receive finish painting.

END SECTION 08100



SECTION 08300 ROLLING GRILLES- OPEN DESIGN


A. Section Includes: (electric operated) overhead rolling grille at drop. B. Related Sections: 1. 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications. Door opening jamb and head members. 2. 06 10 00Rough Carpentry. Door opening jamb and head members.

3. Division 26. Electrical wiring and conduit, fuses, disconnect switches, connection of operator to power supply, and installation of control station wiring.

C. Products That May Be Supplied, But Are Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Control Station 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements 1. Cycle Life: a. Design grilles of standard construction for normal use of up to 5 cycles per day maximum.

B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Reference Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures; submit the following items: 1. Product Data 2. Shop Drawings: Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show Interface with adjacent work. 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Provide proof of manufacturer ISO 9001: 2010 registration. b. Provide proof of manufacturer and installer qualification – see 1.3 below. c. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions. 4. Closeout Submittals: a. Operation and Maintenance Manual. b. Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001: 2010 registered and a minimum of five years experience in producing grilles of the type specified.

2. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer’s approval. ROLLING GRILLES 08300-1

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 1.05 DELIVERY STORAGE HANDLING A. Reference Section 01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirement B. Follow manufacturer’s instructions. 1.06 WARRANTY

A. Standard Warranty: Two years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship.

B. Maintenance: Submit for owner’s consideration and acceptance of a maintenance

service agreement for installed products.


A. Manufacturer: Cornell Iron Works, Inc., Crestwood Industrial Park, Mountaintop, PA 18707. Telephone (800) 233-8366, Fax (800) 526-841. Underwriters, Laboratories, Inc. (UL), IS) 9001: 200 Registered.

B. Model: (ESG10)

C. Substitutions: Reference Section 01 25 13 Product Substitution Procedures

2.02 MATERIALS A. Curtain: 1. ESG 10 Straight Pattern a. Horizontal Rods: Solid 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter galvanized steel. 1. Vertical Spacing: 2 inches (50.8 mm) on center b. Vertical Chains: Grommetted (stainless steel) links, ¾ inch (19 mm)

wide, positioned by E-rings on (9 inch (228.6 mm) 6 inch (152.4 mm) 3 inch (76.2 mm) centers. Provide double E-rings on horizontal bars on both sides of end chains to retain curtain in guides.

INCUDE REINFORCING ANGLES NOTED BELOW ON GRILLES OVER 27’-4” (8.33 M) WIDE. 2. Bottom Bar: 2 x 3 ½ inch (50.8 x 88.9 mm) extruded aluminum tubular section. (reinforced with 3 x 2 x 3/16 inch (76.2 x 50.8 x 4.76 mm) aluminum angle(s).

3. Finish: a. Galvanized Steel Rods with Aluminum Chains and Bottom Bar: 1. Rods: Galvanized steel, unpainted. 2. Chains and Bottom Bar: (Mill finish) (Clear Anodized) B. Guides, Wall Mounted: Heavy duty extruded aluminum sections with (snap-on cover to

conceal fasteners and) polypropylene pile runners on both sides of curtain. Provide

ROLLING GRILLES 08300-2

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN

(steel) mounting angle as required for face of wall installation. 1. Finish, Steel (Mounting Angles) a. Phosphate treatment followed by corrosion inhibitive baked-on -zinc-rich gray polyester powder coat; minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film

thickness. C. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly: 1. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of

0.03 inches per foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width. 2. Spring Balance: Oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion spring assembly

designed for proper balance of grille to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 lb (110 N). Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque.

D. Brackets: Fabricate from minimum 3/16 inch (4,76 mm) steel plate with permanently

Lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures. 1. ASTM A 123, Grade 85 zinc coating, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Hood and Fascia: (24 gauge galvanized steel). Provide minimum ¼ inch (6.35 mm) steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag 1. Finish:

a. GalvaNex ™ Coating System to include an ASTM A 653 galvanized base coating treated with dual process rinsing agents in preparation of a chemical bonding, light gray baked-on polyester base coat and a light gray baked-on polyester finish coat. The scientific organic material composition and chemical bonding process of GalvaNex ™ produces a superior finish against corrosion and abrasion. GalvaNex ™ components include a limited two year finish warranty.

2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Locking:

1. Motor Operated: Keyed Cylinder locking into both jambs operable from both sides of curtain with motor interlock cutout switches.

B. Operator (and Bracket Mechanism) Cover: Provide (24 gauge galvanized steel) to enclose exposed moving operating components at coil area of unit. Finish to match door hood.

2.04 OPERATION

A. Supply Cornell Model MG Electric Motor Operator, industrial duty – rated for a maximum of 20 cycles per hour, cULus listed, Totally Enclosed Non Ventilated gear head



operator(s) rated (3/4) hp as recommended by door manufacturer for size and type of door, 120 Volts, 1 Phase. Provide complete with electric motor and factory pre-wired motor control terminals, maintenance free solenoid actuated brake, (emergency manual chain hoist) and control station. Motor shall be high starting torque, industrial type, protected against overload with an auto-reset thermal sensing device. Primary speed reduction shall be heavy-duty, lubricated gears with mechanical braking to hold the door in any position. Operator shall be equipped with an emergency manual chain hoist assembly that safely cuts operator power when engaged. A disconnect chain shall not be required to engage or release the manual chain hoist. Operator drive and door driven sprockets shall be provided with #50 roller chain. (Provide an integral Motor Mounted Interlock system to prevent damage to door and operator when mechanical door locking devices are provided). Operator shall be capable of driving the door at a speed for 6 to 9 inches per second (15 to 23 cm.sec). Fully adjustable, driven linear screw type cam limit switch mechanism shall synchronize the operator with the door. The electrical contractor shall mount the control station and supply the appropriate disconnect switch, all conduit and wiring per the overhead door wiring instructions.

1. Control Station: Flush mounted, “Open/Close/Stop” push buttons; NEMA 1B.

B. Provide operator to function with constant pressure close operation to meet UL325-2010

listing standard requirements. C. Entrapment Protection: Provide the following primary entrapment protection device to

enable momentary contact close operation. 1. Provide a 2-wire, E.L.R. electric sensing/weather edge seal extending full

width of grille bottom bar. Contact before grille fully closes shall cause grille to immediately stop downward travel and reverse direction to the fully opened position. Provide a (retracting safety cord and reel) (self-coiling cable) connect to control circuit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in

accordance with approved shop drawings.

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates.

C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptable of substrate.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install grille and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangars and supports.

B. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions.


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test and adjust grilles for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion.

3.04 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer. B. Remove surplus materials and debris from site. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner’s Representative. B. Instruct Owner’s Representative in maintenance procedures.

END SECTION 08300



SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING FIRE DOORS


A. Section Includes: operated overhead coiling doors, operators, controls and accessories.

B. Related Sections:

1. Cast-In-Place Concrete – Section 03300 1.02 REFERENCES

A. General: Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to the extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.


A. Fire Resistance Rating: 1. Three-hour rating, tested and listed by Factory Mutual (FM) .

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings indicating guide details, head and jamb conditions, clearances, anchorage, accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures, operator mounts and other related information.

OVERHEAD COILING FIRE DOORS 08331-1


D. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Certificates: Submit installer qualifications.

E. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following:

1. Warranty documents available at www.raynor.com or your Raynor authorized dealer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity, and trained and authorized by the door dealer to perform the work of this section.

B. Regulatory Requirements and Approvals

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING

A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements. B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Project Warranty: Refer to Conditions of the Contract for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights Owner may have under contract documents.

1.08 MAINTENANCE

A. Service and repair shall be performed by an authorized Raynor dealer.1. Quantity: Three




A. Manufacturer: Raynor Door.

B. Manufacturer Product Designation: FIRECOIL STANDARD. 2.02 DOOR OPERATORS

A. Provide doors designed for electric motor operation. 1. Drive Orientation: For electric motor operated doors, orient the drive from the left-hand side when facing the reference side of the door (side with counterbalance or hood exposed).

B. Manufacturer Product Designation: Raynor Control Hoist Optima

1. Operation Mode: Trolley or Jackshaft 2. Duty Cycle: 30/hr. 3. Drive: Gear 4. NEMA Options: NEMA 1 5. Motor: Continuous Duty – ½ hp 6. Logic: Solid State 7. Power: 115/230V 1 Phase, or 230/460V 3- Phase 8. Brake: Jackshaft-Std., Trolley-Std. 9. Wiring Options: 24V, On-board selection 10.Warranty: 2 years 11. Control Wiring: Contractor Style Motor starter 24 volt control with provisions for connection of safety edge to reverse and external radio control hook-up. [Three button momentary contact "open-close-stop"]. Solid State motor controller 24 volt control with provisions to select up to 6 standard wiring types plus delay on reverse, mid stop, maximum run timer, and door lock feature. 12. Model Number:

2.03 CURTAIN

A. Material: Interlocking steel slats, [22 gauge (0.030 inch minimum thickness)] [20 gauge (0.036 inch minimum thickness)], roll-formed from commercial quality hot-dipped galvanized (G-90) steel in compliance with ASTM A-653.

1. Slat Type: Flat Slat

B. Mounting: Face Mounting: fasten to face of wall on each side of door opening

C. Color and Finish: One finish coat of Gray polyester paint



D. Endlocks: Lateral movement of the slats to be contained by means of zinc-plated malleable endlocks fastened with two zinc-plated steel rivets. E. Bottom Bar and Seal: Two roll-formed galvanized steel angles, minimum 2 inches by 2 inches by 3/16 inch (51 mm x 51 mm x 4.8 mm). Structural angle bottom bar to receive one coat of rust-inhibitive primer.

2.04 GUIDES

A. Guide Assemblies: To consist of three structural steel angles, minimum 3 inches by 2 inches by 3/16 inch (76 mm by 51 mm by 4.8 mm) and fitted with removable curtain stops. Steel guides to be provided with one coat of rust-inhibitive primer. B. Jamb Construction: Steel Jambs with self-tapping fasteners C. Weather Seal: Guide brush seal.

2.05 COUNTERBALANCE SYSTEM

A. Headplates: Minimum 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) steel plate, attached to wall angle of guide assembly with 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) diameter class 5 case hardened bolts. Inside of drive bracket fitted with sealed ball bearing. Provide head plates with one coat of rust-inhibitive primer

B. Barrel: Minimum 4-1/2 inches (114.3 mm) O.D. and 0.120 inch (3.1 mm) wall thickness structural steel pipe. Deflection of pipe under full load shall not exceed 0.03 inch (0.8 mm) per foot of span. C. Counterbalance: Provide torsion counterbalance mechanism as follows: Torsion Spring: Oil-tempered, helical torsion springs, grease packed and mounted on a continuous steel torsion shaft .

2.06 ENCLOSURES

A. Hood: Round hood enclosure. B. Headplate Cover: 24 gauge steel finish-painted to match curtain. C. Flame Baffle: Provide flame baffle to comply with listing agency.

2.07 RELEASE SYSTEM



A. Descent Control: Rolling fire door operation mechanism shall be disengaged during automatic closing of the door. Descent of door under fire conditions shall be controlled by: Mechanical Oscillating Governor B. Release Type: Automatic closing of rolling fire door under fire conditions to be initiated by: Fusible Links

C. Detection Type: Device used in conjunction with the release type to initiate the automatic closing of rolling fire door:Photoelectronic smoke detector with Heat Sensor Detector.

2.08 HARDWARE

A. Locks: Furnish door system with: interlock switch with cylinder lock. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Comply with instructions and recommendations of door manufacturer. 3.02 ACCEPTABLE INSTALLERS

A. Installers with minimum of five years experience. 3.03 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify through direct observation and field measurement that site conditions are acceptable for installation of doors, operators, controls and accessories. Ensure that the openings square, flush and plumb.

B. Do not proceed with installation of doors, operators, controls and accessories until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install door, guide and operating equipment complete with all necessary accessories and hardware according to shop drawings, manufacturer’s instructions.



3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: At Owner’s request, provide manufacturer’s field service consisting of product installation and use recommendations, and site visit to observe and ensure product installation is done in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

1. Site Visits: One

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. General: Lubricate bearings and sliding parts and adjust doors for proper operation, balance, clearance and similar requirements.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace installed products damaged prior to or during installation. B. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions prior to Owner’s acceptance. Remove and legally dispose of construction debris from project site.

END OF SECTION 0331



SECTION 08360 SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide and install insulated exterior sectional doors in the sizes and locations indicated

on the drawings, and all operators, hardware, and required accessories for a complete installation.

1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Section 13120 - Pre-Engineered Building Systems 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit approval shop drawings and product data. B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable

manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for five years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Products by Raynor Garage Doors are specified with products by McKee Door, Inc., Overhead Door Company, and Wayne-Dalton acceptable. 2.02 EXTERIOR SECTIONAL DOORS A. Model: Series “TC-20" insulated steel sectional door as manufactured by Raynor

Garage Doors or approved equal. B. Steel Sections: 3" thick 20 gage steel roll formed exterior sections with 26 gage steel

interior covers filled with 2 7/8", expanded polystyrene insulation for a minimum R-Value = 13.55.

C. Glazing: Factory installed wire glass vision light where indicated on Drawings. D. Operator: Gearhead electric operators with adjustable friction clutches and remote radio SECTIONAL DOORS 08360-1


controls for each door. Provide ten radio control devices which will each have buttons to operate both doors independently. Raynor “RGJH” Series with 3/4 hp. motors or approved equal.

E. Track: 3" lift vertical clearance track F. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer to provide a flexible, U-shaped, vinyl safety floor seal in

an aluminum retainer, continuous EPDM rubber seal at all jambs and heads, and neoprene joint in each section joint.

G. Electric Eye: Install on interior jambs at sills. H. Finish: Baked on polyester paint. I. Springs: High-cycle tested for 100,000 cycles. J. Color: White PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install materials and systems in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and

approved submittals. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.

B. Install assemblies complete with all hardware, anchors, inserts, supports and

accessories. Restore damaged finishes and test for proper operation. Clean and protect work from damage.

END SECTION 08360

SECTIONAL DOORS 08360-2


SECTION 08500

METAL WINDOWS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A Provide and install aluminum windows in the sizes and locations indicated on the Drawings. Furnish all necessary materials, labor, and equipment.

1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 13120 - Pre-Engineered Building Systems B. Section 03300 – Cast In Place Concrete C. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for approval, samples, shop drawings and product data. B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE



A. Products by Efco, Traco, Inc., Modu-Line Windows, Inc.,and manufacturer’s units compatible with installation in cast-in-place walls. Comply with Section 01300 Submittals.

2.02 MATERIALS A. Fixed and sliding units; Heavy duty, aluminum fixed window with thermal break. Sizes

as shown on the drawings. B. Finish: All exposed surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious blemishes and

shall receive Silicone Polyester Enamel paint per AAMA spec. 605.2. 1992. C. Color: Manufacturer’s standard colors.

METAL WINDOWS 08500-1

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN D. Glazing: Low ‘E’ tinted, 1” factory glazed, insulating glass units. Tempered glass where

indicated on drawings. See Section 08800 – Glazing. E. Miscellaneous: Extrusion shall be 6063-T5 alloy aluminum and temper (ASTM B221

alloy G.S. 10A-T5). The thermal barrier shall consist of a non-metallic material that eliminates all metal to metal contact between exterior and interior of the frame. Fasteners shall be aluminum, stainless steel of zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A-164. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel, providing the steel is properly isolated from the aluminum. Glazing gaskets shall be elastometric extrusions.


A. All items in this section shall be set in correct locations as shown in the details and shall be level, square, plumb and in alignment with other work in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and approved shop drawings. All joints between framing and the building structure shall be sealed in order to secure a watertight installation. Do not plug drainage slots.

B. Hardware: Hardware having component parts which are exposed shall be aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive materials compatible with aluminum and shall be of sufficient strength to perform the functions for which it is used. The windows shall be equipped with locks and pulls of suitable materials and shall provide reasonable security against forced entry.

C. All frame materials shall be fastened in place using backing, masonry plugs, or anchor straps as required.

D. Upon completion of the frame installation it shall be this contractor’s responsibility to make all necessary final adjustments to attain normal operation of each aluminum window and its mechanical hardware.

3.02 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

A. After installation, the Contractor shall adequately protect exposed portions of aluminum surfaces from damage by grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, lime, acid, cement, or other contaminants. The Contractor shall be responsible for final cleaning.

B. Touch-up damaged coatings and leave in factory finish condition.

END SECTION 08500

METAL WINDOWS 08500-2


SECTION 08700 FINISH HARDWARE

PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. It is the intent of this Section to schedule the complete line of hardware required and completely equip all doors and hollow metal work except as otherwise noted. Provide hardware items as required for correct door function even though not specifically noted. It shall be the hardware suppliers responsibility to furnish hardware in compliance with all applicable state and local codes and standards. Provide finish hardware as required for complete, operating, doors and frames with all required accessories.

B. Where items of hardware are not definitely or correctly specified and are required for the intended service, such omission, error or other discrepancy should be directed to the Architect prior to the bid date for clarification by addendum. Otherwise furnish such items in the type and quantity established by this specification for the appropriate service intended.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Following the award of the contract, the hardware supplier shall submit six (6) copies of a complete detailed, Door and Hardware Institute (DHI) vertical-type hardware schedule prepared by or under the supervision of a DHI registered Architectural Hardware Consultant for review. Supply catalog cuts clearly marked showing the manufacturer’s products to be use on this project. The schedule shall contain only the catalog numbers of approved items and manufacturers. If corrections and resubmissions are required, one copy of the schedule will be returned with corrections indicated. Resubmittal shall require six (6) copies.

B. The hardware supplier shall furnish an approved hardware schedule and all necessary templates to all factory-machined door and frame manufacturers. If required, the hardware supplier shall furnish physical hardware shipped prepaid to the door and frame manufacturers for applications.


A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for five years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Comply with the following standards where applicable:

1. BMHA - Recommended Locations for Builder’s Hardware. 2. NFPA 80 - Standards for Fire Doors and windows 3. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures 4. UL - Building Material Directory 5. International Building Code (IBC) 2000 edition. 6. UL10C - Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door assemblies FINISH HARDWARE 08700-1


C. Furnish products of only one manufacturer for each type of hardware unless specified otherwise.

D. For fire rated openings, include documentation for UL10C or other approved testing agency stating the hardware has passed UL10C testing and meets UL10C requirements.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. All items shall be properly and carefully packed to guard against damage in transit.

B. All hardware for each opening shall be packed separately and each package shall be clearly marked to show its contents and its intended place in the building.

C. The Contractor shall check hardware against approved hardware schedule upon delivery and provide a dry, secure storeroom to protect against loss or damage.

D. Prevent soiling of hardware during handling.


A. General: Supply hardware new and free from scratches, mars, and defects. Furnish hardware complete with accessories of proper size and design required for purpose for which it is to be used complete with all screws, shield, or other anchorage devices necessary for complete installation onto or into supporting surfaces for which the item is intended. All exposed screw heads shall be Phillips type. Functioning hardware having stamped or spun parts is not acceptable unless noted otherwise. Items specified below establish a standard of quality.

Product Specified Acceptable 1. Butt Hinges Ives Hager, McKinney, Bommer, Stanley 2. Continuous Hinges Markar Prior Approved Equal 3. Flush Bolts Ives Door Controls, Hager 4. Exit Devices Von Duprin Norton, Dorma 5. Locks and Latches Russwin Corbin, Schlage, Best 6. Pulls, Push Bars, Hiawatha Hager, Burns, Ives Push/Pull Plates 7. Coordinators Ives Door Controls, Hager 8. Closers LCN Prior Approved Equals by Norton,

Dorma 9. Automatic Operators LCN Dor-O-Matic, Besam, Horton 10. Protective Plates Hiawatha Hager, Burns, Ives 11. Overhead Stops Glynn Johnson Rixson, Sargent 12. Wall Stops Ives Hager, Burns 13. Magnetic Hold Opens LCN ABH, Rixson

FINISH HARDWARE 08700-2

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 14. Thresholds, Sweeps, Reese Pemko, NGP Weatherstrips, Gaskets 15. Key Cabinets Lund Key Controls, Telkee

B. Hinges, butts and pivots: 4 ½" X 4 ½" , full-mortise, 5 knuckle ball-bearing type. Provide proper butt width to clear trim and allow full 180 degree door swing. All butts shall have flat button tips unless noted otherwise. All butts shall be modern ‘Slim Line’ type. All exterior doors shall have NRP Hinges. The following is a table of butt types in manufacturer’s catalog numbers, which are considered equal. No substitutions will be allowed.

Ives Hager Bommer McKinney Stanley Type 1 - ANSI A8111 5BB1HW BB1168 BB5004 T4B3786 FBB168 (Hvy. Wt. BB Steel) Type 2 - ANSI A5111 5BB1HW 630 BB1199 BB5005 T4B3386 FBB199 (Hvy. Wt. BB Stain. Steel) Type 3- ANSI A8112 5BB1 BB1279 BB5000 TB2714 FBB179 (Std. Wt. BB Steel) Type 4- ANSI A5112 5BB1 630 BB1191 BB5002 TB2314 FBB191 (Std. Wt. BB Stain. Steel) Type 5- ANSI A8133 5PB1 1279 5000 T2714 F179 (Std. Wt. PB Steel) Type 6- ANSI A5133 5PB1 630 1191 5002 T2314 F191 (Std. Wt. PB Stain. Steel)

Butt types shall be furnished as follows: All exterior outswing doors Type 2 Typical interior doors 36" wide & over Type 1 Typical interior doors less than 36" wide Type 3 Interior doors subject to moisture or corrosive atmosphere 36" wide & over Type 2 Interior doors subject to moisture or corrosive atmosphere less than 36" wide Type 4



C. Locksets and latchsets: Extra Heavy Duty, commercial grade (Grade 1) mortise locksets, latchsets, and trim, all products of one manufacturer. 2 3/4" Backsets. Provide wrought box and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project more than 1/8" beyond trim, frame, or inactive leaf. Where required, provide open back and protected back strikes to allow practical and secure operation. Coordinate locks with Owner’s Medico cylinders and system supplier. Corbin Russwin ML2000 LWM Series or approved equal.

D. Lock cylinders and keying:

1. All locks are to be master keyed as directed by the Owner. All locksets will receive

Owner’s Medico cylinders and/or interchangeable cores. Verify exact keying schedule and lock function with Architect, the Owner’s Representative, and the Owner’s Locksmith before ordering.

2. Furnish three change keys each lock, furnish six master keys each set. Furnish six

grand master keys. Provide the Contractor with three construction masterkeys and temporary construction cores.

E. Flush Bolts and Dust Proof Strikes:

1. Acceptable manufacturer’s and respective catalog numbers: Ives Door Controls Hager

FB458 780 282D FB31P 842 292D FB41P 942 291D FB51P 845 293D FB61P 945 294D DP2 80 280X 2. Furnish dustproof strike DP2 for bottom bolt. F. Coordinators: 1. Acceptable manufacturer’s and respective catalog numbers: Ives Door Controls Hager

COR 600 297D 2. Furnish a COR series coordinator for labeled pairs of doors equipped with automatic

flush bolts and those with vertical rod/mortise lock fire exit device combinations with overlapping astragals.

3. Furnish filler bars to fill the complete opening width, closer mounting brackets, carry

bars and special preparation for top latches where applicable.



G. Exit devices: 1. Acceptable manufacturer’s and respective catalog numbers: Von Duprin No Substitution

99 Series 94 Series 2. Surface applied strikes shall be roller type unless noted otherwise. 3. Devices to be equipped with a sound dampening feature to reduce touch pad return

noise. 4. On full glass doors there shall be no exposed fasteners on the back on the

mechanism visible through the glass. 5. Provide thru bolts as required. 6. Devices shall be the product of one manufacturer 7. Exit devices specified “LBR” are to be supplied with surface vertical rods “Less

Bottom Rod” (LBR) and no strikes installed on the floor. 8. Hollow metal removable mullions shall be keyed and removed by a standard mortise

cylinder. 9. Exit devices that are supplied with levers shall match trim design of locks and latches

unless noted otherwise.

H. Closers: 1. Acceptable manufacturer’s and respective catalog numbers: LCN Norton Dorma Exterior Doors: 4111 EDA PR1601 8901SPA Interior Doors: 4111 EDA PR1601 8901SPA (Push Side Mounting) Interior Doors: 4011 1601 8901 (Pull Side Mounting)



2. All closers to be heavy duty, double arm type and have separate adjusting valves for latching speed, closing speed, and backcheck. It shall be the hardware supplier’s responsibility to furnish door closer sizes to comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations for individual sizes and locations. Furnish one size larger for exterior doors.

3. Closers shall use high strength cast cylinders and one piece forged steel pistons. 4. Closers shall use a stable fluid withstanding temperature ranges of +120 deg. F to -30

deg. F without seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with UL10C.

5. Closers shall have field adjustable spring power that at the low end is capable of

meeting ADA requirements and, at the high end, is capable of controlling a 44 inch exterior door.

6. Furnish complete with mounting brackets, drop plates, special shoes, thru bolts,

overhead stop, and hold open functions as may be required by the door and frame conditions and/or noted in the door schedules. Where wall conditions permit, all closers shall swing 180 degrees.

7. Install closers on the room side of corridor doors, stair side of stairways, and interior

side of exterior doors. Provide closers for all labeled doors, whether called for in the door schedule and hardware groups or not.

8. All closers shall be the product of one manufacturer.

I. Kick Plates and Mop Plates: 16 gauge (0.050") stainless steel. Kick plates shall be 10" high and 2" less than door in width (LDW). Mop plates shall be 4" high and 2" less than door in width (LDW). Plates shall have countersunk holes and beveled edges on four sides. Provide kickplates on push side of all doors with closers. Hiawatha, Hager, Burns, and Ives or approved equals.

J. Overhead Stops: 1. Acceptable manufacturer’s and respective catalog numbers: Glynn Johnson Rixson Sargent

GL90 Series 9 Series 590 Series GL100 Series 1 Series 690 Series GL450 Series 10 Series 1540 Series 2. Furnish GJ450 Series overhead stops for doors equipped with regular arm surface

type closers that swing more than 140 degrees before striking a wall, for doors that open against equipment, casework, sidelights, or other objects that would make wall bumpers inappropriate, and as specified in the door schedule or hardware groups.


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 3. Furnish sex bolt attachments for wood and mineral core doors unless doors are

supplied with proper reinforcing blocks. K. Wall Stops and Holders: 1. Acceptable manufacturer’s and respective catalog numbers: Ives Hager Burns

WS407CVX 232W 570 WS407CCV 236W 575 WS11X 255W 530 WS40 326W 2. Where wall stops are not applicable, furnish overhead stops. L. Thresholds and Weatherstripping: 1. Acceptable manufacturer’s and respective catalog numbers: Pemko National Guard Reese Thresholds: 171A 425 S205A Weatherstrip: 2891APK 700NA 755A Head & Jamb Gasket: S88D 2525 797B Drip Cap: 346A 16A R201A Sweeps: 18061CP B606A 964A Smoke Astragal: S77 5060 2. Where specified in the door schedule or hardware groups, furnish the above products

unless otherwise detailed in the schedule or groups. 3. Furnish head/jamb gaskets and edge stile astragals for pairs at fir labeled doors

wether listed in door schedule and hardware groups or not. Provide material based on passing UL10C.

4. Coordinate with door manufacturer the intumescent fire and smoke material for fire

rated openings as required by the door and frame manufacturer to comply with UL10C. M. Push Plates and Pulls:

1. Acceptable manufacturer’s and respective catalog numbers: Hiawatha Hager Burns 1" Diameter Straight Pull: 536B 4J 26C 1" Dia. Push Bar & Pull: 1081 153 422 X 26C Push/Pull Plate: 200F 30S 4 X 16 54 Pull: 523A 3G 25B


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 2. Length of push bars shall be sufficient to mount each end of center of door stile. Push

bars on flush doors shall be 3" less than door width. Mount all push bars and pulls back to back with should bolts and set screw. Set screw to be on the inside.

N. Key Cabinets:

1. Acceptable manufacturer’s and respective catalog numbers: Lund Key Control Telkee

1200-1205AA M228-2480 RWC-AWC 2. Furnish one Model 1200 or 1205 AA key cabinet with a capacity of 1.5 times the

number of key sets.

O. Finish: Except where indicated otherwise in the door schedule or hardware groups or herein, hardware finishes shall be applied over base metals as specified in the following finish schedule:

Product Finish and Base Material

1. Butt Hinges 26D (BHMA #612) 2. Continuous Hinges 32D 3. Flush Bolts US26D 4. Exit Devices US26D 5. Locks and Latches US26D 6. Pulls, Push Bars, US32D Push/Pull Plates 7. Coordinators Prime painted or mill aluminum 8. Closers Aluminum 9. Protective Plates US32D 10. Overhead Stops US26D 11. Wall Stops & holders US32D 12. Thresholds Mill Aluminum 13. Weatherstrip, Sweeps, Aluminum Anodized Drip Caps 14. Magnetic Holders US26D PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors, frames and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install each hardware item in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations, using only fasteners supplied by or called for by the manufacturer.

B. Set units level, plumb, and true to the line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

C. Install hardware on UL labeled openings in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements to maintain the label and fire rating of the door.

D. Install per door and/or frame manufacturer’s supplemental “S” label instructions on fire rated openings.

E. Mortise and cut to close tolerance and conceal evidence of cutting in the finished work.

F. Drill and countersink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space anchors and fasteners in accord with industry standards.

G Follow guidelines of DHI "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames", BMHA recommended mounting locations, hardware manufacturer's instructions and as follows:

1. Butts and Hinges - Bottom of bottom butt 10" above floor. - Top of top butt 5" below door head. - Other butts spaced equally. 2. Door Levers - 40" above finish floor. 3. Deadbolts - 48" above finish floor to center of cylinder. 4. Push Plates - ½" from edge of paired doors. - 1" from edge of single doors. 5. Door Pulls - Top bolt at 44" above finish floor. - Backset at 2 3/4" from edge or centered in door stile. 6. Exit Devices - Center of crossbar at 36" above finish floor. 7. Kick Plates - Bottom within 1/8" of door bottom. 8. Wall Stops - Install wall stops to engage levers and pulls. Do not mount wall

stops on casework, cabinet work, or equipment.

H. Deliver to the Owner one complete set of installation and adjustment instructions, and tools as furnished with the hardware.


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN 3.03 ADJUSTMENT & CLEANING

A. At final completion, adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation and function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with the type of lubrication recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Replace any units that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application.

C. Instruct Owner’s personnel in the proper adjustment of the hardware.

D. Clean and restore hardware to the original finish.

PART 4 - SCHEDULE 4.01 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. Furnish hardware items in the amounts indicated unless additional hardware is required for a complete and operable facility. Ensure completeness, proper function, and proper application of hardware for each door.

B. The following schedule of finish hardware shall be furnished: Group #1 Doors 100A, 100B, 101A, 101B, 102A, 102B, 102G, 100F Each Door To Have: 3 Hinges BB1199 4/1/2” x 4/1/2” NRP 32D Hager 1 Lockset ND70RD Rhodes 626 Schlage 1 Door Closer 4041 CUSH AL LCN 1 Kick Plate 10 x 2” L.D.W. 32D Hiawatha 1 Latch Guard 32D 1 Threshold S205A Reese 1 Sweep 323C Reese 1 Weatherstrip 807C Reese 1 Rain Drip R201C Reese

Group #2 Doors 103A, 103B,

Each Door To Have: 3 Hinges BB1191 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” 32D Hager 1 Lockset ND53RD Rhodes 626 Schlage 1 Door Closer 4041 AL LCN 1 Kick Plate 10 x 2” L.D.W. 32D Hiawatha 1 Sweep 967C Reese 1 Weatherstrip S88D Pemko 1 Door Stop WS407CCV 32D Ives


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN Group # 3 Doors 100C, 100D, 100E, 101C, 101D, 102C, 102D, 102E, 102F, 102H, 102J, All Hardware Supplied by Door Supplier

Group #4 (Not Used)

Group #5 Door 105

Each Door To Have: 3 Hinges BB1279 4/-1/2” x 4-1/2” 26D Hager 1 Privacy ND40S Rhodes 626 Xchlage 1 Door Closer 4041 AL LCN 1 Kick Plate 10 x 2” L.D.W. 32D Hiawatha 1 Door Stop WS407CCV 32D Ives 1 Gasket S88D Pemko 1 Coat Hook 572B 26D Ives Group #6 (Not Used) Group #7 Door 104

Each Door To Have: 3 Hinges BB1279 4-1/2” x 4-1/2” 26D Hager 1 Latchset ND10S Rhodes 626 Schlage 1 Door Closer 4041 AL LCN 1 Kick Plate 10 x 2” L.D.W. 32D Hiawatha 1 Door Stop WS407CCV 32D Ives 1 Gasket S88D Pemko Group Misc. Supply The Following: 2 Keys with each Lockset or Cylinder 6 Master Keys 3 Control Keys Verify Keying With Owner

END SECTION 08700


BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No.14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN

SECTION 08950

TRANSLUCENT WALL PANELS PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. All requirements of the contract documents form an integral part of the work

specified herein. B. Insulated wall panels shall consist of 2.75” thick factory prefabricated sandwich

panels and systems including installation; manufactured by Kalwall Corporation. C. Requests for substitutions must be approved in writing or by addendum no later

than seven (7) days prior to bid due date and in keeping with Division 1 (Substitutions) of the specifications.

D. Work included: Supply all labor and materials required to deliver and install the

insulated wall panel system as shown on the elevations. The following major items included are:

1. Prefabricated insulated translucent wall panel sandwich panels. 2. Installation system. 3. Aluminum framing. E. Related work as specified elsewhere: 1. Pre-Engineered Buildings Section 13120 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s and Erector’s Qualifications: 1. Wall panel system manufacturer must be listed by a recognized building code

authority, including the I. C B.O., which requires quality control inspections by an approved agency for sandwich panel construction.

2. Quality control inspections and testing conducted at least once each year,

shall include manufacturing facilities, sandwich panel components and production sandwich panels for conformance with “Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panels” as regulated by the IBC or equivalent.

3. Materials and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously

and regularly employed in the manufacture of specified materials for a period of at least five (5) consecutive years; and which can show evidence of these materials being satisfactorily used on a least six (6) projects of similar size, scope and type within such a period. At least three (3) of the projects have been in successful use for ten (10) years or longer.

4. Erection shall be by an installer which has been in the business of erecting

specified materials for at least five (5) consecutive years; and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope and type.

B. Performance Requirements: The manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and fabrication of the complete wall panel system.

TRANSLUCENT WALL PANELS 08950-1


1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and color samples in accordance with Division 1, Submittals.

B. Test reports to be furnished by wall panel system manufacturer in accordance with Division 1, Submittals. The manufacturer shall submit certified test reports made by an independent testing organization for each type and class of panel system. Reports shall verify that the materiel will meet all performance requirements of this specification. Previously completed test reports will be acceptable if current and indicative of products used on this project. Test reports required are:

1. Flame Spread and Smoke Development (ASTM E-84). 2. Burn Extent (ASTM D-635). 3. Color Difference (ASTM D-2244). 4. Impact Strength (Free Falling Ball Method). 5. Bond Strength (ASTM C-297 and ASTM D-1002). 6. Accelerated Aging (ASTM D-1037). 7. Insulation “U” Factor (NFRC 100).

8. Condensation resistance factor at Bond line (AAMA 1503.1) 9. Light Transmission per ASTME-972 (grid included)

C. Complete energy calculations and all above data must be submitted with any

request to be included as an approved product to bid this section. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Store wall panels on the long edge, several inches above the ground, blocked and

under cover to prevent warping. PART 2 MATERIALS TRANSLUCENT PANEL WALL SYSTEM

A. Acceptable Manufacturers.

1. Kalwall Corp Manchester New Hampshire

2.01 TRANSLUCENT FACING A. Translucent fiberglass faces shall be manufactured from glass fiber reinforced

thermoset resins by insulated wall panel system fabricator specially for architectural use.

B. The interior face sheet shall be U.L. listed and have a flame spread rating no

greater than 45 and smoke development no greater than 350 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84 (Optional 20 /200). Burn extent by ASTM D-635 shall be no greater than 1”. Faces shall not deform, deflect or drip when subjected to fire or flame; or become detached when subjected to 300 degree F for one (1) hour.

C. Weatherability:

1. The full thickness of the exterior face shall not change color more then 3.0 Hunter or CIE Units (Delta E by ASTM D-2244) .



2. The exterior face shall have a permanent glass veil erosion barrier to provide

maximum long term resistance to reinforcing fiber exposure and shall be warranted against same for 25 years (Note: For white, crystal and Kal-Tint). Plastic film overlays such as tedlar are not acceptable.

D. Appearance: 1. The face sheets shall be uniform in color to prevent splotchy appearance.

Faces shall be completely free of ridges and wrinkles which prevent proper surface contact in bonding to the grid core. Clusters of air bubbles/pinholes which collect moisture and dirt are not acceptable.

2. Exterior faces shall be (smooth or pebble) 0.070 “ thick and Crystal in color.

Interior face sheets shall be 0.045” thick and White in color. Faces shall not vary more than +/- 10% in thickness.

E. The exterior face sheet shall be uniform in strength and repel an impact equal to 60 ft.

lbs. without fracture or tear when impacted by a 3.5” diameter, 6.37 lb. free falling ball.

2.02 GRID CORE

The thermally broken I-beams shall be machined with provisions for interlocking of I-beams and perimeter to prevent high and low intersections which do not allow full bonding surface to contact with face material. Width of I-beams shall be no less than 7/16”. Thermally broken I-beam grid shall be machined to tolerances of not greater than +/- 0.002”. Panels shall have a minimum 1” thermal separation on all grid lines. All grids must be thermally broken. Panels shall withstand 1200 degrees F fire for minimum of one (1) hour without collapse or exterior flaming. Thermally broken composite grid core shall have minimum Condensation Resistance Factor of 80 by AAMA 1503 measured on the grid line only.

2.03 ADHESIVE The laminate adhesive shall be heat and pressure resin-type engineered for

structural sandwich panel use. Adhesive shall pass testing requirements specified by the I. C. B. O.’s “Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel Adhesive”. Minimum strength shall be:

A. 750 PSI tensile strength by ASTM C-297 after two (2) exposures to six (6) cycles

each of the aging conditions prescribed by ASTM D-1037. B. Shear strength average of five (5) exposures by ASTM D-1002: 1. 50% relative humidity at 73 degrees F: 540 PSI. 2. Accelerated Aging by ASTM D-1183: 700 PSI. 3. 182 degrees F: 60 PSI. 4. Full Cycle Soak: 715 PSI. 5. 500 Hour Oxygen Bomb: 1400 PSI. 2.04 PANEL CONSTRUCTION A. Wall panels shall have a minimum thickness of 2.75” with a “U” factor of .23; light

transmission of 20% and shading coefficient of .27 .



B. Wall panels shall be a true sandwich panel of flat fiberglass sheets bonded to a grid

core of mechanically interlocking aluminum I-beams and shall be laminated under a controlled process of heat and pressure.

C. Grid pattern shall be nominal 12” X 24” and symmetrical about the horizontal center

line of each panel, for flat panel. D. The adhesive bonding line shall be straight, cover the entire width of the I-beam

and have a neat, sharp edge. In order to insure bonding strength, white spots at intersections of muntins and mullions shall not exceed 4 for each 40 square feet of panel, nor shall they be more than 0.047” in width.

E. Wall panel panels and aluminum perimeter frame shall be pre-assembled where

practical and sealed at the factory. Panels should be shipped to the job site in rugged shipping units and shall be ready for erection.

2.05 BATTENS AND PERIMETER CLOSURE SYSTEM A. Extruded 6063-T6 and 6063-T5 aluminum screw clamp-tite type closure system. B. Aluminum closures to be supplied with 300 series stainless steel screws (excluding

final fasteners to the building) and shall be factory sealed to the panels. Aluminum battens and cap plates shall be field installed.

C. All exposed aluminum to be mill finish which meets the performance requirements

of ANSI/AAMA 605.2-85. 2.06 FLEXIBLE SEALING TAPE Sealing tape shall be manufacturer’s standard pre-applied to closure system at the

factory under controlled conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION The general contractor shall prepare openings including isolating dissimilar

materials from aluminum system which may cause damage by electrolysis, and shall provide temporary enclosures if required.

3.02 ERECTION A. The erector shall erect translucent wall panel system in strict accordance with

approved shop drawing as supplied by manufacturer. Fastening and sealing shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s shop drawings. All aluminum shall be cleaned before sealants are applied.

B. After other trades have completed work on adjacent material, carefully inspect

translucent panel installation and make adjustments necessary to insure proper installation and weather-tight conditions.

END SECTION 08950


Division 9 Finishes


SECTION 09900 PAINTING


A. Provide surface preparation and painting for all unfinished interior and exterior surfaces, all exterior exposed structural steel, and electrical and mechanical equipment with shop primed surfaces.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for approval samples, product data and any extra stock.

B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE



A. Products of Benjamin-Moore Paints are specified with equivalent first-line standard products by Sherwin-Williams, Pratt and Lambert, Diamond Vogel, Glidden, and Devoe, Olympic, and Cabot acceptable or approved equal.

B. Exterior paint schedule:

1. Exposed Metal (Unprimed) and primed: Prime Coat - 1 coat IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel. Finish Coat - 2 coats Impervo Alkyd High-Gloss Metal & Wood Enamel or approved equal. (Color: as selected by the Architect)

C. Interior paint schedule:

1. Hollow Metal Doors, Frames, and Miscellaneous Metals. (Pre-primed): 2 coats Moorcraft Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel or approved equal. (Color: as selected by the Architect.)

2. Exposed Metal (Unprimed): Prime Coat - 1 coat IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Metal & Wood Enamel. Finish Coat - 2 coats Moorcraft Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel or approved equal. (Color: as selected by the Architect.)

3. Concrete Wall Surfaces - Semi-Gloss (Typical): Prime Coat - 1 coat Moorcraft Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer. Finish Coat - 2 coats Moorcraft Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel or approved equal. (Color: as selected by the Architect.)

PAINTING 09900-1

BECKER COUNTY WASTE TRANSFER FACILITY Project No. 14-053 DETROIT LAKES, MN PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint

manufacturer’s instructions and as herein specified.

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and repair as required. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with particular substrates.

2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish painted, or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items.

3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Coordinate cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly painted surfaces.

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Inspect surfaces, report unsatisfactory conditions in writing; beginning work means acceptance of substrate.

B. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for preparation, application, priming and coating work. Coordinate with work of other sections.

C. Clean up, touch up and protect work.

END SECTION 09900

PAINTING 09900-2


SECTION 09970 FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) WALL PANELS


A. Supply and install all sanitary FRP wall panels in toilet room and as indicated on the Drawings. This includes all associated adhesive, trim, and moldings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for approval samples, product data, warranty, test reports, maintenance data, extra stock.

B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals


A. Comply with governing codes and regulations. Provide products of acceptable manufacturers which have been in satisfactory use in similar service for five years. Use experienced installers. Deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Panels: Non-porous, color integral, FRP wall panels. Class 1/A fire rating, USDA approved for incidental food contact. KEMLITE "Fire-X Glasbord Plus" by CRANE KEMLITE Company or approved equal. .09" Thickness. Color: No. 85 "White".

B. Adhesive: As recommended by panel manufacturer for application to gypsum board substrate.

C. Moldings, Division bars, Corner trim, etc.: Single length extruded vinyl pieces in the longest lengths possible to eliminate end joints. Color: No. 85 "White" by CRANE KEMLITE Company.


A. Inspect substrate and report unsatisfactory conditions. Commencement of work will indicate acceptance of the substrate.

FRP WALL PANELS 09970-1


B. Laminate panels to substrate in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Remove and replace damaged panels and trim. Wash, polish and protect all panels supplied under this section.

END SECTION 09970

FRP WALL PANELS 09970-2

Division 10 Specialties


SECTION 10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Conditions of the Contract and the provisions of Division 1 apply to all work of this section.

B. This Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install all signage as shown on the drawings and specified herein.

C. Interior signs: Provide A.D.A compliant acrylic plaque signs for the following doors: Toilet room, stairs, and emergency showers. Mount adjacent to the door on the wall.

D. Exterior signs: Provide A.D.A. compliant accessible parking signs; directional and traffic signs.

E. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Finish Carpentry - Section 06200 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Interior engraved plastic signs and exterior painted aluminum signs. B. Exterior aluminum 6” address numbers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Prepare and submit shop drawings to the Architect for approval in accordance with the General Conditions. Shop drawings shall include size, shape, materials and mounting details.

B. Submit color chart for selection by the Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

A. Interior Signs (Note provide all interior signage, including directory, from one manufacturer):

1.Typical Interior Signs - 8" X 6" engraved signage fabricated from 1/8"

thick, scratch resistant, non-static, fire retardant, melamine plastic with a non-glare matte finish surface. Signage copy shall be 5/8", a contrasting color, raised image 1/32 inch high and will include a room name and a room number. Provide Grade 2 braille text below the written text for full ADA compliance. Signage shall have radiused corners. Signage shall be

IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400-1


mounted to the wall with pressure sensitive tape. Total quantity: 12. Owner will submit list of room names and numbers after award of the contract. ADA System #HC300C by Best Manufacturing or approved equal.

2. Accessible Toilet Room Sign - Signage for accessible toilet room shall be 6" x 8" with radiused corners. Signs shall have a 2" high raised graphic symbol for Men and Women and also the International Symbol of Accessibility in the upper portion of the sign. Sign copy shall be 1" high, San Serif typestyle all upper case letters, one each and “UNISEX”, located below the graphic symbols. Provide Grade 2 braille text below the written text for “UNISEX”. Total quantity: 1. ADA System #HC300A by Best Manufacturing or approved equal.

B. Exterior Signs - Aluminum signs to designate handicapped accessible parking spaces shall be fabricated from 1/8" aluminum blank with silk-screened symbol and letter of baked on acrylic enamel. Sign shall be 12" x 18" with radiused corners as follows:

1. Signs shall have a blue field with white letters and border. 2. Signs shall have the international graphic symbol for the handicapped

and shall have all lettering in upper case helvetica regular. 3. Signs shall be mounted on a 2” diameter Schedule 40 galvanized steel

post, height above grade as noted below, with a concrete cylinder footing and a minimum embedment of 2’-6”. Paint black above grade

4. Traffic & Directional Signs: Provide traffic signs as described and detailed on drawings.

5. Six inch street address numbers in contrasting color to metal siding. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install signage in locations shown on the drawings.

B. Interior signage shall be mounted with the top no higher than 60” above the floor.

C. Exterior signage shall be mounted with center of the sign 60” above the adjacent grade surface.

END SECTION 10400

IDENTIFYING DEVICES 10400-2


SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES


A. Provide and install all fire extinguishers, cabinets, and accessories as indicated on the Drawings.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for approval; color samples, product data, warranty.

B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE



A. Wall Brackets: Cold rolled steel wall brackets with painted enamel finish. Provide all necessary wall anchors and accessories.

B.. Fire Extinguishers: 10 lb. Capacity with 4A:60B:C NFPA rating: Cosmic 10E freeze resistant by J.L. Industries or approved equal.


A. Inspect job conditions and report unsatisfactory conditions. Commencement of work will indicate acceptance of the job conditions. All items in this section shall be set in correct locations as shown in the details and shall be level, square, plumb and in alignment with other work in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Mount extinguisher brackets and cabinets securely to wall as shown. Mount 4'-0" above the finished floor to the top of the extinguisher.

C. Touch-up damaged coatings and leave in factory finish condition.

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-1


D. Remove and replace damaged extinguishers, cabinets, or hardware. Wash, polish and protect all materials supplied under this section.

END SECTION 10520

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520-2


SECTION 10800 TOILET ACCESSORIES


A. Supply and install all toilet accessories as listed below and as indicated on the Drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit for approval samples, product data, warranty, maintenance data.

B. Comply with the requirements of Section 01300 - Submittals 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE



A. Grab Bars:

1. Bars: Stainless Steel. Bobrick Series B-6206.99 (peened) or approved equal. Sizes and shapes as indicated on Drawings.

2. Mounting Devices: Walls - Bobrick Series #252 or approved equal.

B. Mirrors: Reflective glass mirror with stainless steel trim at toilet room in the size and configuration shown on the drawings. Maximum mounting height 40" above finished floor to bottom of reflective surface. Fed. Spec.: DD-M-0041 LB, Type 430. Bobrick Series B-165 or approved equal.

C. Toilet Paper Holder: One per water closet; Fed.Spec. WW-P541/8A, Type 1, Class 1, Style K. Recessed - Bobrick Series B-388 or approved equal. Mount at 19" to center above finished floor.

D. Coat Hooks/Door Stop: Surface mounted, one per water closet. Bobrick Series B-212 or approved equal. Mount on back of door at 48" to center above finished floor at accessible partitions and 60" to center at all others.

TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-1


F. Paper Towel Dispenser: Bobrick Series B-262 or approved equal. One per toilet room.

G. Soap Dispenser: Bobrick Series B-2112 or approved equal. One per lavatory.

H. Utility Shelf: Bobrick Series B-296 or approved equal. One per toilet room near lavatories. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Inspect job conditions and report unsatisfactory conditions. Commencement of work will indicate acceptance of the job conditions. All items in this section shall be set in correct locations as shown in the details and shall be level, square, plumb and in alignment with other work in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

B. Touch-up damaged coatings and leave in factory finish condition.

END SECTION 10800

TOILET ACCESSORIES 10800-2

Division 11 Equipment

(Not Used)

Division 12 Furnishings

(Not Used)

Division 13 Special Construction


SECTION 13120

PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal Building System: 1. Structural steel framing system. 2. Metal roof system. 3. Metal wall system. 4. Roof and wall insulation systems. 5. Metal trim.

6. Strip Skylights

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete B. Section 08500 – Metal Windows

B. Section 08100 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

C. Section 08700 – Finish Hardware

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): 1. AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 2. AISC Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise Buildings.

B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 3. AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members.

C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 / D1.1M – Structural Welding Code – Steel. 2. AWS D1.3 / D1.3M – Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel.

D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 325 – Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105

ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 2. ASTM A 653 / A 653M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM A 792 / A 792M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum-Zinc

Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING SYSTEMS 13120-1


4. ASTM C 1363 – Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.

5. ASTM D 522 – Standard Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings.

6. ASTM D 523 – Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. 7. ASTM D 968 – Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by

Falling Abrasive. 8. ASTM D 1308 – Standard Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and

Pigmented Organic Finishes. 9. ASTM D 2244 – Standard Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color

Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. 10. ASTM E 96 / E 96M – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 11. ASTM E 1592 – Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof

and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

E. Metal Building Manufacturers Association (MBMA): 1. MBMA Metal Building Systems Manual.

F. North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (NAIMA): 1. NAIMA 202 – Standard For Flexible Fiber Glass Insulation to be Laminated for Use in

Metal Buildings.

G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. UL 580 – Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 2. UL 723 – Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

1.04 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Convene preinstallation meeting 2 weeks before start of installation of metal building system.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section, including Contractor, Engineer, installer, and metal building system manufacturer’s representative.

C. Review materials, installation, protection, and coordination with other work.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit metal building system manufacturer’s product information, specifications, and installation instructions for building components and accessories.

C. Erection Drawings: Submit metal building system manufacturer’s erection drawings, including plans, elevations, sections, and details, indicating roof framing, transverse cross-sections, covering and trim details, and accessory installation details to clearly indicate proper assembly of building components.

1. Certification shall reference specific dead loads, live loads, snow loads, wind l loads/speeds, tributary area load reductions (if applicable), concentrated loads, collateral loads, seismic loads, end-use categories, governing code bodies, including year, and load applications.



2. Submit certification 1 week before bid date on the metal building system manufacturer’s letterhead.

E. Submit certification verifying that the metal roof system has been tested and approved by Underwriter’s Laboratory as Class 90.

F. Submit certification verifying that the metal standing seam roof system has been tested in accordance with ASTM E 1592 test protocols.

G. Dealer Certification: Submit certification one week before bid date that the metal building system supplier or metal roof system supplier is a manufacturer’s authorized and franchised dealer of the system to be furnished. 1. Certification shall state date on which authorization was granted.

H. .Installer Certification: Submit certification 1 week before bid date that the metal building system and roof system installer has been regularly engaged in the installation of building systems of the same or equal construction to the system specified for a minimum of 5 years..

I. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer’s standard warranty.


A. .Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer regularly engaged, for past 10 years, in manufacture of metal building

systems of similar type to that specified. 2. Accredited based on IAS Accreditation Criteria AC472 and requirements in International

Building Code (IBC), Chapter 17.

B .Installer's Qualifications: 1. Installer regularly engaged, for past 5 years, in installation of metal building systems of

similar type to that specified. 2 Employ persons trained for installation of metal building systems.

C. Letter of Certification:

1. Metal building system manufacturer shall submit written certification prepared and signed by a Professional Engineer, registered to practice in Minnesota verifying that building system design and metal roof system design (including panels, clips, and support system components) meet indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Certification shall reference specific dead loads, live loads, snow loads, wind loads/speeds, tributary area load reductions (if applicable), concentrated loads, collateral loads, seismic loads, end-use categories, governing code bodies, including year, and load applications.

3. Letter of certification shall be on metal building system manufacturer’s letterhead. 4. Refer to Submittals article of this specification section.

D. Material Testing: 1. In addition to material certifications of structural steel, metal building system manufacturer

shall provide, upon request at time of order, evidence of compliance with specifications through testing.



2. This quality assurance testing shall include testing of structural bolts, nuts, screw fasteners, mastics, and metal coatings (primers, metallic coated products, and painted coil products).

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

B. Storage and Handling Requirements: 1. Store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Keep materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers and packaging until

installation. 3. Do not store materials directly on ground. 4. Store materials on flat, level surface, raised above ground, with adequate support to

prevent sagging. 5. Protect materials and finish during storage, handling, and installation to prevent damage.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Metal building system manufacturer shall provide a written weathertightness warranty for a maximum of 25 years against leaks in roof panels, arising out of or caused by ordinary wear and tear under normal weather and atmospheric conditions. 1. Warranty shall be signed by both the metal roof system manufacturer and the metal roof

system installer. 2. Maximum liability of warranty shall be no less than $0.70 per square foot of roof area.

B. Metal building system manufacturer shall provide a written warranty for 25 years against perforation of metal roof panels due to corrosion under normal weather and atmospheric conditions. 1. Warranty shall be signed by metal roof system manufacturer.

C. Metal building system manufacturer shall provide a paint film written warranty for 25 years against cracking, peeling, chalking, and fading of exterior coating on painted roof and wall panels. 1. Warranty shall be signed by metal building system or roof system manufacturer and state

that the coating contains 70 percent “Kynar 500” or “Hylar 5000” resin. 2. Metal building system manufacturer shall warrant that the coating shall not peel, crack, or

chip for 25 years. 3. For a period of 25 years, chalking shall not exceed ASTM D 4214, #8 rating and shall not

fade more than 5 color difference units in accordance with ASTM D 2244.

D. Metal Building System Manufacturer’s Certification: Metal building system manufacturer shall submit a signed written Certification 1 week before bid date, stating that the metal roof system manufacturer or approved representative will provide warranties and Inspection and Report Service specified in this specification section. 1. Warranty terms shall be submitted with bid.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Metal Building System Manufacturer: Butler Manufacturing, PO Box 419917, Kansas City, Missouri 64141. Phone 816-968-3000. Website www.butlermfg.com.

2.02 BUILDING DESCRIPTION

A. Building Dimensions: Indicated on the Drawings. 1. Horizontal Dimensions: Measure to inside face of wall sheets. 2. Eave Height: Measure from top of finished floor to intersection of insides of roof and

sidewall sheets. 3. Clear Height Between Finished Floor and Bottom of Roof Steel: Indicated on the

Drawings.

B. Primary Structural Members: 1. Primary Framing System: Butler Widespan Manufacturing framing system as specified in

this specification section. 2. Frames: Welded-up plate section columns and roof beams, complete with necessary

splice plates for bolted field assembly as specified in this specification section. 3. Bolts for Field Assembly of Primary Steel: High-strength bolts as indicated on erection

drawings of metal building system manufacturer. 4. Beam and Post Endwall Frames: Endwall corner posts, endwall roof beams, and endwall

posts as required by design criteria. 5. Exterior Columns: Welded-up "H" sections or cold-formed “C” sections. 6. Interior Columns: “H” sections or tube columns. 7. Connection of Primary Structural Members: ASTM A 325 bolts through factory-punched

holes. 8. Primary Structural Members: Paint with metal building system manufacturer's standard

primer with surface preparation as specified in this specification section.

C. Secondary Structural Members: 1. Secondary Framing System: Butler Manufacturing framing system as specified in this

specification section. 2. C/Z Purlins and Girts: Acrylic-coated G30 galvanized finish.

D. Metal Roof System: Butler Manufacturing, MR-24 metal roof system as specified in this specification section.

E. Metal Wall System: Butler Manufacturing Shadowall metal wall system as specified in this specification section.

2.03 DESIGN LOADS

A. Governing Design Code: 1. Structural design for the building structural system shall be provided by the metal building

system manufacturer for the following design criteria: a. Governing Building Code: IBC as amended b. Year/Version: 2012 c. Occupancy Category: F-1.


http://www.butlermfg.com/


B. Roof Live Load: 1. Roof live loads are loads produced during the life of the structure by moveable objects. 2. Wind, snow, seismic, or dead loads are not live loads. 3. Roof live loads are applied based on the Tributary Area as follows:

a. 0 to 200 Square Feet: 20 psf. b. 201 to 600 Square Feet: Interpolation between 200 sq ft and 600 sq ft numbers. c. 601 Square Feet or Greater: 20 psf.

C. Roof Snow Load: 1. Roof snow load used for designing the structure shall not be reduced and shall be the

product of the following criteria: a. Snow Load Coefficient (Ce): 1.0. b. Thermal Factor (Ct): 1.2. c. Snow Importance Factor (I): 1.0.

d. Ground Snow Load (Pg): 60. e. Roof Snow Load (Pf): 50.4 psf.

2. Design snow load shall include the effects of minimum flat roof load limits, rain on snow, drifting snow, and unbalanced snow load as defined in the governing building code specified above.

D. .Wind Load: 1. Wind load used for designing the structure shall be the product of the following criteria:

a. Wind Exposure Category: C. b. Wind Velocity Pressure Exposure Coefficient (Kz): 1.04. c. Wind Topographic Factor (Kzt): 1.0. d. Wind Directionality Factor (Kd): 0.85. e. Wind Velocity (V), miles per hour: 90. f. Wind Importance Factor (Iw): 1.0. g. Building Wind Load (qz): 18.5 psf.

2. Wind Pressure Coefficients and the design pressures shall be applied in accordance with the governing code.

E. Seismic Load: 1. Seismic load used for designing the structure shall be based on the following criteria:

a. Spectral response acceleration for short periods (Ss): 0.086 % g. b. Spectral response acceleration for 1-sec. period (S1): 0.021 % g. c. Site Class: D. d. Seismic Importance Factor (I): 1.0.

2. Seismic loads shall be applied in accordance with the governing code.

F. Dead Load: Dead load shall consist of the weight of building system construction, such as roof, framing, and covering members.

F. Collateral Load: 1. Collateral load in pounds per square foot shall be applied to the entire structure to account

for the weight of additional permanent materials other than the building system, such as sprinklers, mechanical systems, liner panels, electrical systems, and ceilings.

2. This allowance does not include the weight of hung equipment weighing 50 pounds or more.

3. Equipment loads of 50 pounds or more shall be indicated on the Drawings and the structure shall be strengthened as required.



4. Engineer will provide the metal building system manufacturer with the magnitude and approximate location of concentrated loads greater than 50 pounds before design of the building starts.

G. Auxiliary Loads: Auxiliary loads shall include dynamic loads., and will be defined in the Contract Documents.

H. Load Combinations: Load combinations used to design primary and secondary structural members shall be in accordance with the governing code.

2.04 DEFLECTIONS

A. Structural Members: 1. Maximum deflection of main framing members shall not exceed 1/180 of their respective

spans. 2. Maximum deflection due to snow load in roof panels and purlins shall not exceed 1/240 of

their respective spans. 3. Maximum deflection due to wind load in wall panels and girts shall not exceed 1/180 of

their respective spans.

B. Lateral deflections, or drift, at the roof level of the structure in relation to the floor or slab on grade, caused by deflection of horizontal force resisting elements, shall not exceed H/100.

C. Calculations for deflections shall be done using only the bare frame method. 1. Reductions based on engineering judgment using the assumed composite stiffness of the

building envelope shall not be allowed. 2. Drift shall be in accordance with AISC Serviceability Design Considerations for Low-Rise

Buildings. 3. Use of composite stiffness for deflection calculations is permitted only when actual

calculations for the stiffness are included with the design for the specific project. 4. When maximum deflections are specified, calculations shall be included in the design

data.

2.05 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING SYSTEM

A. General: 1. Design of Structural System: Multi-span rigid frame with tapered or straight columns and

roof beams, with gable or single-slope roof. 2. Actual Building Length:

a. Structural line to structural line. b. Same as nominal; i.e., number of bays times length of bays. c. Structural Line: Defined as inside face of wall sheets.

3. Actual Building Width: a. Structural line to structural line. b. Nominal building width.

4. Minimum Roof Slope: 1/2 inch in 12 inches. 5. Maximum Roof Slope: 1/2 inch in 12 inches. 6. Components and Parts of Structural System:

a. Indicated on the Drawings or the Specifications. b. Clearly marked. c. Erection Drawings: Supply for identification and assembly of parts. d. Drawings: Carry stamp of a registered professional engineer in Minnesota.



7. Foundations: a. Foundations, Including Anchor Rod Embedment Length: Properly designed by

qualified structural engineer, retained by other than metal building system manufacturer, in accordance with specific soil conditions for building site.

b. Reactions for Proper Design of Foundations: Supplied by metal building system manufacturer.

c. Anchor Rods: 1) Anchor Rods: Diameter: Indicated on anchor bolt layout drawings furnished by

metal building system manufacturer. 2) Anchor Rods: Supplied by Contractor, not metal building system manufacturer. 3) Anchor Rods on Moment-Resisting Column Bases: Nuts above and below

base plates.

B. Structural Steel Design: 1. Structural Mill Sections or Welded-up Plate Sections: Design in accordance with AISC

Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. 2. Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members: Design in accordance with AISI North American

Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 3. Structural System: Design in accordance with specified building code (Refer to Design

Loads and Building Codes).

C. Primary Framing: 1. Rigid Frames:

a. Frames: Welded-up plate section columns and roof beams, complete with necessary splice plates for bolted field assembly.

1).Base Plates, Cap Plates, Compression Splice Plates, and Stiffener Plates: Factory welded into place and connection holes factory fabricated. 2).Columns and Roof Beams: Fabricated complete with holes in webs and flanges for attachment of secondary structural members and bracing, except for fieldwork as noted on erection drawings furnished by metal building system manufacturer.

b. Bolts for Field Assembly of Frame Members: ASTM A 325 high-strength bolts as indicated on erection drawings furnished by metal building system manufacturer.

2.. Endwall Structural Members: Cold-formed channel members designed in accordance with

AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members or welded-up plate sections designed in accordance with AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. a. Endwall Frames: Endwall corner posts, endwall roof beams, and endwall posts as

required by design criteria. 1). Splice Plates and Base Clips: Shop fabricated complete with bolt connection

holes. 2). Base Plates, Cap Plates, Compression Splice Plates, and Stiffener Plates:

Factory welded into place and connection holes shop fabricated. 3). Beams and Posts: Factory fabricated complete with holes for attachment of

secondary structural members, except for field work as noted on erection drawings furnished by metal building system manufacturer.

b. Intermediate Frames: Substituted for end-wall roof beams, when specified. 1). Factory fabricate necessary endwall posts and holes for connection to I intermediate frame used in endwall.

D. Secondary Structural Members:



1. Purlins: a. Purlins:

1)”Z"-shaped, precision-roll-formed, acrylic-coated G30 galvanized steel in different gauges to meet specified loading conditions. 2)7-inch, 8-1/2-inch, 10-inch, or 11-1/2-inch-deep "Z" sections.

b. Outer Flange of Purlins: Factory-punched holes for panel connections. c. Attach purlins to main frames and endwalls by 1/2-inch-diameter bolts through

end seat of truss purlin. d. Brace purlins on top and bottom chords spaced at intervals indicated on erection

drawings furnished by metal building system manufacturer. e. Concentrated Loads: Hung at purlin panel points.

2. Eave Members: a. Eave Struts: Factory punched 7-inch, 8-1/2-inch, 10-inch, or 11-1/2-inch-deep

"C" sections, precision-roll-formed, acrylic-coated G30 galvanized steel in different gauges to meet specified loading conditions.

3. Girts: a. "Z" or “C”-shaped, precision-roll-formed, acrylic-coated G30 galvanized steel in

different gauges to meet specified loading conditions. b. 7-inch, 8-1/2-inch, 10-inch, or 11-1/2-inch-deep "Z" or “C” sections. c. Outer Flange of Girts: Factory-punched holes for panel connections.

4. Bracing: a. .Locate bracing as indicated on the Drawings. b .Diagonal Bracing:

1) Hot-rolled rods of sizes indicated on the Erection Drawings. 2) Attach to columns and roof beams as indicated on the Drawings.

c. Optional fixed-base wind posts or pinned-base portal frames may be substituted for wall rod bracing on buildings as required. d. Flange Braces and Purlin Braces: Cold formed and installed as indicated on the drawings.

E. Welding 1. Welding Procedures, Operator Qualifications, and Welding Quality Standards: AWS D1.1

- Structural Welding Code – Steel and AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code – Sheet Steel. 2. Welding inspection, other than visual inspection as defined by AWS D1.1, paragraph 6.9,

shall be identified and negotiated before bidding. 3. Certification of Welder Qualification: Supply when requested.

F. Painting of Structural Steel Framing System: 1. General:

a. Structural Steel: Prime paint as temporary protection against ordinary atmospheric conditions.

b. Perform subsequent finish painting, if required, in field as specified in the painting section.

c. Before painting, clean steel of loose rust, loose mill scale, dirt, and other foreign materials.

d. Steel Fabricator: Not required to sand blast, flame clean, or pickle steel before painting, unless otherwise specified.

2. Primary Frames: a. Clean steel in accordance with SSPC-SP2. b. Factory cover steel with 1 coat of gray water-reducible alkyd primer paint formulated to equal or exceed performance requirements SSPC-Paint 25. c. Minimum Coating Thickness: 1.0 mil.



3. Secondary Structural Members – Roll-Formed: a.Hot-dipped zinc coating, ASTM A 653, G30; followed by 1 coat of clear acrylic finish. b.Acrylic-Coated G30 Galvanized Steel: Equal or exceed performance requirements of SSPC Paint-25.

2.06 METAL ROOF SYSTEM

A. Metal Roof System: Butler Manufacturing “MR-24®” roof system.

B. Roof System Design: 1. Design roof panels in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design

of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. 2. Design roof paneling system for a minimum roof slope of 1/4 inch in 12 inches. 3 .Design roof paneling system to support design live, snow, and wind loads. 4 .Endwall Trim and Roof Transition Flashings: Allow roof panels to move relative to wall

panels and/or parapets as roof expands and contracts with temperature changes.

C. Roof System Performance Testing: 1. UL Wind Uplift Classification Rating, UL 580: Class 90. 2. Structural Performance Under Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference: Test roof system in

accordance with ASTM E 1592.

D. Roof Panels: 1. Factory roll-formed, 24 inches wide, with 2 major corrugations, 2 inches high (2-3/4 inches

including seam), 24 inches on center. 2. Flat of the Panel: Cross flutes 6 inches on center, perpendicular to major corrugations in

entire length of panel to reduce wind noise. 3. Variable Width Panels:

a. For roof lengths not evenly divisible by the 2’-0” panel width, factory-manufactured variable-width (9-inch, 12-inch, 15-inch, 18-inch, and 21-inch-wide) panels shall be used to ensure modular, weathertight roof installation.

b. Minimum Length: 15 feet. c. Supply maximum possible panel lengths.

4.Panel Material and Finish:

a.. 24-gauge steel coated both sides with layer of acrylic-coated Galvalume aluminum-zinc alloy (approximately 55 percent aluminum, 45 percent zinc) applied by continuous hot-dip method. b.Minimum 0.55-ounce coated weight per square foot as determined by triple-spot test,

ASTM A 792. c.Apply clear acrylic film for additional protection.

E. Provision for Expansion and Contraction: 1. Provision for Thermal Expansion Movement of Roof Panels: Clips with movable tab.

a. Stainless Steel Tabs: Factory centered on roof clip when installed to ensure full movement in either direction.

b. Maximum Force of 8 Pounds: Required to initiate tab movement. c. Each Clip: Accommodates a minimum of 1.25-inch movement in either direction.

2. Roof: Provide for thermal expansion and contraction without detrimental effects on roof panels, with plus or minus 100-degree F temperature difference between interior structural framework of building and of roof panels.



F. .Fasteners: 1. Make connections of roof panels to structural members, except at eaves, with clips with

movable stainless steel tabs, seamed into standing seam side lap. 2. Fasten panel clips to structural members with “ScruboltTM” fasteners in accordance with

erection drawings furnished by metal building system manufacturer, using factory-punched holes in structural members. a. Fasteners: Metal-backed rubber washer to serve as torque indicator.

3. Exposed fasteners penetrating metal roof membrane at the following locations do not exceed the frequency listed: a. Basic Panel System: 0 per square foot. b. High Eave Trim, No Parapet: 2 per linear foot. c. Exterior Eave Gutter: 2 per linear foot. d. Panel Splices: 2 per linear foot. e. Gable Trim: 0 per linear foot. f. High Eave with Parapet: 0 per linear foot. g. Ridge: 0 per linear foot. h. Low Eave Structural: 1.5 per linear foot.

G. Accessories: 1.. Accessories (i.e., gutters, fascia): Standard with metal building system manufacturer,

unless otherwise noted and furnished as specified. 2. Exterior Metal Coating on Gutters, Downspouts, Gable Trim, and Eave Trim: “Butler-

CoteTM 500 FP” finish system, full-strength, 70 percent “Kynar 500” . 3. Location of Standard Accessories: Indicated on erection drawings furnished by metal

building system manufacturer. 4. Material used in flashing and transition parts and furnished as standard by metal building

system manufacturer may or may not match roof panel material. a. Parts: Compatible and not cause corrosive condition. b. Copper and Lead Materials: Do not use with Galvalume panels.

5. “Sunlite Strip” Self-Curbing unit skylights by BMC a. One hundred percent impact-modified prismatic acrylic lens (Class 3) warranted leak free for 20 years. Triple Dome b. Extruded aluminum frame (ASTM B 221) with insulated thermal break and integral condensate gutter. c. Install skylights in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions as located on drawings into roof panel seams. d. Clean skylights inside and out after sealants have cured.

H. Energy Conservation: 1 Insulate purlins to eliminate "thermal short circuits" between purlins and roof panels. 2. Minimize heat loss (thermal short circuit) caused by compression of blanket insulation

between structural members and roof panels by use of thermal block at each purlin location.

2.07 METAL WALL SYSTEM

A. Exterior Metal Wall System: Butler ManufacturingTM “ShadowallTM” wall system.

B. Wall System Design: Design wall panels in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

C. Wall Panels:



1. Roll-formed panels, 3 feet wide with 4 major corrugations, 1-7/16 inches high, 12 inches on center, with 2 minor corrugations between each of the major corrugations entire length of panel.

2. One piece from base to building eave. 3. Each Panel Corrugation: Fastener alignment groove to center fastener within corrugation. 4. Exposed Panel Side Laps: Hemmed to eliminate raw cut panel edge. 5. Upper End of Panels: Fabricate with mitered cut to match corrugations of “Butlerib® II”

roof panels of 1/2 inch to 12 inches and square cut for all other roof panels and slopes. 6. Factory punch or field drill wall panels at panel ends and match factory-punched or field-

drilled holes in structural members for proper alignment. 7. Panel Material and Finish:

a. 16-gauge painted Galvalume aluminum-zinc alloy (approximately 55 percent aluminum, 45 percent zinc), ASTM A 792. b. Paint with exterior colors of “Butler-CoteTM 500 FP” finish system, full-strength, 70 percent “Kynar 500”

D. Fasteners: 1. Wall Panel-to-Structural Connections: Torx-head “ScruboltTM” or Torx-head self-drilling

screws. 2. Wall Panel-to-Panel Connections: Torx-head self-drilling screws. 3. Fastener Locations: Indicated on erection drawings furnished by metal building system

manufacturer. 4. Exposed Fasteners: Factory painted to match wall color.

E. Accessories: 1. Accessories (i.e., doors, windows, louvers): Standard with metal building system

manufacturer, unless otherwise noted and furnished as specified. 2. Location of Standard Accessories: Indicated on erection drawings furnished by metal

building system manufacturer.

2.08 BUILDING INSULATION

A. Laminated Fiberglass: Owens-Corning Fiberglas, NAIMA 202, “Certified R” metal building insulation. B. Roof Insulation: 1. Nominal Thickness: 3 inches 2. Certified R-Value: 9 C. Roof Assembly U-Factor: 9.5 Btu/hr/sq/ft/deg.F D. Wall Insulation: 1. Nominal Thickness: 3 inches. 2. Certified R-Value: 9 E. Wall Assembly U-Factor: 9.5 Btu/hr/sqft/deg F. F. Roof and Wall Insulation Facing: WMP-50. 1. 0.0015-inch-thick, UV-stabilized, white polypropylene film laminated to 30-pound Kraft paper/metalized polyester, reinforced with glass-fiber and polyester scrim. 2. Adhere facing to Owens-Corning Fiberglass “Certified R”, NAIMA 202, fiberglass

blanket.



3. Assembly of Insulation Blanket and Facing: a. Flame Spread Rating: Less than 25. b. UL Label: Submit as specified in Submittals article of this section. c. Perm Rating: 0.02. 2.09 INSULATION SUPPORT SYSTEM A. Insulation Support System: Butler Manufacturing TM “Sky-Web ® II insulation support system. B. Description: 1. Compatible with roof system. 2. Limit to “over-the-purlin” type insulation systems. 3. Knotted Mesh: a. Grid: Nominal 2 ¾ inches by 2 ¾ inches. b. Material: Twisted twine of DuPont nylon Type 6-6 fiber. c. Mesh Covering Interior Bays: 2- pound twine. 1. Five-Foot Strip Along Edge: #30 twine, with edge color coded for

identification. 4. Double selvage along the 2 edges in machine direction. 5. Furnish up to 60 feet wide by building width. a. Cover 1 or 2 bays of building length. b. Extend eave-to-eave across building. C. Physical Properties: 1. Minimum Tensile Strength: a. #21 Twine: 205 pounds. b. #30 Twine: 265 pounds. 2. Runnage: a. #21 Twine: 960 feet per pound.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.02 INSTALLATION INSULATION

A. Install pre-engineered building insulation system in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and the approved shop drawings..

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Install in exterior spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.

D. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. E. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of the sealed liner fabric and around

mechanical and electrical services within plane of insulation.

END OF SECTION 13120


Division 14 Conveying Systems

(Not Used)

Division 15 Mechanical

SECTION 15020

MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. This Section applies to and forms part of each of the sections of Division l5, and together with each section, is subject to the following requirements: 1. Instructions to Bidders 2. General Conditions 3. Supplementary General Conditions 4. Division l: General Requirements

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Work under this Division of the Specifications consists of furnishing all construction

engineering, supervision, labor, equipment, fixtures, materials, all incidentals, related items and appurtenances, and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation of Work in strict accordance with these Specifications and Drawings.

B. All work shall be finished, tested and ready for operation and use.

C. The term "provide" shall mean "furnish and install complete and ready for use".

1.03 DISCREPANCIES OR OMISSIONS FROM SPECIFICATIONS OR DRAWINGS

A. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies in, or omissions from the specifications or drawings. The Owner's Construction Representative will not be responsible for any oral instructions or modifications of the specifications or drawings. Written interpretations will be made only by Addenda. Discrepancies discovered during construction shall immediately be called to the attention of the Construction Representative for decision.

1.04 DRAWINGS

A. The Drawings indicate the extent and general layout of the mechanical systems intended for the building. Furnish offsets, fittings, valves, and accessories as required but not shown because of the scale of the Drawings.

B. In general, the mechanical drawings are drawn to scale as indicated, however, do not scale the mechanical drawings. Refer to the Architectural drawings for dimensions, details of construction, locations of partitions, walls, suspended ceilings, ceiling heights, and other pertinent information. Architects drawings shall not take precedence over field measurements.

C. Coordinate work with the work of other trades. Make reasonable modifications in layout to avoid conflict with the work of other trades and for proper execution of the work at no additional cost.

D. All drawings and specifications shall be considered in bidding. The drawings and specifications are

complimentary, and what is called for in either shall be as binding as though called for in both.

15020-1 Mechanical General Provisions T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

1.05 SUBSTITUTION REQUESTS

A. Refer to Section 01100, Substitution of Equipment and Products, for requirements on product and equipment substitutions.

1.06 INSPECTION OF SITE

A. Contractor shall inspect the site of the proposed work and note the conditions under which the work is to be performed.

1.07 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Contractor shall obtain all permits required for the performance of the Mechanical Work and shall

submit complete certified plans and specifications with the permit application to the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Contractor shall pay for all sales taxes, fees, licenses, permits, charges for connection to outside services, use of property for storage of materials, and other costs pertaining to the Mechanical Work.

C. Contractor shall coordinate and request all inspections and approvals as required. Contractor shall notify the Owner's Construction Representative of date and time of all coordinated inspections and shall submit certificates of inspection and final approval of the inspection authority.

1.08 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Construction shall be in conformance with the latest amended edition of the State Building Code,

including requirements of other codes, standards and regulations adopted by reference as a part thereof. Contractor shall comply with any requirements of the Drawings and Specifications that exceed the State Building Code requirements.

B. All materials, equipment and their installation shall conform to the applicable sections of the following current Codes: 1. International Building Code (IBC). 2. International Mechanical Code, (IMC). 3. Minnesota Plumbing Code, Chapter 47l5. 4. International Fire Code (IFC).

1.09 WORKMANSHIP

A. All work shall be performed in a craftsmanship manner by workmen thoroughly trained and

experienced in the work they are to perform.

1.10 ACCIDENT PREVENTION

A. Comply with the "Safety and Engineering Practices" set forth in the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" published by the Associated General Contractors of America and with all applicable state and local safety laws, regulations and ordinances as well as the Owner's established safety rules.


B. Provide and properly maintain warning signs and lights, barricades, railings and other safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work as required by the conditions and progress of the work.

1.11 SITE AND BUILDING CLEANLINESS

A. During construction, provide for orderly storage and removal of all construction debris, cartons, packing cases and other such items in a manner to reduce fire and accident hazards.

B. Contractor shall clean the working area each day and shall remove all trash and waste materials, and

shall maintain the Site in a neat and orderly condition throughout the construction period.

C. Contractor shall daily, or as it becomes apparent, pick up all garbage, litter, debris, and other materials attributable to the Work or the activities of Contractor=s employees, Sub- Contractors, and suppliers that accumulates on property in the vicinity of the Site.

1.12 WORK SCHEDULE

A. Examine the Drawings and Specifications to determine the extent and details of work to be performed.

B. Submit a construction work schedule for approval to the General Contractor.

C. The schedule must be suitable to all parties concerned.

D. The schedule shall be a guide to construction operations and progress shall conform as nearly as

possible to the schedule. Notify the General Contractor at least one week in advance of any changes to the schedule.

E. Be responsible for scheduling and arranging all mechanical work for the orderly progress of the

project.

1.13 COORDINATION OF WORK

A. Coordinate the Mechanical Work with the General Contractor and other Sub-Contractors.

B. Inform the General Contractor at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of any service interruption or disruption to construction operations and estimate the duration of interruption or disruption. Do not proceed until the General Contractor has been fully informed and has granted his approval.

1.14 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Contractor shall maintain one set of drawings at the job site for use as a record copy. Each change order or other revisions, deletions, or additions, shall be clearly marked and noted by colored marker. Where any material, ductwork, piping or system component is installed different from that shown, record such differences clearly and neatly. This record set of drawings shall be submitted to the Owner's Construction Representative upon completion of the project.

B. Contractor shall note on the record drawings the elevations and/or inverts of water main, sanitary sewer and storm sewer where they enter or exit through and beneath the building


foundation. Contractor shall record dimensions from the building to fuel tanks, oil piping, etc. located outside the building.

1.15 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit Shop Drawings for all materials and equipment in accordance with General Requirements Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.

B. All cuts shall have complete dimensions, ratings, installation requirements, etc.

C. Shop Drawings will not be accepted for review by the Architect/Engineer until after they have been checked and approved by the Contractor as evidenced by his approval stamp and signature.

D. Where the specifications state "or equal" or "or approved equal", manufacturers other than those

listed may be substituted in accordance with Section 01100 - Substitution of Equipment and Products.

1.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Submit two (2) copies of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for all mechanical systems and equipment in accordance with General Requirements Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS. 1. Manuals shall be bound in new hard-backed 3 ring binders with the title "Operations and

Maintenance Manuals" and the project title clearly printed on the front cover. 2. Provide an index at the beginning of the manual for the sections included in the manual. All

sections shall be referenced with plastic tabs. 3. Include at the front of the manual a complete listing of the Owner's Construction

Representative, Engineer, Contractors and Sub-Contractors on the project. Listing shall include names, addresses and phone numbers for each.

4. Manuals shall be arranged in order similar to the specifications. All major pieces of equipment shall be referenced with tabs. At the beginning of each section, the equipment supplier's name, address and phone number shall be provided.

5. Data for equipment included in the manuals shall include: a. Approved shop drawings clearly showing the models, sizes and capacities of equipment

installed. b. Operations Manuals with step-by-step instructions for operating the equipment. c. Maintenance Manuals from the manufacturer of each piece of equipment including

instructions on installation, maintenance and lubrication. d. Manuals shall include parts list for all replacement parts.

6. The following items shall be included in the manuals for the Owner's information: a. Testing and Balancing Reports on the air and water systems as specified under Section

15990. b. Factory start-up reports.

B. Operations and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to final observation of the Work. The Engineer will forward approved Manuals to the Owner's Construction Representative.


1.17 COMPLETION

A. The work shall be completed for service on the date stipulated in the Contract.

B. Correlate and finish the work so that the affected areas and systems will be adjusted, cleaned and placed in proper working order at the time of the substantial completion observation.

1.18 CLEAN-UP

A. Prior to final inspection, thoroughly clean the surfaces of all floor drains, fixtures and equipment furnished and installed under this Work. Remove all stickers, rust, stains, and other foreign matter or discoloration.

1.19 WARRANTIES

A. Mechanical Contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and material against defects for at least one year from the date of Owner acceptance. Mechanical Contractor shall repair or replace any defects in mechanical workmanship, materials, fixtures, and equipment that appear or cause trouble of any kind, within the one year period, without any cost to the Owner.

B. Refer to technical sections for extended warranties on equipment where stipulated.

PART 2: PRODUCTS (Not Applicable): PART 3: EXECUTION (Not Applicable):



SECTION 15050

BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers basic materials and methods and applies to and forms a part of each of the sections of Division l5.

B. The Work shall be in accordance with this and other applicable sections of these specifications and

the requirements of Section l5O2O - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. The following sections apply to and form a part of this Section:

Section 15060 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS Section 15140 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS Section 15170 MOTORS Section 15185 ELECTRICAL Section 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION


A. The physical and chemical properties of all materials, design, performance characteristics and methods of construction of all equipment shall be in accordance with applicable current editions of the following Standards, references and guidelines: 1. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL). 2. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA). 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 5. American Water/Works Association (AWWA). 6. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE). 7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA). 8. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA). 9. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI). 10. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB). 11. American Association of Balancing Contractors (AABC). 12. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI). 13. American Society of Plumbing Engineers (ASPE). 14. American Gas Association (AGA). 15. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 16. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 17. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 18. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI). 19. Plastic Pipe and Fittings Association (PPFA).

15050-1 Basic Mechanical Materials & Methods T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

1.04 DESIGN BASIS

A. The design and the physical sizes of equipment shown to scale on the Drawings are based on the

manufacturers and model numbers of equipment scheduled on the Drawings. The scheduled equipment establishes the quality basis and performance required. The Drawings were prepared to show the service connections, minimum clearances and accommodations required for the scheduled equipment.

B. If the Contractor elects to substitute equipment specified as "or equal" or "or approved equal", or to

substitute equipment by other manufacturers where the manufacturer's name is added by addendum as "approved equal manufacturer", he shall be responsible for the space requirements, configuration, changes in connections, bases, supports, vibration isolation, structural members, openings in structure and its relationship to other equipment and services that may be affected by its use. Contractor shall submit scale drawings to the Engineer to show how the substituted equipment will be accommodated including manufacturer's recommended clearances and servicing provisions.

PART 2: PRODUCTS (Not Applicable): PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 RECEIPT, HANDLING AND STORAGE

A. Contractor shall be responsible for receiving delivery of the mechanical materials, fixtures and/or equipment.

B. Provide personnel to meet all delivery trucks, inspect the equipment and sign for the delivery,

unload the trucks and move the equipment to locations agreed upon in advance. Uncrate the equipment and properly dispose of all crating materials off-site.

C. The Owner will not provide equipment, labor or handling assistance for this work.

D. If the materials, fixtures and/or equipment must be stored on-site prior to installation, Contractor shall move the material, fixtures and/or equipment to the location designated and provide temporary protection against weather and physical damage as directed by the Owner's Construction Representative.

3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATIONS

A. Provide all necessary rigging, scaffolding, tools, tackle, labor, etc. necessary for the complete installation of the mechanical equipment.

B. Adapt work to job conditions and install work to clear beams, joists and light fixtures. Adjust risers and avoid interferences with windows and openings. Raise or lower work to permit the passing of ductwork or the work of other trades, all as required or as job conditions dictate, without additional cost to the Owner.

C. All equipment shall be installed and connected with best engineering practices and in

accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Ductwork, piping and


electrical connections, valves and appurtenances recommended by the manufacturer or as required for proper operation shall be furnished and installed to complete the installation.

D. All equipment shall be installed and located to facilitate accessibility for maintenance and/or

replacement. 3.03 WELDING

A. All welding shall be performed by certified welders. Certification shall be for the type of work being performed and shall be accomplished in accordance with ASME "Qualification Standard for Welding Procedures, Welders and Welding Operations."

B. Contractor shall submit copies of the welder's certification to the General Contractor's construction superintendent prior to any welds to be made by any welder.

C. All welds shall be stronger than the parent metal. A minimum of two (2) passes shall be used on all arc welded joints.

3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Do all cutting and patching necessary for the installation of the Mechanical Work, except where otherwise indicated. All cutting shall be done in a manner directed by the General Contractor. Patching shall match adjacent surfaces.

B. Do not cut structural members.

C. Core drill all openings up to 10 inches in diameter.

3.05 ACCESSIBILITY

A. Advise the General Contractor of spaces and clearances required to accommodate the Mechanical Work. Locate all equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions.

B. Floor, wall and ceiling access panels as required to service valves, controls, dampers, fire dampers and equipment will be provided under the general construction work.

C. Coordinate required locations with the General Contractor. 3.06 PAINTING

A. Mechanical Contractor shall touch-up the surface marring on all prefinished mechanical equipment to match existing factory finish.



SECTION 15060

PIPES, PIPE FITTINGS, VALVES AND UNIONS PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers pipes, pipe fittings, valves and unions and applies to and forms a part of each of the following sections of Division 15:

Section 15400 PLUMBING SYSTEMS

B. Pipes, pipe fittings, valves and unions shall be in accordance with this and other applicable

sections of these specifications and requirements of Section 15020 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS and SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS.

PART 2: PRODUCTS: 2.01 PIPE, PIPE FITTINGS, VALVES AND UNIONS

A. Plumbing pipe, pipe fittings, valves and unions are specified in Section 15410. PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 ABOVE GROUND PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install piping, valves and specialties indicated and as sized on the Drawings and supported as specified in Section 15140.

2. Locate piping as dimensioned on the Drawings. If not dimensioned, locate piping by scaling Drawings.

3. Coordinate piping locations with the work of Other Trades. 4. All piping shall be installed parallel or perpendicular to adjacent walls and partitions, unless

otherwise shown. All risers shall be plumb. 5. Under no circumstances shall any pipe connection be made by punching a hole in the pipe

and inserting a branch take-off.

B. Clearances: 1. Provide clearance around each pipe to accommodate the specified insulation thickness and

jacketing and to permit its free movement due to thermal expansion.

1. Preparing and Protecting Pipe: All piping shall be blown out with compressed air or otherwise cleaned internally immediately prior to installation into the pipe line.

15060-1 Pipe, Pipe Fittings, Valves and Unions T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

2. Cap or cover all open piping during erection to prevent entry of foreign material.

C. Pipe Terminations for Future: 1. Cap terminated ends of pipe mains and branches where indicated for future extension.

D. Changes in Pipe Sizes:

1. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with reducing elbows, reducing tees or increasers. a. Increasers may be concentric. b. Reducers shall be eccentric:

(l) Flat on top for water.

E. Branch Take-Offs: 1. Service water branch take-offs shall be off the top of the mains and at a 9O degree angle,

unless otherwise shown.

F. Equipment Piping: 1. All branch piping for connections to equipment shall consist of at least two elbows to

ensure proper alignment and to eliminate pipe stresses on the equipment. 2. Provide flanges or screwed unions at all connections to equipment.

G. Piping to Automatic Control Valves:

1. Piping to automatic control valves shall be run line size as close as possible to valve connections. Install eccentric reducers at valve inlets and concentric increasers at valve outlets. Provide unions or flanges for easy removal of automatic control valves. Strainers ahead of control valves shall be line size.

H. Pipe Anchors:

1. Provide pipe anchors where shown on drawings and where they are otherwise needed to prevent excessive movement of piping and/or excessive strain on piping and equipment connections.

I. Spring Hangers:

1. Provide spring hangers where shown on drawings to prevent excessive forces from being transmitted to building structure.

J. Piping Near Electrical Panels:

1. Where it is not possible to avoid installing pipe joints or valves in piping within 3'-6" in horizontal direction from electrical panels or equipment, provide drip pan, sized to afford protection and constructed of properly supported galvanized sheet metal.

K. Wells and Pressure Taps:

Install wells and pressure taps as required for thermometers and pressure gauge locations specified in Section 15130.

3.02 CUTTING AND THREADING

A. Pipe 2" and smaller shall be cut, threaded, and reamed with appropriate sharp tools.

B. Pipe shall be accurately cut to measurement. Springing or forcing of piping resulting from error in measurement is not acceptable.


C. Clean and remove all metal chips, cutting oil and other foreign material from both inside and

outside of pipe before making up joints.

D. Where welding is required, remove cutting oils with cleaning solvents.

3.03 SCREWED CONNECTIONS

A. Threads for screwed connections shall be ANSI standard tapered pipe threads B2.l.

B. Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fitting before making up joint.

C. Screwed connections shall be made using approved pipe thread compound or sealant.

D. Obtain full thread engagement in fittings as described in ANSI B2.l. Backing off threaded joints for alignment shall not be permitted.

E. Whenever a threaded joint is separated, remove old compound or sealant remaining on all

threads before applying new. 3.04 WELDED CONNECTIONS

A. Standard seamless butt weld elbows, tees and reducers shall be used with all welded pipe. Weldolets, Threadolets, or Socolets may be used on piping 4" and larger where pipe reduction is two (2) sizes or more.

3.05 FLANGED CONNECTIONS

A. Clearance between flanged faces shall be such that joints can be gasketed and bolted tight without producing strain on the piping system.

B. Connections shall be made with faces parallel and bores concentric. 3.06 SOLDERED CONNECTIONS

A. All soldered type joints shall be made with materials specified for the respective service. The amount of solder and flux used per connection shall be the minimum required to assure a tight joint. All soldered pipe ends shall be reamed with appropriate sharp tools prior to soldering.

3.07 DIELECTRIC CONNECTIONS

A. Dielectric connections shall be used when joining piping of dissimilar metals such as copper to steel, cast iron, or malleable iron.

B. Connections shall be made with dielectric screwed unions or with flanges having non-

conducting gasket, washers and bolt inserts.

C. Underground utility services entering buildings shall have dielectric connections installed on the outlet side of the first shutoff valve.


3.08 PLACEMENT OF VALVES

A. Furnish and install shut-off valves at the following locations: 1. Each branch line take-off from main supply pipe or header. 2. At all end of line equipment. 3. Ahead of each control valve. 4. Each branch line take-off from main supply pipe or header indicated for future extension or

connection. Cap outlet side of shut-off valve. 5. On strainer blow-down piping.

B. Furnish and install drain valves at the low points of each water piping system for drainage.

C. Furnish and install designated valves at other locations indicated on the Drawings.

3.09 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Furnish and set pipe sleeves where pipes and tubes pass through walls, partitions, floors and roof. 1. Sleeves in masonry walls and floor, in fire rated gypsum board partitions, and in masonry or

steel deck roofs shall be zinc coated steel pipe. 2. Sleeves in non-fire rated gypsum board partitions shall be zinc-coated sheet steel. 3. Sleeves shall be at least two nominal pipe sizes larger than the through- going pipe or tube.

For insulated pipes and tubes, the sleeve shall be large enough to accommodate the specified insulation thickness allowing at least l/4" annular space between the insulation and the sleeve.

4. Each pipe and tube shall be individually sleeved. 5. Floor sleeves shall extend 2" above the finished floor. 6. Roof sleeves shall extend from 4" below to 12" above the roof deck and shall be furnished

with welded attachment brackets. Furnish and install a weather skirt for each roof sleeve. 7. For below grade wall sleeves, the opening between the pipe and sleeve shall be sealed with

a modular wall seal. Installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. 3.10 ESCUTCHEON PLATES

A. Furnish and install chrome plated escutcheon plates at floor, wall, roof and ceiling penetrations by uninsulated pipe and tubing in finished areas. Escutcheon plates shall completely cover penetration holes and any spalling of the wall, shall be flush with adjoining surfaces and shall be secured in place.

3.11 PRESSURE TESTS

A. General:

1. All piping systems shall be tested after erection and before concealing or covering and connecting to fixtures and equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall arrange and pay for all tests of mechanical systems as required by code and as specified. Any materials or workmanship found faulty shall be immediately replaced or repaired and sections or systems retested.

2. Provide all gauges, tools, pumps, gas, air or other equipment required for testing. 3. Tests shall be made in the presence of the appropriate inspectors and/or the Owner's

Construction Representative.


4. Any damage resulting from leakage of piping during the testing or guarantee periods shall be repaired at the expense of the Mechanical Contractor.

B. All piping shall prove absolutely tight under required tests.

C. Remedy all defects disclosed as the result of the tests. Repeat as necessary until test results are

acceptable.

D. Certificates shall be furnished to the Architect/Engineer that tests have been satisfactorily completed.



SECTION 15065

PROCESS PIPING AND VALVES PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Process wastewater and air piping

B. Valves, meters, and other piping accessories

C. Pipe installation and testing 1.02 GENERAL

A. All Material and Appurtenances shall be furnished by established and reputable manufacturers. All material and appurtenant items shall be new and of first class construction, designed and guaranteed to perform the service required, shall conform to the Drawings and the following Specifications, and shall be the product of the listed manufacturer or similar and equal thereto as approved by the ENGINEER.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings and product data on all equipment, including: 1. Affidavits of Compliance with the applicable AWWA Specifications shall be submitted for all

products and materials specified to conform thereto. 2. Piping Materials Data. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval the proposed pipe and

fitting manufacturer’s data on the material selected before Shop Drawings are prepared. This submittal shall contain adequate information on pipe thickness or class, method of connection, lining, etc.

3. Piping layout drawings showing all fittings, hanger and support locations and styles, pipe spool pieces. Coordinate layout drawings with equipment to be furnished.

4. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals, and shall be specifically identified with the appropriate Victaulic Style or Series number.

5. Coating information.

B. Wiring Drawings showing power and instrumentation wiring configuration for meters and solenoids, where used.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manual. Provide copies of complete operation and maintenance information.

D. Pressure test and gauge calibration results.

15065-1 Process Piping and Valves T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Above Ground Wastewater/Sludge Piping 1. Pipe: Ductile iron, AWWA C115, Class 53 2. Internal Lining: cement lining conforming to AWWA C104 3. External Coating: Factory-applied primer for field coating in accordance with Section 09900.

Primer shall be compatible with the finish coatings specified 4. Joints: Flanged, ANSI/AWWA C115/A21.15, 250 psi pressure rating 5. Fittings: Short body, flanged with full faced gaskets, lined and coated as specified above,

AWWA C110 6. Testing: Hydrostatic method.

B. Buried Wastewater/Sludge Piping

1. Pipe: Ductile iron, AWWA C151 (12-inch and smaller: Class 52; 14-inch and larger: Class 51) 2. Internal Lining: cement lining conforming to AWWA C104 3. External Coating: Bituminous coating 4. Joints: Push on joints conforming to AWWA C111. Where restrained joints are required, use

either retainer gland or tie rods and submit for approval. 5. Fittings: Mechanical joint, lined and coated as specified above 6. Testing: Hydrostatic method.

C. Buried Air Piping

1. Pipe: Ductile iron, AWWA C151 (12-inch and smaller: Class 52; 14-inch and larger: Class 51) 2. Internal Lining: none 3. External Coating: Bituminous coating 4. Joints: Push on joints conforming to AWWA C111. Where restrained joints are required, use

either retainer gland or tie rods and submit for approval. 5. Fittings: Mechanical joint, lined and coated as specified above 6. Testing: Hydrostatic method.

2.02 VALVES

A. General 1. Valves shall be designed and guaranteed to perform the service required, shall be installed as

shown on the Drawings, and shall conform to the following specifications. 2. Cast iron valve components: Cast from a superior quality of iron per ASTM A126. Valve bodies

and bonnets 10” and larger shall conform to Class B material. Those of smaller valves shall conform to Class A material. All castings shall be clean and sound, without defects of any kind. No plugging, welding or repairing of defects will be allowed.

3. Unless shown or specified otherwise, manually operated valves shall be equipped with a mechanism which will allow the valve to be opened or closed with a force of not more than 40 pounds applied to the nut, crank or handwheel.

4. Handwheels, and other operators shall close in a clockwise direction. Manually- operated valves with the centerline of the handwheel 6’-6” or higher above the floor shall be equipped with chainwheel operators. Chains shall be sherardized, run in galvanized shrouded chainwheels, and provided with galvanized chain guides.

5. All valves shall be tested and adjusted in accordance with the Specifications for the respective piping system.


2.03 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Taps. Pipe and fittings shall be tapped for drains, gauge connections, air release valves, sample cocks, etc., and as further shown on the Drawings and/or specified. Taps in pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Bosses shall be provided on the fittings only where specifically required on the Drawings. 1. Taps for sampling shall be provided with a stop of the size shown or specified. 2. Pipe tapping shall comply with the minimum thickness as required in the ANSI A21.51

Appendix X for 3 threads. If adequate pipe thickness does not exist, the tap shall be made with a tapped saddle. Tapped saddle shall be Mueller Co. Figure H-1045, Clow Figure F-1280, or equal.

B. Blind Flanges shall be provided at the locations shown, and shall be installed with full face rubber

gaskets, bolts, and nuts. Provide companion flange drilling and threading where shown on the Drawings.

C. Sleeve couplings: Furnish couplings designed for type and size of pipe. 1. Include harnesses, connecting rods or locking couplings per manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Manufacturers: Dresser, Rockwell, or equal

D. Split-Sleeve couplings: Furnish split-sleeve type couplings in lieu of sleeve couplings; designed for type and size of pipe. 1. Include restraint rings, o-ring gaskets, and nuts and bolts per manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Manufacturer: Victaulic Depend-O-Lok®, or approved equal.

E. Flange coupling adaptors: Provide where indicated on drawings or where needed for assembly. Design adaptors to permit installation of flanges without welding or threading.

F. Flare Fittings: Piping, where shown on the Drawings, shall be provided with cast iron flanged-flare or grooved-end-flare fittings as manufactured by Victaulic, Clow, ACIP or equal.

G. Pipe Sleeves and wall pipes: Provide ductile iron sleeves or wall pipes, Clow series 1400 or equal.

H. Link type pipe seals: 1. Furnish rubber link seals with stainless steel hardware. 2. Size seal to match opening and pipe size. 3. Manufacturer: Link-Seal or equal

I. Swivel Joint: Style 30, fabricated steel with precision-ground ball bearings and Buna-N O- ring seal, OPW Engineered Systems 3400 Series or approved equal.

2.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Supports and Hangers shall conform to ANSI B31.10, except as modified in this Section or on the Drawings. See Section 15063 for additional requirements.

B. Design Hanger and Support Systems using stock or production parts.

C. Design Hangers for all conditions of operation, including pressure testing. Allow free expansion and


contraction and prevent excessive stresses from being transferred to equipment or structures.

D. Weight and piping stresses shall not be transferred to pumps and other equipment. 1. Provide means of vertical adjustment for horizontal pipe runs. Hanger rods shall be subject to

tensile loading only. 2. Paint hangers prior to final installation. Hanger surfaces in contact with the pipe and the

adjacent pipe surface shall be painted.

E. Maximum Interval between hangers is 8 feet. Codes and equipment requirements may require lesser spacing. 1. Support pipe at all changes in direction, and at dead ends, valves and tees. 2. Support riser piping independent of horizontal piping. Support risers at each floor level,

minimum. 3. Allow for free expansion and contraction.

2.05 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Pressure gauges shall be furnished and installed as shown on the Drawings and as required for the proper operation of certain equipment systems furnished. All gauges shall be of the seamless bourdon tube type, with tubes constructed of copper-alloy or stainless steel. Wearing surfaces of the movement shall be of dissimilar metals. Gauges shall be liquid filled to damper pulsation and vibration and also provide flooded lubrication of the mechanism. Gauges shall be equipped with a rear blowout panel. Gauge housing shall be of corrosion resistant material, such as phenolic, cast aluminum, or stainless steel. Each case shall be vented for automatic atmospheric compensation. Gauges shall have a 4-1/2” face with black letter on white background. Gauge accuracy shall be ±1/2% of full scale. Gauges shall have 1/2” NPT process connection. Gauge movement shall be removable for service and calibration. Pressure gauges shall be Ashcroft Model 1279 or equal.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION 3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION Piping shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings. Pipe shall fit accurately to the measurements established by the CONTRACTOR and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Piping shall be run parallel to the walls of the structure, unless otherwise shown, and at the elevations indicated. Pipe jointing shall be performed in compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

A. Ductile Iron Pipe. Joints in flanged piping shall be brought to exact alignment, and all gaskets, bolts and studs inserted in their proper location. Bolts and studs shall be uniformly tightened around joints. Where stud bolts are used, the bolts shall be uniformly centered in the connections and equal pressure applied to each of the studs.

Mechanical joints shall be made in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations regarding cleanliness of the joint surfaces, lubrication, tolerances, bolt torques and similar requirements.

1. The CONTRACTOR shall inspect each coupling to insure that there are no damaged portions of

the coupling. Particular attention should be paid to the sealing pad/sealing plate area. Before


installation of the couplings, each coupling shall be thoroughly cleaned of any foreign substance, which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all times thereafter. In no case shall the deflection in the joint between pipe ends exceed the maximum deflection recommended by the manufacturer. No joint shall be misfit any amount that will be detrimental to the strength and water tightness of the finished joint. The couplings shall be assembled and installed in conformity with the recommendation and instruction of the manufacturer. Wrenches used shall be of type and size recommended by the manufacturer. Bolts (or studs) shall be tightened so as to secure uniform gasket compression between the coupling and the body of the pipe with all bolts (or studs) tightened approximately the same amount. Final tightening shall be by hand (no air impact wrenches) and is complete when the coupling is in uniform contact around the circumference of the pipe.

3.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers and supports shall be adequate to maintain the pipe lines, apparatus, and equipment in proper position and alignment under all operating conditions. Install hangers and supports for piping as shown, or, if not shown, at intervals not to exceed 8’, and at all fittings, valves, and specials.

B. Hangers and supports shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, using inserts for anchor bolts, rated for the loads imposed. Hangers and supports shall be of standard design where possible, and be best suited for the service required, as approved by the ENGINEER.

3.03 SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. Piping specialties shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.04 PIPE TAPS

A. Pipe and fittings shall be tapped for gauge connections, air release valves, flow switches, and other connections as shown on the Drawings. Taps shall be in accordance with the pipe manufacturer’s recommendations. In the event that direct tapping of the pipe wall is not feasible, a tapping saddle shall be utilized in making the connection. Taps shall be made in fittings utilizing bosses whenever possible.

3.05 GAUGE INSTALLATION

A. Drill and tap pipe as required for gauge installation. New gauges shall be installed with gauge cocks and snubbers. Calibrate new gauges prior to start-up. Provide certification of calibration.


A. Leak Testing 1. Hydrostatic pressure test: 150 psig for 2 hours, unless noted otherwise. Pipe system must sustain

pressure for entire test period with no observed leaking. All air must be expelled from piping prior to testing.

2. Provide any taps, and equipment necessary to conduct the test. 3. Any defective pipe segments, fittings or accessories shall be replaced and the testing repeated

until results are satisfactory to the ENGINEER.



SECTION 15140

SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers supports and anchors and applies to and forms a part of each of the following sections of Division 15:

Section 15410 PLUMBING PIPING Section 15500 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

B. Supports and anchors shall be in accordance with this and other applicable sections of these

specifications and the requirements of Section 15020 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS and Section 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

C. Install pipe hangers and supports as specified in this Section and/or indicated on the Drawings,

conforming to manufacturer's standardization society Specification SP-58. PART 2: PRODUCTS: 2.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support piping from structure with adjustable hangers: 1. For cast iron, steel and plastic piping 2" and smaller: Anvil Fig. 269, or PHD Fig. 180. 2. For copper tubing 2" and smaller: Anvil Fig. CT-269, PHD Fig. 182 3. For copper tubing 2-1/2" and larger: Anvil Fig. CT-65, PHD Fig. 442

PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Insulated pipe supports should be provided at hanger, support, and guide locations on pipe requiring

insulation. The insert should consist of either Hydrous Calcium Silicate or Polyisocyanurate Foam insulation (Urethane) encircling the entire circumference of the pipe with a 360 degree PVC (1.524 mm thick) or galvanized steel jacket and installed during the installation of the piping system

B. Locate hangers and supports at changes in direction and at concentrated loads. Hanger design shall permit vertical adjustment and lateral movement to allow pipe expansion. 1. Three (3) or more pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers using two (2) clevis hangers and a

capped pipe cross member. a. Isolate copper pipe from bearing on the cross member with an electrically-insulating material. b. Where indicated, trapeze hangers shall be "Unistrut", or equal, double channel with drop rods and

double nuts. Where pipes are indicated to be supported from the underside of trapeze hangers, provide "Unistrut", or equal, speed clamps.

15140-1 Supports and Anchors T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

2. Support horizontal cast iron pipe at every joint and sway brace to prevent shear. 3. Support horizontal plastic (PVC, CPVC, etc.) at 32” intervals. 4. Support horizontal copper tubing as follows:

Nom. Tubing Size Rod Diameter Maximum Spacing

Up to l-l/4" l-l/2" 2" 2-l/2" 3" 4"

3/8" 3/8" 3/8" l/2" l/2" 5/8"

6 Ft. 8 Ft. 9 Ft. 9 Ft. 10 Ft. 15 Ft.

5. Support horizontal steel piping as follows:

Maximum Pipe Size

Rod Diameter Support Spacing

Up to l-l/4" l-l/2" & 2" 2-l/2" & 3"

3/8" l/2" l/2"

8 Ft. 8 Ft. 10 Ft.

6. Hot piping services 140 degees F. and less may bear directly on the hangers. 7. Hangers for cold piping services shall encompass and bear on the insulation covering. 8. Support pipe hangers from structure using appropriately secured attachments. 9. In reinforced concrete structures, support pipe hangers from concrete as follows:

a. Loads to 400 pounds: Light weight concrete inserts, Grinnell Figure 285, Elcen Figure 86, Fee and Mason Figure 2570.

b. Loads 400 to 1430 pounds: Universal concrete insert, Grinnell Figures 282, Elcen Figure 64, Fee and Mason Figure 2570.

c. Set inserts in concrete forms, obtain approval of their locations in ample time to permit pouring of concrete as scheduled; provide reinforcing rods for pipe sizes over 3".

d. In areas where concrete slab will form finished ceiling, take care to have inserts finish flush with concrete slab surface and to make neat appearance.

10. Hanging from one pipe to another is prohibited. 11. Support horizontal refrigerant hot gas piping with vibration absorbing neoprene hanger pads

between pipe and hanger. 3.02 ANCHORS

A. Anchor pipes where indicated on the drawings using steel collars fitted with lugs and bolts.

Attachment in a manner detrimental to the building structure is prohibited. 3.03 STEEL SUPPORTS

A. Provide all steel supports required for the mechanical equipment to be furnished under this Division, except where otherwise indicated.


15140-2 Supports and Anchors T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15170

MOTORS PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers motors and applies to and forms a part of each section of the Division l5 specifications in which electric motors are required for motor driven equipment.

B. Motors shall be in accordance with this and other applicable sections of these specifications and the requirements of Section 15020- MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS and Section 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

PART 2: PRODUCTS: 2.01 MOTORS - STANDARD

A. Furnish electric motors as required for each motor driven unit. All motors shall conform with applicable NEMA, IEEE and ANSI Standards and shall bear the manufacturer's nameplate indicating the operating characteristics.

1. Motors shall be General Electric, Marathon, Westinghouse, Gould, or approved equal. 2. All motors shall be provided with ball or roller bearings complete with grease cups. Motors

shall be mounted on sliding cast iron bases as required. 3. Each motor shall have sufficient capacity to start and operate the machine it drives without

exceeding the motor nameplate rating at the specified speed including all V-belt and/or drive and coupling losses. Where V-belt drives are employed, the motor horsepower nameplate ratings shall not be less than 107 percent of the driven unit brake horsepower requirements.

4. All centrifugal pump motors shall be sized so as to be non-overloading throughout the flow range of the required pump impeller size.

5. Each motor shall have a 1.15 service factor rating. 6. Motors shall be rated for continuous duty at 100 percent of rated capacity. Temperature rise

shall be based on an ambient temperature of 40 degrees centigrade. 7. Single phase motors shall be wound for l20 volts or as specified, 60 cycle alternating current.

Generally motors 1/2 horsepower and under shall be single phase. All such motors shall have integral thermal overload protection.

8. Motors which require classification for use in hazardous locations shall be labeled for their appropriate use.

B. The horsepower of each motor specified, scheduled or indicated on the drawings is the basis for the

electrical feeder size indicated on the electrical drawings. If the actual horsepower for any equipment proposed to be furnished differs from that specified or shown on the Drawings, the difference shall be referred to the General Contractor for coordinating electrical changes before installation.

15170-1 Motors T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

2.02 MOTORS – HIGH EFFICIENCY

A. The motor efficiency shall be determined in compliance with NEMA MG1-12.53a. The motor nameplate shall have an efficiency index letter stamped on it in compliance with NEMA MG1-12.53b letter designation. Motors shall be rated “NEMA Premium” at a minimum and shall be consistent with all applicable EPA and EPACT requirements.

B. Motors greater than ½ HP shall be 480V, 3 phase, 60 Hz and be in accordance with latest NEMA &

UL Standards unless otherwise noted.

C. All windings shall be copper. Aluminum windings are not acceptable.

D. All motors shall be fan cooled 1800 RPM unless otherwise notes.

E. All motors designated as TEFC, including conduit boxes, shall be watertight and dust- tight.

F. Class “F” insulation with a “B” temperature rise shall be standard. The motor shall have a 1.0 S.F. at Class B temperature rise and a 1.15 S.F. at Class F temperature rise. (1.0 S.F. on variable frequency driver operation).The insulation shall be non-hydroscopic and provide 1600V withstand per NEMA MG1, Part 31, for VFD operation.

PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 MOTOR STARTERS

A. All motor starters will be furnished under Division 16 - ELECTRICAL, unless otherwise specified.


15170-2 Motors T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15185

ELECTRICAL PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers electrical work and equipment and applies to and forms a part of each of the following sections of Division l5:

Section 15400 PLUMBING Section 15500 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 15850 AIR HANDLING Section 15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION

B. Electrical work and equipment shall be in accordance with this and other applicable sections of

these specifications and the requirements of Section 15020 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS and Section 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

1.02 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. All motor starters, starting switches and disconnects will be furnished and installed under Division l6 for all motors furnished and installed under Division l5 unless specified or as an integral part of the equipment.

B. All electrical power wiring will be furnished and installed under Division l6 unless specifically

described as a part of the installation under Division l5.

C. Electrical control wiring furnished and installed under Division l5 shall conform to the requirements of Division l6.

1.03 TESTING AGENCY CERTIFICATION

A. All electrical equipment furnished under this Section shall be labeled by a testing agency that is recognized by the State of Minnesota Board of Electricity.

B. The equipment shall be constructed in accordance with the testing agency standard(s) that applies to the approved label.

C. The testing agency label shall apply to the completed assembly. Equipment that utilizes labeled components but does not have a label for the completed assembly is not acceptable.

D. The following testing agency labels are acceptable: 1. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL):

a. UL508 - Industrial Control Equipment 2. Others as approved by the State Board of Electricity.

15185-1 Electrical T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station



15185-2 Electrical T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15190

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers pipe coding and equipment labeling and applies to and forms a part of each section of the Division l5 specifications under which piping and equipment are installed.

B. Identification shall be in accordance with this and other applicable sections of these specifications

and the requirements of Section 15020 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS and Section 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit valve lists for Owner approval. PART 2: PRODUCTS: 2.01 PIPE MARKERS

A. Pipe markers shall be Seton Set Mark, Brady Perma-Code, or approved equal, one-piece preprinted pressure sensitive markers and tapes and shall be in accordance with ANSI A13.1-1981 Standard adopted by OSHA.

B. Green bands (backgrounds) are required for safe contents, yellow bands for hazardous contents,

blue bands for low hazard contents and red bands for fire quenching contents.

C. The width of the color band or marker and the size of legend letters shall be as follows:

O.D. of Pipe Legend and Covering Marker Width Letter Size

3/4" to 1-1/4” 8" 1/2" 1-1/2" to 2” 8" 3/4" 2-1/2" to 6” 12" 1-l/4"

D. Arrows shall be black with background color same as color banding. A single arrow shall indicate

direction of flow and a double arrow shall indicate reversible flow.

E. Legends and background and letter colors:

15190-1 Mechanical Identification T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

Pipe Contents & Title

Background

Letters

Cold Water Hot Water Drain Vent Waste LP Gas

Green Yellow Green Yellow Yellow Yellow

White Black White Black Black Black

2.02 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve tags shall be Seton, Brady, or approved equal, 1-1/2" diameter, solid plastic with heat stamped identifying service and number. Background and letter colors for each service shall be the same as listed in paragraph E above. Valve tag fasteners shall be No. 6 brass bead chains, 4-1/2" in length, with locking link.

2.03 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND THERMOSTATS

A. Provide all equipment and thermostats with an engraved permanent plastic label mounted on the wall at the thermostat and labeled equipment number being served, temperature set point and “Heating” or “Cooling” as applicable. Confirm all labeling to be consistent with Owner designations prior to installation.

PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Air handling units, fans, boilers and pumps shall be identified by service name and number either with permanent pre-manufactured 2" wide engraved plastic tags or by stenciling with 2" high black letters on contrasting color background.

B. Identification locations shall be as directed by the Owner's representative.

3.02 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. All new piping inside the building shall be identified with pipe markers after pipe has been installed.

B. Pipe markers shall be applied to pipes adjacent to both sides of partitions and above ground floors, at branch takeoffs adjacent to valves, at connections to equipment and 3O feet on center for straight lengths of pipe.

C. At each color band location, a title showing the pipe contents and an arrow showing direction of

flow shall be applied.

15190-2 Mechancial Identification T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

D. Where titles and color bands match color of pipe, provide white background (black where color

is white) extending at least three (3) inches around all bands and title.

E. Titles and arrows shall be prominently displayed adjacent to color coding and shall be clearly visible from operating positions, especially those adjacent to control valves.

3.03 VALVE TAGGING

A. Permanent pre-manufactured valve tags shall be chained to all shut-off valves furnished under

the Work, except to valves on heating piping at fin tube radiation and cabinet unit heaters, inside the enclosure of factory manufactured equipment and on plumbing fixture stops.

B. All valves shall be sequentially numbered. Each tag shall identify the service and sequence number.

C. Two (2) 8-1/2" x 11" typed schedules listing all tagged valves in the building shall be prepared.

One list shall tabulate valves in numerical sequence and show valve location, service and area served. The second list shall tabulate room numbers in sequence and show valve number and valve function in each room.



THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK


SECTION 15196

FACILITY LIQUEFIED-PETROLEUM GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Storage containers. 7. Transport truck unloading facility specialties. 8. Pumps. 9. Vaporizers.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 1. For Piping Containing Only Vapor:

a. Piping and Valves: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated.

B. LPG System Pressure within Buildings: One pressure range. 0.5 psig or less

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for LPG piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For facility LPG piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For LPG piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.

15196-1 Facility Liquified-Petroleum Gas Piping T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedules 40 and 80, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and

threaded ends. 4. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy,

adhesive, and PE. a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

B. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. OmegaFlex, Inc. b. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Parflex Division. c. Titeflex. d. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.

2. Tubing: ASTM A 240/A 240M, corrugated, Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Coating: PE with flame retardant.

a. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1) Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

4. Fittings: Copper-alloy mechanical fittings with ends made to fit and listed for use with corrugated stainless-steel tubing and capable of metal-to-metal seal without gaskets. Include brazing socket or threaded ends complying with ASME B1.20.1.

5. Striker Plates: Steel, designed to protect tubing from penetrations. 6. Manifolds: Malleable iron or steel with factory-applied protective coating. Threaded

connections shall comply with ASME B1.20.1 for pipe inlet and corrugated tubing outlets. 7. Operating-Pressure Rating: 5 psig (34.5 kPa).


http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4535&mf=95&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456806893&mf=95&src=wd




2.02 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Piping Joints: 1. Approved for LPG service. 2. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 3. Minimum working pressure of 250 psig and 250 deg F operating temperature. 4. Threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable of minimum

3/4-inch misalignment. 5. Maximum 36-inch length for liquid LPG lines.

B. Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm.)

C. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41. 1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

D. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 3. Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig (862 kPa).

E. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.

2.03 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for LPG.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.


2.04 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply with ASME B16.33 and UL 842. 1. CWP Rating: 250 psig 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Socket ends for brazed joints. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing by CSA or agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and

smaller. 6. Valves 1-1/4 inch and larger shall be suitable for LPG service, with "WOG" indicated on

valve body.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Vapor Service: Comply with ASME B16.33. 1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for

valves 1 inch and smaller. 6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inch to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked

on valve body.

C. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated. 8. Listing: Valves NPS 1 (DN 25) and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.










b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

E. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded or socket as indicated. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 8. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

F. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast-iron, two-section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches (125 mm) in

diameter. 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Includee tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head

and with stem of length required to operate valve.

2.05 PRESSURE REGULATORS

A. General Requirements: 1. Single stage and suitable for LPG. 2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. 3. Elevation compensator. 4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.

B. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.









1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. American Meter Company. b. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. c. Maxitrol Company. d. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.

3. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 4. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 5. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 6. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve

port. 7. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 8. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 9. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 10. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream and not exceed 150

percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 11. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 12. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping. 13. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 10 psig.

2.06 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Jomar International Ltd. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Wilkins; a Zurn company.

2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F . c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.07 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.












PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Section 02300 "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.02 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 58 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for installation and purging of LPG piping.

B. Install underground, LPG piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Section 02300 "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

C. If LPG piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit.

D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating: 1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

F. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator.

3.03 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of LPG piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.


H. Install LPG piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

N. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

O. Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

P. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

Q. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

R. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

S. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment.

T. Do not use LPG piping as grounding electrode.

U. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

V. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator.

W. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

3.04 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.


3.05 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: 1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

3.06 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Install seismic restraints on piping.

B. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches (2438 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

C. Install hangers for horizontal, corrugated stainless-steel tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 72 inches (1830 mm); minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 3/4 and Larger: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod, 3/8 inch.

3.07 CONNECTIONS

A. Coordinate piping installations and specialty arrangements with schematics on Drawings. If Drawings are explicit enough, these requirements may be reduced or omitted.

B. Delete first two paragraphs below if utility makes connection to its gas main, or retain one of two paragraphs and revise to suit Project.

C. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

D. Install LPG piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

E. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.

F. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 36 inches of each gas-fired appliances and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.


G. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.08 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.


A. Test, inspect, and purge LPG according to NFPA 58 and the International Fuel Gas Code and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. See Section 01400 "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Section 01700 "Execution Requirements" for requirements for correcting the Work.

C. LPG piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.10 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Piping sizes are limited to maximum NPS 2.

B. Underground LPG vapor piping shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings

with protective coating for steel piping.

C. Aboveground LPG vapor piping shall be one of the following: 1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

D. Indicate extent of containment conduit on Drawings. Containment conduit is required for piping with insufficient depth of bury.

E. Containment Conduit: Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG (3.45 kPa)

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints..

C. Underground, below building, piping shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

D. Indicate extent of containment conduit on Drawings. Containment conduit is required for piping under buildings.


E. Containment Conduit: Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

F. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

C. Underground, below building, piping shall be the following: 1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

D. Indicate extent of containment conduit on Drawings. Containment conduit is required for piping under buildings.

E. Containment Conduit: Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

F. Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.13 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gas mains and listed by an NRTL.

B. Underground Vapor Piping: Bronze plug valve.

3.14 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Valves for pipe NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.

B. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 3. Bronze plug valve.

C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be[ one of] the following: 1. One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim. 2. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.


3. Bronze plug valve.



SECTION 15250

MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Work required under this Section of the specifications consists of performing labor and furnishing all materials for thermally insulating the mechanical work installed in each of the following sections of Division 15:

Section 15400 PLUMBING Section 15500 HEATING, VENTILATING and AIR CONDITIONING Section 15850 AIR HANDLING

B. Insulation work shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 15020 - MECHANICAL

GENERAL PROVISIONS. 1.02 STANDARDS

A. All insulation work shall be performed by skilled, competent workmen familiar with this type of work.

B. All insulation shall present a neat, finished and workmanlike appearance.

PART 2: PRODUCTS: 2.01 GENERAL

A. Insulation shall be Owens-Corning, Schuller, Knauf, Armstrong, or approved equal.

B. All insulating materials shall have fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested as a composite product by procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, and UL 723 not exceeding a flame spread rating of 25 and a smoke developed rating of 50 including adhesives.

C. Insulation accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tapes and glass cloth shall have the same

component rating as listed above. 2.02 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

A. All service hot and cold water piping shall be insulated with one or two-piece molded glass fiber pipe insulation, 2.5 lb./cu.ft. density with fire retardant, self-sealing, vapor barrier all-service jacket.

B. Insulation thickness shall be as follows:

1. Cold water piping.

Pipe Size Insulation Thickness

15250-1 Mechanical Insulation T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

Runouts up to 2" (up to 12 ft. long) 3/4" 1" and smaller 3/4" 1-1/4" and larger 1"

2. Hot and Tempered water piping:

Pipe Size Insulation Thickness 140 degrees F. and Less

Runouts up to 2" (up to l2 ft. long) 3/4" 2" and smaller 1" 2-1/2" and larger 1"

C. Fittings shall be insulated with precut fiberglass pipe insulation covered with Zeston, Manville,

Proto, or approved equal, PVC fitting covers.

D. All piping, insulation and fittings shall be painted. Refer to Specification Section 09900 – PAINTING.

2.03 AIR DUCT INSULATION

A. All outside air ducts, plenums and combustion air ducts, and exhaust air ducts shall be externally insulated with rigid fiber glass board, 2" thick, 1-1/2 lb./cu. ft. density having vapor barrier jacket of foil-scrim-kraft (FSK) with 2" tab.

PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Application

1. Insulation shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations, unless otherwise specified.

B. Insulation Protection Shields

1. Provide insulation protecting sheet metal shields under the 1/3 periphery of the insulated 1-1/4"

and larger piping at hanger bearing points. Shields shall be 9" long x 20 gauge for pipes 3" and smaller and 12" long x 16 gauge for pipes 4" and larger.

C. Hot and Tempered Water Piping with Glass Fiber Insulation:

1. Pipe: Butt all side and end joints tightly and apply a brush coat of fire retardant lagging adhesive

to all laps and joint strips. Seal laps, pulling jacketing tight and smooth. Self sealing laps shall be secured according to manufacturer's published recommendations. Open ends of pipe insulation shall be neatly stopped off and tapered down with insulating cement and covered with canvas embedded into a wet coat of fire retardant lagging adhesive.


2. Fittings: All fittings shall be insulated with segments of pre-molded glass fiber pipe insulation or with compressed flexible glass fiber secured in place with l8 gauge galvanized soft wire. Cover all fitting insulation with white plastic fitting covers. Valves, etc.: All valve bodies, strainers and flanges shall be insulated as specified for fittings.

D. Cold Water Piping with Glass Fiber Insulation:

1. Pipe: Butt all side and end joints tightly and apply a brush coat of fire retardant lagging adhesive

to all laps and joint strips. Seal laps, pulling jacketing tight and smooth. Ends of pipe insulation shall be sealed with a fire retardant vapor barrier coating at all fittings and valves, and at intervals of 2l feet on continuous runs of pipe. Self sealing laps shall be secured according to manufacturer's published recommendations.

2. Insulation, vapor barrier and covering shall be continuous through all chilled water pipe

supports and pipe sleeves. High density inserts, the same thickness as adjacent insulation, shall be installed at pipe supports where the density of the insulation is not sufficient to support the full pipe. Inserts shall be l8O degrees and not less than the length of the protection shields.

3. Fittings: All fittings shall be insulated with molded fiberglass fittings or with compressed

flexible glass fiber secured in place with l8 gauge galvanized soft wire. All thicknesses to be equal to that of adjoining pipe covering. Finish with a smooth coat of mineral fiber cement. When dry, cover with glass cloth and size with 2 coats of vapor barrier mastic.

4. Valves, etc.: All valve bodies, strainers and flanges shall be insulated as specified for fittings.

3.02 EQUIPMENT INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Application:

1. Insulation shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s published recommendations, unless otherwise specified.

3.03 DUCTWORK THERMAL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Application:

1. Insulation shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations, unless otherwise specified.

B. Exhaust/ Intake Air Duct Insulation:

1. Apply insulation to all exhaust air and intake air ducts from outside air outlets to intakes.

2. Secure insulation to metal with welded pins and mechanical fasteners on not over l8" centers

leaving no voids at edges. Seal all butt joints with 3" wide joint sealing tape and seal all corner joints with 4" tape. Seal over pin clips with tape patches.


SECTION 15400


PLUMBING

PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Work required under this Section of the Specifications consists of performing all labor and furnishing all material, supplies, fixtures and equipment including minor items obviously necessary for complete and functioning plumbing systems as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.

B. Plumbing work shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section l5020 - MECHANICAL

GENERAL PROVISIONS and Section l5050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

C. The Work shall consist of the following:

1. Waste and vent piping system including piping, floor drains, cleanouts, and connections to all plumbing fixtures, equipment and to the site connections.

2. Service cold and hot water piping system including isolation valves, water heaters, hose bibbs,

connections to all plumbing fixtures and equipment, including backflow preventers, sprinkler heads and connection to the water main inside the building.

3. Insulating all exposed piping.

4. Emergency shower/ eyewash stations including trim.

5. Drain piping with connections to the water heater.

D. This Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and making final connections to all building

services including water and sanitary sewer. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS


Section 15410 PLUMBING PIPING Section 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES Section 15450 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

1.03 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE

A. Insulation:

1. Cold and hot water piping shall be insulated as specified in Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION.

15400-1 Plumbing T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

1.04 STANDARDS

A. This Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the Minnesota Plumbing Code Chapter 4715. B. All piping shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with the provisions of Section 01300 - SUBMITTALS.

B. Within 30 calendar days of Contract Award, submit a complete list of materials, fixtures and equipment proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section.

C. Submit shop drawings of the following:

1. Tempering Valve 2. Eye/ Face Wash 3. Drench Shower/ Eyewash 4. Hose Bibb 5. Service Sink 6. Water Heater 7. Fire Sprinkler Accessories. 8. Floor Drains 9. Cleanouts



15400-1 Plumbing T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15410

PLUMBING PIPING PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers plumbing piping and applies to and forms a part of Division l5, Section l54OO - PLUMBING.

B. Plumbing piping shall be in accordance with this section of these specifications and the

requirements of Section 15020 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS and Section 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

1.02 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install pipe and fittings of type and material specified in this Section and as shown on the Drawings and required to connect all fixtures and equipment.

B. Make equipment connections with unions for quick easy disconnect and located to allow equipment

removal without dismantling piping.

C. Furnish and install all valves required to isolate fixtures, equipment and segments of each piping system as specified in this Section and as shown on the Drawings.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate plumbing piping with equipment, ductwork, piping and conduit to be provided by other trades.

PART 2: PRODUCTS: 2.01 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Service Water: 1. In building above ground:

a. Provide the necessary pipe and accessories of the type and material listed below and/or

called for in these specifications. All pipe shall be new, and free from defects.

b. Schedule 8O CPVC; normal impact pressure pipe and socket type fittings, solvent cement joined for lengths not more than 35 feet. Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with screwed fittings beyond 35 feet.

B. Waste and Vent:

15410-1 Plumbing Piping T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

1. In building above ground:

a. Service weight hubless cast iron pipe and hubless cast iron drainage fittings with neoprene gasket couplings and Type 30l stainless steel corrugated gasket shield and stainless steel worm drive clamps. No hub coupling shall meet CISPI Standard #310.

b. Schedule 40 PVC piping and PVC DWV fittings conforming to ASTM D2665 with solvent

weld fittings.

C. Drains: 1. Inside building above ground:

a. Type M hard drawn copper tubing and wrought copper solder fittings joined using 50-50

solder. 2.02 UNIONS

A. Unions shall be galvanized malleable iron for galvanized piping, ground joint on black steel pipe and ground joint solder type on copper tubing and piping and PVC or CPVC socket welded type for PVC and CPVC piping.

B. Provide-dielectric unions between dissimilar pipe materials. Dielectric union shall be EPCO or

equal.

C. Schedule 8O CPVC Piping: 1. 3” and smaller: Schedule 80 CPVC socket union, EPDM O-ring, 2,000 PSI @ 73° F, 210° F

max. service temp., Conforming to ASTM F1970, NSF Std. 14 and 61.

D. Galvanized Steel Piping: 1. 2" and smaller: Screwed galvanized malleable iron ground joint union, brass to iron seat, 300

PSI WOG, Grinnell 463, Stockham 694 or equal. 2.03 VALVES

A. Valves shall be Kitz, Nibco-Scott, or Milwaukee. The specified manufacturer's name and number are for identification of types, quality and construction.

B. Service Water Piping:

1. Shut-off-2” and smaller: Schedule 80 CPVC socket union, full port, EPDM O- ring, 150 PSI @ 73° F, 210° F max. service temp., Conforming to ASTM F1970, NSF Std. l4 and 6l.

PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 SERVICE PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. All service piping shall be prepared, sleeved and installed as specified in Section l5060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings and specified below:


B. Support piping as specified in Section 15140 - Supports and Anchors. 3.02 PRESSURE TESTS

A. All plumbing piping shall be pressure tested before insulating or concealing and connecting to fixtures and equipment as specified below and in Section 15050.

B. Waste and Vent Piping:

1. Test soil, waste, and vent piping tight with air pressure of 5 PSIG for a period of 15 minutes.

Final test piping after fixture installation with 1" W.C. air pressure.

C. Water Piping

1. Test service cold and hot water piping tight under 100 PSIG hydrostatic pressure for a period of two (2) hours. Do not test Schedule 80 CPVC with compressed air or other gases.

3.03 CONNECTIONS TO MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

A. Make all service and drain connections to all equipment, whether furnished under this or other Sections or by the Owner, including piping and shut-off valves on branches to and from each item of equipment from the service mains or branches. 1. This equipment will be unpacked, assembled and set by others. 2. Included in this work are connections including valves, unions, supplies, traps and drains for

equipment indicated on the drawings.

B. Make allowances for variations in service and drain connections and locations as required for the equipment actually furnished.

3.04 INSTALLATIONS SPECIFIED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

A. Alarms, transmitters and monitoring will be provided under Other Sections. 3.05 DISINFECTING

A. Test and disinfect the completed new water piping in accordance with Minnesota Department of Labor and Industry recommended procedures. Disinfect water piping system in accordance with Minnesota Rules, part 4715.2250. Test plumbing system in accordance with Minnesota Rules part 4715.2820.

B. C. Treat the piping with chlorine and flush with clean water. Open and close all affected valves during

the disinfecting period. Repeat as necessary to pass required bacteriological tests.



SECTION 15430

MECHANICAL PLUMBING SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers plumbing specialties and applies to and forms a part of Division 15, Section 15400 - PLUMBING.

B. Plumbing specialties shall be in accordance with this section of these specifications and the


1.02 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install plumbing specialties of type and material specified in this section and where shown on the Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor drains shall be Josam, Jay R. Smith, Wade Ancon or Zurn. The following descriptions are based on Josam:

1. On grade drains:

a. For unfinished areas: Josam 30000-AJ, cast iron body, bottom outlet, backwater valve,

cast iron round adjustable strainer. 2.02 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts shall be Josam, Jay R. Smith, Ancon, Wade or Zurn. 1. Floor Cleanouts:

a. Frame and cover threaded for 2" vertical adjustment, nickel bronze round frame and

cover, ABS plug. 2.03 WALL HYDRANTS

A. Wall hydrants shall be Woodford Model 67, or approved equal, freezeless anti-contamination, field testable double backflow preventer, automatic draining with 3/4" nozzle, chrome finished brass casting and wall clamp.

2.04 HOSE BIBBS

15430-1 Mechanical Plumbing Specialties T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

A. Hose bibbs shall be Woodford Model 26, or approved equal, copper-to-hose bronze body angle type, 3/4" size with field testable, double backflow preventer on hose outlet.

2.05 RELIEF VALVES

A. Relief valves for water heaters shall be Watts, or approved equal, combination pressure and temperature type sized for the capacity of the water heater and set to relieve at l25 PSIG.

2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water hammer arresters shall be Sioux Chief, Precision Plumbing Products, or approved equal, barrel- piston type water hammer arresters with hard drawn copper barrel, brass piston and AO@ rings, seal lubricant, pre-charged permanently sealed air cushion and male IPS plug. Arresters shall be designed for l50 PSI working pressure and PDI certified.

2.07 WATER PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES

A. Water pressure regulating valves shall be Cash Acme Series, Watts No. U5, or approved equal, with bronze body, aluminum spring chambers, built-in monel strainer screen and separate cleanout plug, screwed-in stainless steel body seal, heat resistant nylon reinforced Buna-N diaphragm, NPT union inlet, NPT outlet connection, supply pressure to 300 PSI, 45 PSI factory set outlet pressure field adjustable from 20 to 70 PSI.

2.08 WATER SOLENOID VALVES

A. Water solenoid valves shall be ITT General Controls S21 Series, or approved equal, normally closed brass body, pilot diaphragm, solenoid valve with Teflon K4 seat and Class F coil, 250 PSI operating pressure differential, 120 VAC.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor drains installed in new poured concrete floors are to be set in place prior to placement of concrete. Verify waterproof flashing requirements. Floor drain shall be set 1" below the floor elevation with the floor sloping toward the drain, unless otherwise noted. The sloped area shall be 2' square centered on the drain, unless otherwise noted. Coordinate with General Contractor.



SECTION 15440

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers plumbing fixtures and applies to and forms a part of Division 15, Section 15400 - PLUMBING.

B. Plumbing fixtures shall be in accordance with this section of these specifications and the


1.02 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures and trim where indicated on the Drawings by the designating "F" fixture type as specified in this Section.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM

A. Insofar as is possible, all plumbing fixtures, fittings, faucets, trim and traps shall be from a single manufacturer; American Standard, Crane, Eljer or Kohler, for vitreous china fixtures; Elkay, Just, or Republic for stainless steel fixtures.

B. Vitreous china fixtures shall be best quality, close grained and free from pores. Warped or

imperfect fixtures will not be accepted. Surfaces coming into contact with walls, floors or surface of other fixtures shall be ground true. All vitreous china fixtures shall be white unless otherwise indicated.

C. The faucets, stop valves, pop-up wastes, etc., shall be heavy cast brass, chromium plated. All

faucets to meet NSF Standard 6l, Section 9, lead free requirements. Traps shall have cleanouts and be formed of cast brass, chromium plated unless otherwise specified. Water supplies to each individual fixture shall have a shut-off valve, flexible risers and high grade chromium plated brass stop valves.

2.02 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose bibs shall be Woodford Model 26, or approved equal, copper-to-hose bronze body angle type, ¾” size with field testable, double-check backflow preventer on hose outlet.

2.03 WALL HYDRANTS A. Wall hydrants shall be Woodford Model 67, or approved equal, freezeless anti-contamination, field

testable double backflow preventer, automatic draining with ¾” nozzle, chrome finished brass casting and wall clamp.

15440-1 Plumbing Fixtures T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FIXTURE INSTALLATIONS

A. Fixtures shall be furnished, set in place and properly connected, complete in every detail, to soil, waste, vent and water pipes. Fixtures shall be rigid, set plumb, level and true.

B. Furnish and install all brackets, plates, braces and/or reinforcing angles as required to support wall

hung plumbing fixtures. Supporting members shall be rigidly attached to the walls and wall structures. On thin masonry or hollow tile walls that are to be finished on the opposite side of wall, use 3/8" brass through-bolts extending entirely through the wall with 3" cut washer on the opposite side of the wall. With fixtures drilled for exposed bolt and nut attachment, finish with chrome plated washers and chrome plated castellated nuts.

C. Particular care shall be exercised in hanging fixtures, especially lavatories, to assure rigidity and

permanence. This Contractor will be held responsible for the secure mounting of lavatories on the hangers and any breakage resulting from improper installation of any fixture.

D. Correctly faced inlets for fixtures shall be provided. Branches of soil, waste and vent pipe shall be

extended as close to fixtures as possible. Branches of vent pipes shall be graded to the trap.

E. Fixture wastes, other than water closets and trap standard fixtures, shall be connected to waste lines with an iron ferrule and threaded pipe.

F. Refer to architectural drawings for fixture mounting heights.

G. Provide 20 year white silicone caulk for vitreous china fixtures at adjoining surfaces.


15440-2 Plumbing Fixtures T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15450

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers plumbing equipment and applies to and forms a part of Division 15, Section 15400 - PLUMBING.

B. Plumbing equipment shall be in accordance with this section of these specifications and the

requirements of Section 15020 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS and Section l5050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

1.02 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install plumbing equipment where indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section.

PART 2: PRODUCTS: 2.01 EMERGENCY EYEWASH TEMPERING VALVE

A. Provide where indicated on the Drawings a Lawler Model 911 emergency shower tempering valve.

B. System shall be capable of supplying 20 gpm tempered water output, set at 75°F. Included shall be temperature gauges and cold water by-pass. System shall be a fail-safe design such that in the event of mechanical failure the unit will supply cold water only. 1. Unit shall be equipped with high temperature limit stop, integral combination strainer check

stops on inlets. 2. Provide with thermometer. 3. Unit shall be installed within a surface-mounted cabinet having a epoxy coated finish.

2.02 DRENCH SHOWER AND EYEWASH STATION

A. Combination drench shower and eyewash station shall be Speakman Model SE-695 or approved equal, epoxy coated drench shower and eye/face wash unit meeting ANSI Standards and OSHA rules and regulations including emergency sign. 1. Drench shower shall have 20 GPM ABS yellow plastic shower head, instant action stay open

chrome plated brass ball valve activated by a rigid stainless steel pull rod, 1-1/4” IPS galvanized steel piping with 9" diameter floor flange.

2. Eye/face wash shall have ABS yellow plastic receptor, twin feather flow ABS plastic heads mounted on chrome plated brass supply, push flag operated type chrome plated brass ball valve that stays open until manually closed, dual automatic water flow pressure compensation devices, dust covers, l-l/4" IPS supply, 1-1/4" IPS drain.

15450-1 Plumbing Equipment T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

2.03 TANKLESS WATER HEATER (ELECTRIC)

A. Tankless water heater shall be Bosch, or acceptable substitute. Capacity and size shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.

PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 EMERGENCY SHOWER/EYEWASH TEMPERING SYSTEM

A. Adjust the control setting to maintain 70° F, mixed water supply to emergency eyewash. 3.02 EMERGENCY SHOWER/ EYEWASH STATION INSTALLATION

A. Eyewash station shall be furnished, mounted in place and properly connected, complete in every detail. Unit shall be rigid, set plumb, level and true.

3.03 WATER HEATER

A. Install water heater as indicated in the Construction Documents.

B. Install temperature and pressure rated relief valve for water heater

C. Set water heater outlet temperature to 130° F.


15450-2 Plumbing Equipment T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15500

HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Work required under this Section of the Specifications consists of performing all labor and furnishing all material, supplies and equipment including minor items obviously necessary for complete and functioning heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) systems as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.

B. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning work shall be in accordance with the requirements of

Section l5020 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS and Section l5050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

C. The Work shall consist of the following:

1. Ventilation/exhaust systems for Miscellaneous Rooms and ancillary spaces, including air intakes and outlets, louvers, registers, ductwork and exhaust fans.

2. Testing and balancing all air systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS


Section l5850 AIR HANDLING Section l5880 AIR DISTRIBUTION

1.03 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE

A. Insulation: 1. Ductwork shall be insulated as specified in Section 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION.

1.04 STANDARDS

A. This Contractor shall comply with all requirements of the International Mechanical Code.

B. Installation of all equipment shall be in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications and written instructions of the respective equipment manufacturers.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Within 30 calendar days of Contract Award, submit a complete list of materials, fixtures and equipment proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section.

15500-1 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

C. Submit shop drawings of the following: 1. Furnace. 2. Wall louvers. 3. Sidewall exhauster. 4. Grilles, Registers and Diffusers. 5. Dampers, damper actuators. 6. Air filters.



15500-2 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15530

FURNACES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gas-fired, condensing furnaces and accessories complete with controls. 2. Air filters. 3. Air cleaners. 4. Refrigeration components.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for each of the following: 1. Furnace. 2. Thermostat. 3. Humidistat. 4. Air filter. 5. Air cleaner. 6. Refrigeration components. 7. Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Warranty.

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance data.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

15530-1 Furnaces T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace the following components of furnaces that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period: 1. Warranty Period, Commencing on Date of Substantial Completion:

a. Furnace Heat Exchanger: 10 years b. Integrated Ignition and Blower Control Circuit Board: Five years. c. Draft-Inducer Motor: Five years d. Refrigeration Compressors: 10 years. e. Evaporator and Condenser Coils: Five years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, CONDENSING

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Lennox Industries Inc.

D. General Requirements for Gas-Fired, Condensing Furnaces: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested; complying with ANSI Z21.47/CSA 2.3, "Gas-Fired Central Furnaces," and with NFPA 54.

E. Cabinet: Galvanized steel. 1. Cabinet interior around heat exchanger shall be factory-installed insulation. 2. Lift-out panels shall expose burners and all other items requiring access for maintenance. 3. Factory paint external cabinets in manufacturer's standard color. 4. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements

in ASHRAE 62.1.

F. Fan: Centrifugal, factory balanced, resilient mounted, direct drive. 1. Fan Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements

for HVAC Equipment." 2. Special Motor Features: Single speed, Premium (TM) efficiency, as defined in

Section 15058 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment," and with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

3. Special Motor Features: Multitapped, multispeed with internal thermal protection and permanent lubrication.

4. Special Motor Features: Electronically controlled motor (ECM) controlled by integrated furnace/blower control.

G. Type of Gas: Propane. 15530-2 Furnaces

T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4718&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=95&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456807627&mf=04&&mf=95&src=wd

H. Heat Exchanger: 1. Primary: Stainless steel. 2. Secondary: Stainless steel.

I. Burner: 1. Gas Valve: 100 percent safety two-stage main gas valve, main shutoff valve, pressure

regulator, safety pilot with electronic flame sensor, limit control, transformer, and combination ignition/fan timer control board.

2. Ignition: Electric pilot ignition, with hot-surface igniter or electric spark ignition.

J. Gas-Burner Safety Controls: 1. Electronic Flame Sensor: Prevents gas valve from opening until pilot flame is proven;

stops gas flow on ignition failure. 2. Flame Rollout Switch: Installed on burner box; prevents burner operation. 3. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting; de-energizes burner on

excessive bonnet temperature; automatic reset.

K. Combustion-Air Inducer: Centrifugal fan with thermally protected motor and sleeve bearings prepurges heat exchanger and vents combustion products; pressure switch prevents furnace operation if combustion-air inlet or flue outlet is blocked.

L. Furnace Controls: Solid-state board integrates ignition, heat, cooling, and fan speeds; adjustable fan-on and fan-off timing; terminals for connection to accessories.

M. Accessories: 1. Combination Combustion-Air Intake and Vent: PVC plastic fitting to combine

combustion-air inlet and vent through outside wall. 2. CPVC Plastic Vent Materials.

a. CPVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 441/F 441M. b. CPVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM F 438, socket type. c. CPVC Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493.

1) CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2) Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3) Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

3. PVC Plastic Vent Materials: a. PVC Plastic Pipe: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM D 1785. b. PVC Plastic Fittings: Schedule 40, complying with ASTM D 2466, socket type. c. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.

1) PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


3) Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice


for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

N. Capacities and Characteristics: 1. Capacity: See Furnace Schedule 2. Fuel: Propane 3. Furnace Electrical Connection:

a. Volts: 240 b. Phase: 3 phase. c. Hertz: 60 Hertz.

2.02 THERMOSTATS

A. Controls shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Controls."

B. Solid-State Thermostat: Wall-mounting, programmable, microprocessor-based unit with manual switching from heating to cooling, preferential rate control, seven-day programmability with minimum of four temperature presets per day, and battery backup protection against power failure for program settings.

C. Single-Stage, Heating-Cooling Thermostat: Adjustable, heating-cooling, wall-mounting unit with fan on-automatic selector.

D. Two-Stage, Heating-Cooling Thermostat: Adjustable, heating-cooling, wall-mounting unit with fan on-automatic selector.

E. Control Wiring: Unshielded twisted-pair cabling. 1. No. 24 AWG, 100 ohm, four pair. 2. Cable Jacket Color: Blue

2.03 AIR FILTERS

A. Washable Filters: 1-inch thick, urethane pad.

B. Disposable Filters: 1-inch thick fiberglass media with ASHRAE 52.2 MERV rating of 6 or higher in sheet metal frame.

C. Charged Media Air Filters: Sheet metal housing arranged to be ducted in return-air duct connection to furnace, generates electrostatic charge; MERV 10 rating.

D. HEPA Air Filter Units: Sheet metal housing with fan arranged to be ducted to return-air duct connection to furnace, with activated carbon prefilter, high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) disposable filter. HEPA shall be as follows: 1. Standard: UL 586, "High-Efficiency, Particulate, Air Filter Units." 2. Rating: ASHRAE 52.1, dust-spot efficiency of 65 percent; ASHRAE 52.2, 99.97 percent

efficiency to 0.03-micrometer particle size.

2.04 REFRIGERATION COMPONENTS

A. General Refrigeration Component Requirements:


1. Refrigeration compressor, coils, and specialties shall be designed to operate with CFC-free refrigerants.

2. Energy Efficiency: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, "Energy Standard for Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings."

B. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tubes mechanically expanded into aluminum fins. Comply with ARI 203/110, "Unitary Air-Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump Equipment." Match size with furnace. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet complying with ASHRAE 62.1. 1. Refrigerant Coil Enclosure: Steel, matching furnace and evaporator coil, with

access panel and flanges for integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet and galvanized sheet metal drain pan coated with black asphaltic base paint.

C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed-copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned, dried, pressurized with nitrogen, sealed, and with suction line insulated. Provide in standard lengths for installation without joints, except at equipment connections. 1. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply

with ASTM C 534, Type I, 1/2 inch thick.

D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 15183 "Refrigerant Piping."

E. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Unit: 1. Casing: Steel, finished with baked enamel, with removable panels for access to

controls, weep holes for water drainage, and mounting holes in base. Provide brass service valves, fittings, and gage ports on exterior of casing.

2. Compressor: Hermetically sealed reciprocating or scroll type.

a. Crankcase heater. b. Vibration isolation mounts for compressor. c. Compressor motor shall have thermal- and current-sensitive overload

devices, start capacitor, relay, and contactor. d. Two-speed compressor motors shall have manual-reset high-pressure switch

and automatic-reset low-pressure switch. e. Refrigerant Charge: R-410A. f. Refrigerant: R-410A.

3. Refrigerant Coil: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins, complying with ARI 203/110, and with liquid subcooler.

4. Heat-Pump Components: Reversing valve and low-temperature air cut-off thermostat.

5. Fan: Aluminum-propeller type, directly connected to motor. 6. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with integral thermal-overload protection. 7. Low Ambient Kit: Permits operation down to 45 deg F. 8. Mounting Base: Polyethylene.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems according to NFPA 54.

B. Suspended Units: Suspend from structure using threaded rods, spring hangers, and building attachments. Secure rods to unit hanger attachments. Adjust hangers so unit is level and plumb. 1. Install seismic restraints to limit movement of furnace by resisting code-required seismic

acceleration.

C. Base-Mounted Units: Secure units to substrate. Provide optional bottom closure base if required by installation conditions. 1. Anchor furnace to substrate to resist code-required seismic acceleration.

D. Controls: Install thermostats and humidistats at mounting height of 60 inches above floor.

E. Wiring Method: Install control wiring in accessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal control wiring except in unfinished spaces.

F. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on 4-inch thick, reinforced concrete base; 4 inches larger on each side than unit. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete. Coordinate anchor installation with concrete base.

G. Install ground-mounted, compressor-condenser components on polyethylene mounting base.

3.02 3.02 CONNECTIONS

A. Gas piping installation requirements are specified in Section 15196 "Facility Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect gas piping with union or flange and appliance connector valve.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

C. Vent and Outside-Air Connection, Condensing, Gas-Fired Furnaces: Connect plastic piping vent material to furnace connections and extend outdoors. Terminate vent outdoors with a cap and in an arrangement that will protect against entry of birds, insects, and dirt. 1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings

before assembly. 3. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe

and fittings according to the following:

a. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.


b. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. c. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and

PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

d. Requirements for Low-Emitting Materials: 1) CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less

when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2) PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).


4) Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

4. Slope pipe vent back to furnace or to outside terminal.

D. Connect refrigerant tubing kits to refrigerant coil in furnace and to air-cooled, compressor-condenser unit. 1. Flared Joints: Use ASME B16.26 fitting and flared ends, following procedures in

CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." 2. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise

indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

3. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

E. Complete installation and startup checks and start units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Verify proper operation of capacity control device.

G. Adjust airflow and initial temperature and humidity set points.

H. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency. Adjust heat-distribution features, including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum heating performance and system efficiency.

I. After completing installation, clean furnaces internally according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Install new filters in each furnace within 14 days after Substantial Completion.


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 15530-7 Furnaces

T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

1. Perform electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems with refrigerant and oil and test for leaks.

Repair leaks, replace lost refrigerant and oil, and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper

operation, product capability, and compliance with requirements. 4. Verify that fan wheel is rotating in the correct direction and is not vibrating or binding. 5. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

B. Verify that vibration isolation and flexible connections properly dampen vibration transmission to structure.



SECTION 15850

AIR HANDLING PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers air handling equipment and applies to and forms a part of Division 15, Section 15500 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Work required under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all air handling equipment and performing all labor to install all equipment including minor items obviously necessary for complete and functioning air handling equipment installations.



Section 15860 PACKAGED HEATING MAKE-UP AIR UNITS Section 15870 POWER VENTILATORS



15850-1 Air Handling T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station


15850-2 Air Handling T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15870

POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers power ventilators and applies to and forms a part of Division l5, Section l5500 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING.

B. Power ventilators shall be in accordance with this and other applicable sections of these

specifications and the requirements of Section l5000 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS. 1.02 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install power ventilators where indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section.

PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 SIDE WALL EXHAUSTER

A. Side Wall exhauster shall be Greenheck, Twin City Fan, ACME, Loren Cook, or approved equal, centrifugal exhauster, AMCA certified. 1. Construction of wind band shall be heavy gauge aluminum with rolled bead for added strength.

Unit construction shall allow for removal of the entire power assembly and wheel for servicing and cleaning by removing fasteners.

2. Fan wheel shall be backward curved centrifugal type with inlet venturi, statically and dynamically balanced. Blades, fins, inlet cone and back plate shall be fabricated from aluminum and securely joined together.

3. Motor and fan wheel shall be mounted on vibration isolators. 4. Motor shall be isolated from the exhaust air stream and readily accessible for maintenance.

Design shall provide contaminant free air to be taken into the motor compartment for air cooling motor.

5. Furnish low leak aluminum motorized damper or backdraft damper as scheduled. 6. Furnish solid speed controller for direct drive units as scheduled and mount on fan housing. 7. All exposed parts of units shall be finished with baked enamel paint, color by Architect.

B. Wall exhauster performance capacity and characteristics shall be as scheduled on the Drawings

15870-1 Power Ventilators T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer=s recommendations. Coordinate mounting locations. Level and align each unit.


15870-2 Power Ventilators T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15880

AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers air distribution and applies to and forms a part of Division l5, Section l5500 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING.

1.02 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Work required under this Section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all ductwork, air terminals, air devices and performing all labor to install all ductwork, air terminals, air devices including minor items obviously necessary for complete and functioning air distribution systems.



Section 15890 DUCTWORK Section 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES Section 15930 AIR TERMINAL UNITS Section 15940 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS



15880-1 Air Distribution T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station


15880-2 Air Distribution T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15890

DUCTWORK

PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers ductwork and applies to and forms a part of Division l5, Section l5880 - DISTRIBUTION.

B. Ductwork shall be in accordance with this and other applicable sections of these specifications and

the requirements of Section 15020 – MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS and Section 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

1.02 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install ductwork of type and material specified in this Section and as shown on the Drawings and required to connect all air handling equipment, air terminals and air handling system components.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate ductwork with equipment, piping and conduit to be provided by other trades. PART 2: PRODUCTS (Not Applicable): PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 DUCT ARRANGEMENT

A. Except where otherwise required by conditions of installation, install all ductwork symmetrical and/or parallel with lines of the structure. Work duct carefully into place without springing or forcing.

B. Drop and rise horizontal ducts only as necessary to clear piping, conduit, and floor and roof

structures. 3.02 DUCTWORK

A. Sheet Metal: 1. Provide all sheet metal work in conjunction with the Project air handling systems.Ductwork

shall be run as high as possible in all rooms to maintain proper headroom. Whenever possible, ducts shall be run close to beams or floor slabs above and where two or more ducts cross each other, they must be arranged in such a manner as to maintain the greatest possible clearance underneath. Do not cover any electrical junction boxes. Coordinate with the other trades to

15890-1 Ductwork T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

avoid interference with pipe runs, etc. 2. Inform the Architect/Engineer before proceeding with any concealed ductwork that will require

a ceiling to be lowered or shaft to be increased in size, etc. Should it be found impractical to install any duct of the exact sizes given, a duct of different shape but having the same resistance shall be installed.

3. Provide offsets, elbows, and transformations in ductwork as required for a complete installation. 4. Construct rectangular ducts from zinc coated sheet steel in accordance with SMACNA duct

construction standards for up to 2" W.G. static pressure including gauges and reinforcing. 5. Additional bracing where necessary shall be used and may be ordered by the Engineer

wherever, in his opinion, such additional bracing is required. 6. All duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are inside dimensions for the net free area. If ducts

are lined, the duct dimensions are dimensions for the net free area inside the lining and the outer or overall dimensions of the actual ducts shall be increased accordingly to accommodate the duct lining specified.

7. All sides, including top and bottom of all ducts and plenums shall be constructed of sheet metal and no portion of the building construction, such as walls or slabs, shall be used as part of any duct or plenum, unless indicated for on the Drawings or otherwise specified.

8. Cross break sheet metal surfaces of rectangular ducts l8 inches through 60 inches in size. 9. Curved elbows shall have a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the duct width. 10. Square turn elbows shall be fitted with turning vanes conforming to SMACNA standards. Vanes

shall be double thickness, fastened to runners and adequately braced. 11. Dampers:

a. Fit dampers and splitters in ducts with an arm outside of the duct, set in the same direction and plane of the damper and positioned by a quadrant or regulator. Blades shall not exceed 6" in width for ducts 24" and smaller and 8" in width for larger ducts.

b. Damper rods shall be 5/16" and shall be fitted with brass bracing on one end for dampers l4" and under. For rods 15" long and over, fit the rods with brass bearings on each side of duct.

c. Stiffen all dampers where necessary to prevent noise. Any damper causing any noise shall be replaced with a new one or additional stiffeners added so as to eliminate the noise.

12. Seal longitudinal and transverse joints in all supply air ducts with 3M Sealer 800, or approved equal, in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards to produce a leakage rate of not more than 5 percent.

13. Outside air, exhaust air or relief air ducts entering or leaving the building and passing over finished ceilings shall be soldered absolutely watertight for a developed horizontal distance of l5 feet from the wall or roof opening.

14. Where ductwork penetrates walls or floors of mechanical rooms, "hand" stuff the space between opening and duct with glasswool and then fire stop edges with minimum 1" depth 3M brand fire barrier caulk, UL Classified.

15. In exposed locations, trim the full perimeter of ducts penetrating walls not required to be fire dampered with 12" x 12" sheet metal angles finishing flush to the wall.

16. Whenever ducts penetrate the roof, outer walls or waterproofing of any kind, furnish and install all base flashing and all necessary counterflashing and caulking.

17. Provide watertight plenum beneath roof mounted exhaust fans and seal joints watertight with an approved sealer.

18. Coordinate with the General Contractor the location and size of all openings for ductwork that pass through walls, floors and partitions and provide duct sleeves as required.

15890-2 Ductwork T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

3.03 DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Securely attach all ductwork to the building construction in a manner to be free from vibration and swaying under operating conditions.

B. Hangers shall be galvanized strap hangers, bolted to the angle stiffeners or secured to the sides of

the duct, adequately supported from the building structure with bolts, anchors, inserts and/or clamps, as the condition requires.

C. Stays on vertical lines of ducts shall consist of galvanized steel straps anchored to the building

structure at such points as are necessary for properly supporting them and maintaining alignment.

D. Trapeze all ductwork 36" and over in width using threaded rods and steel angles or Unistrut channels. Comply with SMACNA recommendations on loading, sizes and attachments. Hanger spacing shall not exceed 4'0" centers.

E. Where vertical ducts pass through floors, securely fasten supporting angles on at least two (2) sides

of the ducts with rivets, screws, or bolts and support the assembly on the adjoining floor construction in an approved manner. Angles shall be 2" x 2" x 1/8" black iron primed with zinc chromate.

F. Hanging one duct from another is prohibited.

G. All fastenings and hardware for galvanized ductwork and sheet metal work shall be cadmium

plated. 3.04 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Make duct connections to vibration isolated fan with fabric connections. Connections shall be not less than 6" wide. Allow l" slack. Attach with bolted steel clamping bands and adhesive for airtight connection.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Coordinate mounting locations of diffusers, registers and grilles with the work of other trades.

B. Gasket and draw each device tightly to the surface to eliminate gaps and dirt streaking. Rigidly fasten ducts behind grilles, registers and diffusers.

3.06 INSTALLATIONS SPECIFIED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

A. Masonry wall, floor and roof openings will be provided under the General Construction Work.


15890-3 Ductwork T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx

SECTION 15910

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers ductwork accessories and applies to and forms a part of Division 15, Section 15880 - AIR DISTRIBUTION.

B. Ductwork accessories shall be in accordance with this section of these specifications and the


1.02 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install ductwork accessories where indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section.

PART 2: PRODUCTS: 2.01 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. Flexible connections to vibration isolated fans shall be Ventglas, or equal, double neoprene coated, fire retardant fabric.

PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 DAMPER INSTALLATIONS

B. Provide and install dampers and controls as per manufacturer’s recommendations.


15910-1 Ductwork Accessories T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15930

AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers air terminal units and applies to and forms a part of Division 15, Section 15880 - AIR DISTRIBUTION.



1.02 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install air terminal units where indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section.

PART 2: PRODUCTS: 2.01 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. Diffusers, registers and grilles shall be Price, or approved equal, Titus, or Nailor as scheduled herein based upon Price.

B. All registers shall be provided with opposed blade volume control dampers, key operated.

C. Where indicated on the Drawings, individually adjustable deflecting vanes shall be provided to

control air volume and deflect the supply air for even distribution through supply grille, register or diffuser.

D. Finishes:

1. Ceiling diffusers, registers and grilles shall have off-white baked enamel finish. PART 3: EXECUTION: (NOT USED)


15930-1 Air Terminal Units T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station


15930-2 Air Terminal Units T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15940

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 APPLICABILITY

A. This Section covers air terminal units and applies to and forms a part of Division 15, Section 15880 - AIR DISTRIBUTION.



1.02 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install air outlets and inlets where indicated on the Drawings and as specified in this Section.

PART 2: PRODUCTS: 2.01 WALL LOUVERS

A. Wall louvers shall be Ruskin Greenheck, Arrow, Cesco, or approved equal, each with formed drainable 38° blades, fixed to a 6" channel frame as scheduled with 0.081" thick extruded aluminum construction, baked enamel finish and internally mounted 1/2" expanded aluminum bird screen. Color to be as selected by Architect.

B. Louver sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Furnish and install all supplemental angle and channel iron and welded structural steel supports for supporting equipment on the building structure. Support members shall be suitably sized for each purpose and adequately braced and reinforced with provisions for vibration isolators where required.

3.02 WALL LOUVER INSTALLATIONS

A. Install wall louvers for air intake and exhaust. Coordinate louver openings to be roughed-in by General Contractor. Securely attach louvers with cadmium plated fasteners. Caulk the entire perimeter of each louver.

15940-1 Air Outlets and Inlets T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

B. Provide duct connections to louvers as applicable.


15940-2 Air Outlets and Inlets T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

SECTION 15950

HVAC CONTROLS PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 SUMMARY

A. This section includes labor, materials, equipment, skills and related services necessary to provide the automatic temperature control system as indicated in the Contract Documents.

B. Temperature control system shall be as manufactured by Johnson, Honeywell, Siemens or

acceptable substitute. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of the Contract and Division l of the Specifications apply to the work in this Section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit drawings and descriptive data in accordance with Section 01300 for all temperature control equipment including sequence of control description and diagrams.


A. Temperature controls shall be installed by a licensed temperature control contractor. PART 2: PRODUCTS: 2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Electric Operators 1. Furnish operators for motor operated dampers not furnished under other sections. 2. Operators shall be sized to operate their appropriate dampers with sufficient reserve power to

provide smooth modulating action or two-position action as specified. 3. When so specified in the sequence of operation or where more than two actuators are to be

operated on sequence to each other, provide position feedback positive positioners with adjustable start point and operating range.

4. Wherever possible, actuators shall be located out of the air stream.

B. Thermostats to be line voltage (or low voltage with transformer) with control range suitable for the specific application. Thermostats shall be factory calibrated and contain the correct steps/ stages to accomplish the sequences hereinafter specified.

15950-1 HVAC Controls T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

C. Controllers 1. Controllers shall be high capacity receiver controller, fully adjustable, direct or reverse

acting capable of accepting one to two transmitter inputs, and adjustable proportional band as specified. Direct reading replaceable scales shall be provided to match the range on input devices or separate adjustment switches with calibrated dial must be supplied.

D. Relays and Switches

1. Relays and switches shall be furnished and installed as required for the successful operation of the system. Switches shall include suitable indicating plates. Positive positioning devices shall be utilized on operators where sequencing is specified.

2.02 DAMPERS

A. Dampers shall be “low leak” construction. Frames shall be constructed of extruded aluminum (0.125” min. wall thickness). Blades shall be constructed of extruded aluminum having an airfoil shape, secured to a plated steel axels, edged with closed cell neoprene. 1. Damper sizes shall be duct sizes as scheduled and/or indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide linkages and actuators for all control dampers.

2.03 ELECTRIC WIRING

A. Power wiring shall be provided by Division 16, control wiring shall be coordinated and provided by Division l5. Control wiring shall adhere to Division 16 materials and methods.

B. Provide separate raceway systems for all wiring under this Section.

PART 3: EXECUTION: 3.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Thermostats located on cold walls shall be mounted on an insulated backplate and piping penetrations through walls are to be sealed airtight.

B. Motor operated dampers shall be furnished by Section 15950 and installed under Section

15880.

C. All thermostats and controllers shall be labeled as to function and temperature set point. 3.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

A. Attendant Area 1. Furnace/AC unit FN-01 to operate off of thermostat mounted in Attendant 103 area. 2. Exhaust Fan, EF-09, shall operate with light switch in restroom. 3. Thermostat to control fan on-off heating, cooling, and temp set point. 4. Fresh air intake to be manually adjusted to 65 CFM. 5. Radiant Heater RH02 to run off of thermostat located in Citizen Tipping area 102. 6. Radiant Heater RH02 to run off of thermostat located in Citizen Tipping Area 102.


B. Citizen Tipping Area 102 1. Radiant Heater RH02 to run off of thermostat located in Citizen Tipping area 102. 2. Exhaust Fans EF-07 & EF-08 to be controlled by manual switch in Citizen Tipping area but

near entry to attendant room door. 3. Intake Wall Louvers LV-07 & LV-08 to have 120 volt N.C. Motorized Damper at intake. 4. Normally closed motorized dampers shall open when corresponding exhaust fans are

switched on as indicated on the electrical plans. 5. Damper actuators shall be furnished and installed by Division 15. 6. All control wiring shall be coordinated and provided by Division 15, all power wiring shall

be provided by Division 16.

C. Commercial Tipping Area 100 1. Dual Radiant Heaters RH01 to run off of thermostat located in Commercial Tipping area

100. 2. EF-05 and EF-06 to be controlled by manual switch in Commercial Tipping area but near

Attendant Room 103. 3. EF-01, 02, 03, and 04 to be controlled by manual switch in Commercial Tipping area but

near Attendant Room 103. 4. Intake Wall Louvers LV-01 – LV-06 to have 120 volt N.C. Motorized Damper at intake. 5. Normally closed motorized dampers shall open when corresponding exhaust fan is switched

on as indicated on the electrical plans. 6. Damper actuators shall be furnished and installed by Division 15. 7. All control wiring shall be coordinated and provided by Division 15, all power wiring shall

be provided by Division 16.



SECTION 15990

TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PART 1: GENERAL: 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Work required under this Section of the Specifications consists of testing, adjusting and balancing the heating, ventilating and air conditioning (HVAC) systems as specified herein and shown on the Drawings.

B. Testing, adjusting and balancing work shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section

15020 - MECHANICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS.

C. The Mechanical Contractor shall retain the services of an independent certified Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) testing and balance firm specializing in balancing HVAC systems, to test, adjust and balance all of the air moving systems and hydronic heating and cooling systems installed under Division 15. The test and balance firm is subject to the approval of the Owner's Construction Representative. All work by this firm shall be done under direct supervision of a qualified heating and ventilating engineer. If requested, the tests shall be conducted in the presence of an authorized representative of the Owner.

D. Adjusting and balancing shall not begin until systems are complete, temporary filters and

strainers are removed and permanent filters installed and piping systems are cleaned, flushed and chemically treated.

E. In addition to demonstrating that the systems are capable of achieving design load point flows,

the certified test and balance shall demonstrate that the automatic control systems respond properly to load variations.

F. Test and balance firm shall include an extended warranty of 90 days, after completion of the

testing and balancing, during which time the Owners Construction Representative may request a recheck, or resetting of any outlet, supply air fan, return air fan or exhaust fan as listed in test report. The firm shall make any tests he may require during this period of time at no additional costs.



Section 15993 AIR SYSTEMS TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 1.03

1.03 STANDARDS A. Adjusting and balancing shall be performed in accordance with the latest Standards of the

National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or approved equal, and as specified in the Contract Documents.

15990-1 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 15_Mechanical\Div 15 June2015.docx Becker County Transfer Station

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. The name of the certified test and balance firm, including the name and registration number of the certified test and balance supervisor, shall be submitted for approval within 3O days after project Contract award. The selected certified test and balance firm shall submit the following: 1. Detailed procedures. 2. Agenda. 3. Report forms. 4. National project performance guaranty/Quality assurance program, or approved equal.

C. An approved copy of each of the above shall be returned to the certified test and balance firm

before adjusting and balancing is begun.

D. Upon completion of the Work, the test and balance firm shall compile the test data and prepare and submit four (4) bound copies of the complete Test and Balance Report to the Mechanical Contractor whom shall forward three (3) copies to the Owner's Construction Representative for evaluation and approval.

1.05 INSTRUMENTATION

A. The certified test and balance firm shall provide air system adjusting and balancing instrumentation such as pitot tubes, inclined gauge or U-tube manometers, magnehelic gages, velometer, direct reading hood, tachometer or rpm counter, insertion thermometers, clamp-on ammeter for motor voltage and ampere readings and other instruments required to completely analyze and balance the HVAC systems. Instrumentation shall be accurately calibrated and checked before usage.

1.06 CONDITIONS

A. The certified test and balance firm shall be accorded and provided the following: 1. Cooperation of temperature control and electrical contractors. 2. Reasonable time to complete the adjusting and balancing prior to the required completion

date. 3. Completely operable systems. 4. The right to adjust the systems. 5. Access to system components. 6. Master keys if the building is occupied. 7. Secure storage space for tools and instruments.

1.07 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The installing contractor shall be responsible for start-up and operation of systems during the adjusting and balancing process. Start-up shall include the following: 1. All equipment operable in safe and normal condition.2. Temperature control systems installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment. 4. For air systems:

a. Final filters clean and in place.


b. Duct systems and air handling units clean of debris. c. Correct fan rotation. d. Access doors closed and duct end caps in place. e. All outlets installed and connected.

1.08 GENERAL ADJUSTING AND BALANCING PROCEDURES

A. The certified test and balance firm shall cooperate with the Owner and the installing Contractor to perform the work in a manner to meet the project schedule.

B. The certified adjusting and balancing firm shall leave all systems components in proper

working order, including: 1. Replace belt guards. 2. Close access doors. 3. Close doors to electrical switch boxes. 4. Restore thermostats to specified setting.

C. Recorded data shall represent a true, actually measured, or observed condition.

D. Any abnormal conditions in the mechanical systems or conditions which prevent a proper

adjusting and balancing process shall be reported to the Owner's Construction Representative.

E. If for any reason, a system cannot be properly balanced, that fact shall be reported to the Engineer and Owner's Construction Representative.

F. Should additional balancing devices be required, the certified test and balance firm shall so

notify the installing contractor.

G. If it is determined by the certified test and balance firm that drive changes are required, the installing Contractor shall obtain and install all necessary new components.




Division 16 Electrical

SECTION 16010

ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Documents 1. Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents apply to the Work of this Section as

fully as though repeated herein. B. The work included in the project shall include the furnishing of all required labor and

materials for complete electrical systems as indicated in the scope below in Section 3.01 GENERAL inclusive of all appurtenances not specifically shown or covered by the specifications but required for complete operation of those systems as defined in the specifications. The work shall also include assisting in the testing, adjustment, start-up and troubleshooting of the electrical equipment and the training of the OWNER's operating personnel in its operation and maintenance.

C. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to assist in furnishing a complete and

fully operating system. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all details which may be necessary to properly install, adjust and place in operation the complete installation. The CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for additional costs which may result from unauthorized deviations from the contract documents.

D. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing all necessary materials required for

the entire installation of the Becker Transfer Station and Office Building in accordance with the approved plans and applicable construction standards and material specifications.

1.02 DRAWINGS

A. The plan drawings indicate the extent and general layout of the electrical systems. The drawings are drawn to the scale indicated but the drawings shall not take precedence over field measurements. Make reasonable modifications to the layout to avoid conflict with other trades.

B. The locations of equipment and the exact routing of conduit shall be verified in the field

by the CONTRACTOR. In the event it should become necessary to change the location of any work due to interference with other work, consult with the Engineer before making any changes. The CONTRACTOR shall determine and be responsible for the proper location and character of all anchor bolts, inserts, hangers, sleeves, etc. for the electrical equipment, unless specifically detailed otherwise

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for approval complete details for installation and equipment including but not limited to:

1. Incoming service equipment including meter socket, disconnect and surge

suppression 2. Switchboards, panelboards

16010-1 Electrical General Provisions T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 16_Electrical\16010-Electrical General Provisions.docx Becker County Transfer Station

3. Circuit breakers and fuses 4. Cable and conduit 5. Control panel detailed bill of materials; control schematics for all process

instrumentation wiring 6. Fire Alarm System 7. Schedule 8. Safety plan or standard CONTRACTOR procedures including Lock Out Tag Out

Test B. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be provided. The manual shall include a

complete parts list. The manuals shall be submitted with the shop drawings. C. Submittals shall include complete schematic diagrams of individual devices and system

diagrams. Manufacturer's standard "cut sheets" are not acceptable. 1.04 PERMITS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall procure all permits, bond, and licenses, except as otherwise indicated, pay all charges and fees and give all notices necessary and incident to the proper and lawful prosecution of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall also obtain and supply the OWNER all certificates required to show that the work has been performed in accordance with the building, plumbing, other authorities, the Board of Fire Underwriter’s, or such other like bodies, as the specifications may require directly or by implication.

B. When the work performed affects the property of facilities of public utility or other

corporations or of private persons, CONTRACTOR shall obtain and supply from such corporations or person if required, statements that the work has been performed satisfactorily so far as their interests are affected and that all claims therefore have been settled by the CONTRACTOR.

C. The entire installation shall comply with all local and state laws and ordinances and with

all the established codes applicable thereto. The CONTRACTOR shall take out all required permits, arrange all necessary inspections and shall pay any fees or expenses in conjunction with the work under this contract.

1.05 ALTERNATES, SUBSTITUTIONS

A. If the CONTRACTOR proposes to substitute equipment of manufacturers other than those indicated, he shall submit written requests to the Engineer at least 10 days before he submits shop drawings. Failure to furnish such an itemized list will be interpreted to mean that the CONTRACTOR agrees to provide equipment of the specified manufacturer(s). The itemized list shall include the name of the proposed manufacturer and the model or catalog number of each proposed item. In addition, the CONTRACTOR shall attach catalog data, prints, diagrams, specifications, etc., as necessary to permit the Engineer to evaluate the proposed substitution properly. Alternates are accepted on the basis of alternate manufacturers. Submitting alternates for approval in no way permits the CONTRACTOR to deviate from levels of quality or specific requirements defined in the contract documents.

B. Where the contract documents state that equipment shall be manufactured by one

specified manufacturer or equal, the CONTRACTOR may, at the CONTRACTOR’s discretion, submit proposals in the form of shop drawings for alternative equipment that is equal to that offered by the specified manufacturer. The Engineer reserves the right to


disapprove this alternative equipment if, in his opinion, it is not equal in quality, durability, appearance, strength, performance, design physical dimensions and arrangement to the equipment offered by the specified manufacturer.

C. Where CONTRACTOR proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or

detailed that is approved by the Engineer and that item requires redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring or any other part of the mechanical, electrical, or architectural layout, then such redesign, new drawings, detailing and all construction required for it shall be prepared by the Engineer at CONTRACTOR’s expense without extra compensation to the CONTRACTOR.

1.06 QUALITY

A. All work shall be installed by skilled electricians in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall be approved by the Engineer before final acceptance by the OWNER.

B. If equipment is furnished having power and control requirements other than as specified,

the CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary changes and furnish a complete set of drawings for installing the alternate equipment. The installation shall comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the National Electrical Code, local and state codes and ordinances. Where the specifications call for workmanship or materials in excess of code requirements, specifications shall take precedence. Electrical equipment and materials shall be Underwriter's Laboratory approved, where UL standards for such products exist.

C. All equipment to be installed on the project shall be new and unused. Existing equipment,

if applicable, shall be reused only after obtaining written permission from the Engineer.

1.07 GUARANTEE A. The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee the operation of the installation and that the

materials and workmanship of the equipment are free from defects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Refer to Section 16100 – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS Refer to Section 16411 – ELECTRICAL SERVICE – UNDER 600V (Transformer Provided by UTILITY) Refer to Section 16500 – LIGHTING Refer to Section 16680 – FIRE PROTECTION PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The following items shall be included in the work to be done:

1. All work shall be under the direct supervision of a master electrician and licensed CONTRACTOR.


2. Furnish permits as required for electrical construction. Pay all electrical inspection charges for the construction.

3. Wild Rice Electrical Utility will provide the new electrical service at 480V, three phase including a new pole mounted 150KVA transformer, transformer primary cabling and meter. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install meter socket and grounding per Wild Rice specification.

4. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install a new 480V, 3Phase, 4Wire, 400A NEMA 3R enclosed load center 'SLC-1' with a 250A, lockable Main Circuit Breaker, one (1) “Spare” 125A branch circuit breaker and one (1) 125A branch circuit breaker for new Transfer Station. Load Center shall be furnished with a service entrance rated surge protective device. Furnish and install a secondary feeder from transformer to new load center. Locate Load Center next to power pole. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install unistrut rack for Load Center mounting. Mark service entrance disconnect on Load Center as MAIN SERVICE DISCONNECT; TRANSFER STATION.

5. Furnish and install one (1) copperclad, steel, 1/2" x 8' ground rod for new transformer (coordinate with Wild Rice Electrical Utility and verify size and quantity of ground rods required for new service). Furnish and install a 1/0 AWG CU grounding electrode conductor from ground rod to ground lug on transformer secondary and to main Service Load Center 'SLC-1'.

6. Transfer Station Service: a. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install main panelboard ‘HVP-1’,step down

transformer ‘XF-1’, main panelboard ‘LVP-1’ and distribution for new Transfer Station.

b. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install one (1) 125A feeder from Load Center 'SLC-1' to ‘HVP-1’. Mark building disconnect on main building panelboard ‘HVP-1’: MAIN BUILDING DISCONNECT.

c. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install grounding for step down transformer ‘XF-1’. Furnish and install one (1) copperclad, steel, 1/2" x 8' ground rod for new transformer. Furnish and install a 1/0 AWG CU grounding electrode conductor from ground rod to ground lug on transformer secondary and to main Transfer Station panelboard 'LVP-1'.

d. Building sub-panelboard 'LVP-1'shall be furnished with a service entrance rated surge protection device.

7. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all electrical distribution equipment from secondary of new service transformer to Transfer Station per one line and plans to include: Main Service Disconnects, Main Service Panelboards, distribution sub-panelboards and all electrical loads fed from distribution panelboards to include lighting and receptacles.

8. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install a telephone service back board in the Transfer Station. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install a cable modem and Managed Ethernet Switch near the telephone service backboard. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with telephone and internet provider for service at the Transfer Station. CONTRACTOR shall provide underslab conduit with stub ups under the telephone backboard for telephone and internet cable service entrance cabling. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install data and telephone cabling inside the building per plans.

9. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install conduit and wiring for telephone communications from Transfer Station to Scale.

10. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install underground conduit and wiring for scale transmitter power and for scale transmitter communications from Transfer Station to Scale. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install underground conduit and wiring for scale STOP/GO truck traffic control power from Transfer Station to Scale. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install underground conduit and wiring for scale


video camera power and signal from Transfer Station to Scale. Two separate conduits are required, one for power and one for communications.

11. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install a truck scale control system to include keypad and display at truck scale, remote display at Transfer Station and dot matrix ticket printer at Transfer Station.

12. CONRACTOR shall provide a $7500 ALLOTMENT for a Desktop PC and laser printer to be installed in the Transfer Station. PC will be loaded with scale weight recording software (software supplied by Becker County).

13. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install a truck STOP/GO traffic control system at scale.

14. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install a security video camera at truck scale. 15. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install wiring and conduit for all building lighting,

convenience outlets and mechanical devices for Transfer Station. 16. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install Smoke/Fire Exhaust Control System for the

Transfer Station. The smoke/fire exhaust control system shall be a simple hardwired system that provides for thermal, smoke sensing and combustion gas notification devices wired to a simple Fire Alarm Console panel. Console shall provide aux contact closure on any alarm. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install and interlocking of aux contact to building exhaust fans.

17. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install self-regulating heat trace for each of six (6) p-traps in floor drains. Use 8 watts per foot power rating for freeze protection. Provide circuits with open and short circuit alarm. Wrap p-trap and 12 inches of drain pipe on each side of p-trap. P-traps shall be insulated after installation of heat trace. Coordinate with mechanical.

18. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with Wild Rice Electric Utility for installation of service, inspection of transformer grounding, metering and for energizing new transformer. Contact Mr. Dave Thronson at (218) 935-2517.

19. Furnish and install electrical equipment as specified in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, instructions and directions. All equipment shall be properly protected during construction. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for receiving electrical distribution equipment and storing prior to installation.

20. The CONTRACTOR shall assist in completing all connections and test operating the service equipment and controls in cooperation with the Engineer.

3.02 TOOLS

A. All special tools required for servicing equipment furnished under Division 16 shall be delivered, properly identified as to use, to the OWNER prior to acceptance of the work. Adapters, electrical and other equipment necessary for servicing and maintaining the system shall also be delivered to the OWNER in the same manner.

3.03 INSPECTION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall inspect all the electrical equipment and shall notify the Engineer in writing before the equipment is installed if the equipment appears to be deficient in fit, form or function.

3.04 CONSTRUCTION

A. The CONTRACTOR, under this portion of the contract, shall be responsible for all cutting, patching, excavation, backfill, sleeves, chases, openings, etc. for equipment specified in this portion of the contract documents or for cable and conduit and associated electrical equipment that is specified in this portion of the contract documents to serve equipment that is provided by a different portion of these documents. If the


CONTRACTOR provides equipment that has power and control requirements that are different from those specified, then that CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any additional costs incurred for engineering, construction, and all wiring changes required to make the alternate equipment perform per the intent of the contract documents.

B. All patching, cutting, etc. shall have a finish that is compatible with the final finish of the

remainder of the surface and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. C. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install temporary power for trades, if required, over the

period of construction. 3.05 FIELD TESTING

A. Field testing shall be performed in the presence of Engineer or OWNER. All deficiencies shall be repaired by CONTRACTOR. 1. Meggar or hi-pot transformer for new service grounding. 2. Test for continuity on each circuit. 3. Test for ground (5-10 ohms to ground) and check jumpers and connections for

mechanical firmness. 4. Meggar check conductors to ground on new service and on all motors prior to

energizing. 5. Check incoming phase sequence before energizing transformer. 6. Assist in I/O checkout and functional test of instrumentation and control.

3.06 INSTALLATION A. Each item shall be furnished complete and installed in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations, instructions and directions. All installed equipment shall be properly protected during subsequent construction operations.

B. Cooperate with other trades to avoid interferences in the installation of this work. Install

all equipment and systems so as not to delay progress of construction and correlate with other trades to avoid delay. Should differences of opinion develop, the Engineer's decision will be final.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall keep the premises clean and orderly during installation of this

work, remove rubbish periodically and as may be directed by the Engineer. Upon completion of this part of the project, remove all dirt, debris, tools, scaffolding, etc. used or resulting from this work.

D. All connections to utility circuitry and all modifications to, or relocation of, existing

circuitry required for proper installation of new equipment shall be coordinated with the Engineer and OWNER so as to cause a minimum of shut down time for any portion of the utility service area, as may be applicable.

E. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to coordinate with OWNER

regarding the scheduling, provision, receiving/storing and starting up of any of the Control System items in order to provide the entire installation.

3.07 INSPECTION, START-UP AND ADJUSTMENT A. The manufacturer or single source supplier of equipment included in each section shall

inspect the completed installation, make all necessary adjustments, corrections or modifications prior to start-up as authorized by the Engineer. After start-up, the


manufacturer shall make all final adjustments necessary for the intended use of the equipment and certify in writing that the equipment has been properly installed and adjusted and is operating satisfactorily.

3.08 WRITTEN REPORT A. Upon completion of the requirements dealing with installation, field testing, and

inspection, three (3) copies of a written report shall be submitted to the Engineer confirming completion of all requirements and outlining any special instructions for the operation or maintenance of the equipment in each section. This report shall be signed by the CONTRACTOR and the manufacturer or his agent.

3.09 MAINTENANCE STAFF TRAINING A. The manufacturer or single source supplier shall provide the minimum number of hours

of staff training on the proper use and maintenance of the equipment. Training shall include that required for use and maintenance of Supervisory Control PLC, HMI and networking. The hours shall not necessarily be consecutive.



SECTION 16100

BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Documents 1. Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents apply to the Work of this Section as fully

as though repeated herein.

B. Area Classification 1. Unclassified. Service entrance connection cabinet electrical equipment and installation

shall be suitable for outdoor locations and rated NEMA 3R. Indoor power distribution panels shall be rated for NEMA 1. Underground conduits shall be PVC Schedule 40; long sweep elbows up into transformer or switchboard.

2. Office, bathroom and meeting rooms: Unclassified Areas Miscellaneous Requirements a. NEMA 1 enclosures unless specifically noted otherwise. b. Exposed areas: wire in electrical metallic tubing (EMT) conduit for power, control and

lighting. Unexposed areas: wire in flexible metal conduit (FMC) or plenum rated cable in spaces above dropped ceiling where permitted by NEC.

c. Lighting fixtures may be surface or pendant mounted or flush mounted in troffer. All lighting switches and receptacles shall be flush mounted in office/crew/reception/restrooms.

3. Transfer Station: Unclassified Areas Miscellaneous Requirements a. NEMA 1 enclosures unless specifically noted otherwise. b. Exposed areas: wire in electrical metallic tubing (EMT) conduit or MC Flex (BX) for

power, control and lighting. Unexposed areas: wire in flexible metal conduit (FMC) or plenum rated cable in spaces above dropped ceiling where permitted by NEC..

c. Electrical equipment surface mounted and conduits exposed. d. All lighting fixtures surface or chain hung. All lighting switches and receptacles

surface mounted.


A. All material shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) specifications and local codes and ordinances, and shall be Underwriter's Laboratories listed, where U.L. standards for such products exist.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit complete shop drawings, instruction manuals, and record drawings.

B. After installation and before the final acceptance of the equipment, bound books containing

the record drawings in addition to complete information in connection with the assembly, operation, adjustments, maintenance and repair of all equipment, together with a detailed parts list with drawings and photographs shall be furnished.

16100-1 Basic Materials and Methods T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 16_Electrical\16100-Basic Materials and Methods.docx Becker County Transfer Station

C. The shop drawings submittal shall conform to the requirements of the contract documents.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTORS – COPPER – 600V

A. Conductors shall be of soft drawn, annealed copper, having a conductivity of not less than 98% of pure copper. Conductors shall be NEMA Class B stranded. The conductors shall conform to ICEA and NEMA standards.

B. The minimum size for power wiring shall be #12 AWG copper. The minimum size for control

wiring shall be #14 AWG copper. All conductor sizes are based on copper with type THWN, THHN, or XHHW insulation. Insulation shall be rated at not less than 75/C and suitable for wet and dry locations unless noted otherwise.

C. All power and control circuits shall be installed using wire with 600V insulation, unless wire

with a different voltage rating is indicated. The insulation, as a minimum, shall have a conductor rating of not less than 75/C in both wet and dry locations. All cable shall have the same type of insulation by the same manufacturer throughout the project. Insulation shall meet all applicable NEMA and ICEA standards.

D. All lugs shall be suitable for 75/C, minimum. E. Control cable and all power cable shall be stranded. F. Signal cable: shielded, #18 AWG, twisted pair, 300V, copper minimum. Belden 8760 or

equal. 2.02 CABLE IDENTIFICAITON

A. Each power, control and signal cable identified on the cable and conduit schedule shall be identified by plastic tags permanently attached to the cable. The tags shall be attached to each cable at each termination and wherever the cable is accessible in junction or pull boxes. Tags shall be marked with printing showing the circuit number. Tray cables shall be identified where the cables enter an enclosure.

B. Three phase power cables have a tag on each phase conductor, or may be ‘bundled’ at access

points with nylon cable ties with one tag attached. The tag shall have the cable number as shown in the cable and conduit schedule. Power cable tags shall be red. The control cable tags shall be yellow and shall have the cable number imprinted thereon.

C. The cable marking system shall be Raychem or Brady identification system, or equal.

2.03 CONDUITS, FITTINGS, BOXES AND DEVICES

A. The CONTRACTOR shall supply conduit, couplings, connectors, junction boxes, fittings and all other required items for a complete raceway system.


B. All conduits shall be a minimum of 3/4" in diameter. Conduits shall be supported a minimum of 1/2" from any machine surfaces or walls. Parallel conduit runs shall have a minimum of 1/2" between conduits. Conduits shall not be painted.

C. Rigid Steel Conduit

1. The conduit used shall be hot dipped galvanized, including the threads. Unless specified otherwise the conduit shall not be smaller than ¾ inch. The conduit shall bear the UL label. Rigid conduit shall be used in classified areas. a. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 and UL 6 b. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A c. Intermediate Metal Conduit: ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242

2. Job site threading need not be galvanized. However, job site threading shall be painted with oil base primer to prevent oxidation of the threads.

3. The use of “threadless” connectors with rigid steel conduit is not acceptable.

D. Liquidtight Flexible Conduit 1. The conduit connection to any electrical device, which may be subject to vibration, shall be

made with (LTF) Liquidtight flexible conduit. This includes all motors. 2. Those control devices or instruments not in a device box, outlet box, or electrical cabinet or

any electrical device equipped by the manufacturer with a flexible cord shall be enclosed in LTF. a. Those electrical devices equipped with flexible cords, which have sealed or “quick-

connect” connections on the devices or instruments, need not be enclosed in LTF if devices are mounted on a single machine. These cable and device assemblies must be approved for their use (UL) and environment (NEMA4/12, IP66/67) and the cables must be less than 1-3 feet in length. Approved molded cable assemblies: Brad Harrison (or equal). Use compression fittings suitable for the application for cable assembly entry into hubs, cabinets or conduits.

3. All LTF connections shall be 1-3 feet (typical) in length. This length shall allow for easy removal of those devices such as thermal elements, etc. without disconnecting the wiring.

4. LTF connections shall contain slack both in length and in any bend. Bends shall not total more than 180 degrees. Use angle connectors instead.

5. Use only LTF with fittings approved for equipment and circuit grounding. 6. For motors 25HP and larger, install an exterior bonding jumper to meet NEC Code

Requirements. 7. Minimum size – ½ inch for LTF to a final device.

E. Boxes – Cast

1. Outlet and junction boxes shall be of the weatherproof, galvanized cast, ferrous alloy type, or cast aluminum with threaded hubs for use with rigid steel conduit. The boxes shall bear the UL label and be suitable for wet locations.

2. All dedicated 120VAC outlet boxes shall have an engraved label identifying the motor number and the panelboard and circuit of the power source. Labels shall be stainless steel, brass, or engraved laminated plastic, attached with screws.

F. Boxes – Stamped Steel

1. Stamped steel boxes are allowed only where EMT conduit is permitted. 2. Stamped steel boxes shall be UL labeled.


H. Wiring Devices – Specification Grade 1. Wiring devices shall be AC quiet, NEMA specification grade, heavy duty unless otherwise

specified. All devices shall meet Federal and NEMA standards, and shall be listed by the Underwriter's Laboratories. The voltage rating shall be as required for the application. The devices shall have an ampacity of not less than 20 amps.

2. Wall plates shall be stainless steel. All switches, other than lighting switches, shall have an engraved label identifying the function of the switch and switch positions.

3. Where applicable, devices located in hazardous areas or areas where adverse conditions exist, shall meet NEMA and National Electrical Code requirements for those areas.

I. Switch Labels

1. All switches, other than lighting switches, shall have an engraved label identifying the function of the switch and switch positions. Labels shall be stainless steel, brass, or engraved laminated plastic, attached with screws.

J. Bushings

1. Plastic bushings shall be used when non-metallic cables enter or leave a conduit system.

K. EMT Conduit may be used in office, restroom areas for lighting. 2.04 PVC CONDUIT – BUILDING INTERIOR A. Schedule 80 PVC conduit shall be used inside the main process area.

2.05 PVC CONDUIT - UNDERGROUND

A. PVC conduit may be used underground. The conduit shall be supported as recommended by the manufacturer or as required by applicable modes and ordinances, whichever is the more stringent. The conduit shall be composed of high impact PVC conduit, minimum 3/4” diameter and shall be rated for 90°C wire. The conduit shall be listed for underground, and exposed applications. The PVC conduit system shall contain fittings for connecting the system to cast junction boxes and other devices as required.

B. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install copper ground conductors. The conductors shall be

continuous with no splices or joints unless permitted by the National Electrical Code. The size of the ground conductor shall be as required by the National Electrical Code or as shown on the drawings, whichever is more stringent.

C. PVC duct shall be Schedule 40 PVC duct. The duct shall bear the UL label. D. PVC duct shall be Schedule 40 PVC from elbow into vertical stub up to panel or device

outdoors. 2.06 SAFETY SWITCHES

A. NEMA 3R: Challenger's Heavy Duty Series, Cutler-Hammer Inc.'s DH, General Electric Co.'s Type TH, Square D Co.'s Heavy Duty Series, or Westinghouse Electric Corp.'s H-600; having:

1. Fuses, as indicated on drawings. 2. Fused switches equipped with fuseholders to accept only the fuses specified (UL Class J for

Motor Starter Control Panels, Class L for Main Service Disconnect). 3. 600V rating for 480V circuits.


4. Ground bus when equipment grounding conductor is included with circuit. 5. Current rating and number of poles as indicated on drawings. PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 UNDERGROUND WORK

A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all excavating, concrete work where applicable, and backfilling. The underground conduit shall be at least 24 inches below the finished grade.

B. Backfill shall be earth or sand tamped into place. The trench shall be filled to the top and the

surface restored to a finished condition. All excess earth shall be removed. C. Furnish and install Warning Tape above underground service feeder per NEC 300.5(D) (3).

3.02 CONDUIT INSTALLATION – PVC CONDUIT

A. The CONTRACTOR may use PVC conduit. The conduit system shall be fabricated using a solvent type of joining liquid to create watertight joints.

B. The conduit shall be installed not less than the code established depth. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide a copper ground conductor from the branch circuit device to the

final circuit element. The conduit systems shall be sized to accommodate the ground conductors at no change in the contract amount.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, wire and start-up equipment as required by the contract documents. The manufacturer's installation recommendations shall be observed and the completed assembly shall meet applicable code requirements.

3.04 SIGNAL CABLE CONNECTIONS

A. Where the CONTRACTOR connects signal cable or cables with low signal levels to devices, etc. the connections shall be by terminal strips with screws, etc. Where splices inside junction boxes, etc. are made the splices shall be by means of pressure type nylon insulated butt connectors. After the connection is made, the connection shall be wrapped with PVC plastic tape to form a moisture resistance connection. "Wire nuts" are unacceptable.

3.05 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall supply conduit, couplings, connectors, junction boxes, fittings and all other required items for a complete raceway system. The conduit fills indicated in the contract documents are based on copper conductors with THWN insulation suitable for 75°C insulation in both wet and dry locations. The CONTRACTOR shall resize conduits for other conductor and/or insulation systems, if approved. The conduit shall be reamed and cleaned and made free of burrs. Exposed conduit runs shall be straight and true with the building lines and elbows, bends and offsets shall be uniform and symmetrical. All conduit runs shall be installed with adequate means for drainage provided at the low points.


B. All conduits shall be securely fastened in place using steel straps, clamps, hangers, split

hangers and other commercially manufactured conduit support devices. Do not support conduits with any other type of hangers, including but not limited to spring steel clips, perforated pipe straps, etc. Remove all temporary supports at the completion of the installation. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA “Standard of Installation”. Do not fasten conduit supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment and conduit. Do not use power-actuated anchors.

C. Fabricate supports from structural steel or channel as required. Rigidly weld members or use

hexagon head bolts to present a neat appearance with strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

D. The CONTRACTOR may use ½ inch conduit between the last switch box or the last

convenience outlet box and the second to the last device. All other conduit runs shall not be smaller than ¾ inch.

E. This exclusion regarding the use of ½ inch conduit shall apply to lighting circuits rated at

120/208/240 volts and to convenience outlets rated at 120 volts 20 amps or less. All other circuits shall have conduit not smaller than ¾ inch.

3.06 CONDUCTOR INSTALLATION

A. Conductors shall be installed using industry accepted techniques as defined by Underwriter's Laboratories, National Electrical Code, NEMA, ICEA, and other applicable standards. The CONTRACTOR shall use approved pulling compound where applicable.

B. No splices shall be made in power wiring except in junction boxes. Conductors shall be

continuous from outlet to outlet. Wiring shall be terminated as required in the contract documents.

C. No splices shall be made in signal or control conductors. The wiring shall be continuous from

device to device. D. All wire and cable shall be tested for grounds and continuity before the circuit is energized.

The CONTRACTOR shall assume full responsibility for damage done to the equipment due to circuit grounds or open circuits.

3.07 MOTOR CONNECTIONS

A. Where the wiring system connects to the motor leads in the motor junction boxes, the connections shall be insulated with Raychem Type MCK, or equal, motor connection insulation kits.

B. Motor connections for inverter duty motors shall have a minimum rating of 2,000 volts.

3.08 CABLE SPLICES

A. Power cables or control circuit cables that are spliced in locations that are subject to damp or wet locations shall be spliced using 3M cast splice kits, or equal.


3.09 DEVICE MOUNTING

A. Switches and receptacles shall be mounted 48 inches (nominal) to center above the floor. Outdoors, or in areas with adverse conditions, the switches and receptacles shall be mounted in cast ferrous alloy boxes with weatherproof cast ferrous alloy cover plates.

3.10 SWITCH LABELING

A. All switches, other than lighting switches, shall include an engraved cover plate or an engraved label mounted next to the switch. Labels shall be stainless steel, brass or engraved laminated plastic.

B. Separate labels shall be mounted with anchors and screws. The use of double-back tape or

adhesive only is not acceptable.



SECTION 16411

ELECTRICAL SERVICE – UNDER 600V PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Documents 1. Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents apply to the Work of this

Section as fully as though repeated herein.

B. Wild Rice Electrical Utility will provide the new electrical service for the Becker Landfill at 480V including a new 150KVA transformer, transformer primary cabling and metering. CONTRACTOR shall install grounding and a meter socket specified by the Utility. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with Utility.

C. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all utilization equipment on the service

transformer secondary including one (1) new 480V, 400A Load Center with Lockable Main Circuit Breaker and: 1. For Transfer Station: one (1) 480Y/277V, 225A Panelboard HVP-1, one (1)

480-120/240V, 40KVA Step Down Transformer and one (1) 225A Panelboard LVP-1.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70: 2011 National Electric Code B. NEMA C. ANSI D. IEEE E. UL F. OSHA

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit complete shop drawings, instruction manuals, and record drawings to the Engineer for review, approval and forwarding to the OWNER.

B. After installation and before the final acceptance of the equipment, bound books

containing the record drawings in addition to complete information in connection with the assembly, operation, adjustments, maintenance and repair of all equipment, together with a detailed parts list with drawings and photographs shall be furnished to the Engineer for transmittal to the OWNER.

16411-1 Electrical Service – Under 600V T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 16_Electrical\16411-Electrical Service.docxBecker County Transfer Station

C. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions. D. Contract Closeout Submittals:

1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Deliver two (2) copies, covering the installed products, to the Engineer.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MAIN LOAD CENTER

A. CONTRACTOR SHALL furnish and install as produced by Square D, Siemens, GE or equal having: 1. NEMA 3R enclosure, outdoor rack mount; CONTRACTOR shall ensure a

secure mounting on rack pad per plans. CONTRACTOR shall install rack for Load Center.

2. UL label “SUITABLE FOR USE AS SERVICE EQUIPMENT ". 3. Surge Protection Device 4. 600V Rated for 480V Systems, 400A, 3Phase, 4Wire 5. 250A Main Circuit Breaker; two (2) 125A Feeder Breakers 6. 65KAIC Bus Bracing and Circuit Breaker Interrupting 7. CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install cable and conduit from transformer

secondary to Load Center.

2.02 SWITCHBOARDS AND PANELBOARDS

A. Transfer Station Distribution Panelboard HVP-1 shall be Square D I-Line or approved equal having: 1. NEMA 1G enclosure, wall mount; CONTRACTOR shall ensure a secure

mounting. CONTRACTOR shall install unistrut rack if required to support . 2. UL label SUITABLE FOR SERVICE ENTRANCE 3. Surge Protection Device 4. Feeders per Schedule 5. 600V Rated for 480V Systems, 600A, 3Phase, 4Wire 6. Lockable 125A Main Circuit Breaker with Adjustable Thermal-Magnetic

Trip 7. Feeder breakers per schedule 8. 65KAIC Bracing

B. Panelboards shall be Cutler-Hammer, Square D, GE or approved equal

1. Transfer Station Panelboard LVP-1 a. NEMA 1G enclosure, surface mount b. Feeders and breakers per Schedule c. 240V Rated for 240V Systems, 225A, 1Phase, 3Wire, 30 Space d. 175A Main Circuit Breaker e. 25KAIC Bracing


2.03 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. NEMA 3R: Challenger's Heavy Duty Series, Cutler-Hammer Inc.'s DH, General Electric Co.'s Type TH, Square D Co.'s Heavy Duty Series, or Westinghouse Electric Corp.'s H-600; having: 1. Fuses, as indicated on drawings. 2. Fused switches equipped with fuseholders to accept only the fuses specified

(UL Class J for Motor Starter Control Panels, Class L for Main Service Disconnect).

3. 600V rating for 480V circuits. 4. Lockable 5. Ground bus when equipment grounding conductor is included with circuit. 6. Current rating and number of poles as indicated on drawings.

2.04 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS

A. Distribution transformers shall be furnished and installed as required. The transformers shall be dry type suitable for indoor or outdoor service as shown on the drawings. Transformers shall have not less than two 2-1/2% full capacity above normal primary voltage and two 2-1/2% full capacity below normal primary voltage taps. Sound level may not exceed 45 dB determined in accordance with procedures outlined with NEMA and ANSI standards. The transformers shall have a kVA rating per schedule. The transformers shall have UL Class 180° C insulation.

B. Transformers shall meet NEMA Standard TP, Energy Efficient Transformer

Requirements for all dry type transformers from 15 kVA through 2,500 kVA. C. Transformers shall be constructed in accordance with NEMA and ANSI

standards. The transformers shall be finished with one coat of rust inhibiting primer and two finish coats of paint.

2.05 GROUNDING MATERIALS

A. The entire installation shall be grounded in accordance with the National Electrical Code and as otherwise detailed.

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mount main service disconnect on wall so that maximum height above the floor to the center of the operating handle does not exceed 6-1/2 feet.

B. Stencil on front cover of new main service disconnect in with white paint in

minimum 2 inch lettering, the words MAIN SERVICE DISCONNECT SLC-1; TRANSFER STATION; 3PHASE, 4WIRE, 480VOLTS.

C. Panel boards shall be mounted with the top of the panelboard at not more than 72

inches above finish floor.


D. Warning ribbons shall be installed to identify the location of service laterals per

NEC 300.5 (D).



SECTION 16500

LIGHTING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all fixtures conduit and wiring for interior and exterior lighting as required by the specifications, drawings, contract documents and in accordance with the fixture schedule.

B. No lighting fixtures shall be substituted without prior written approval. Proposed

substitutions shall be accompanied with complete engineering data including footcandle distribution curves.

C. The CONTRACTOR shall assist in starting up and testing lighting.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. The CONTRACTOR shall submit complete shop drawings, instruction manuals, and record drawings to the Engineer for review, approval and forwarding to the Owner.

B. After installation and before the final acceptance of the equipment, bound books

containing the record drawings in addition to complete information in connection with the assembly, operation, adjustments, maintenance and repair of all equipment, together with a detailed parts list with drawings and photographs shall be furnished to the Engineer for transmittal to the Owner.

C. Submit lamp list for all lamp types provided under this project and include information in

operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.01 FIXTURES

A. All fixtures shall bear the seal of the Underwriter's Laboratories (U.L.). The seal shall be for the type of area the fixture is to be located in.

B. The entire assembly shall have a power factor of not less than 0.90 at its designated

voltage. All ballasts shall be of the type where the starting current does not exceed the operating current. Ballasts shall be suitable for starting and operating at -20/F. All fluorescent fixtures shall have energy saving ballasts.

C. All fixtures shall be complete with lamps, starters, diffusers, guards, clips, retainers, etc.

in accordance with the drawings, specifications and ordinances governing the installation of the fixtures.

16500-1 Lighting T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 16_Electrical\16500-Lighting.docxBecker County Transfer Station

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL

A. Install fixtures in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and mount carefully and rigidly. The mounting of the fixtures shall be uniform in height and shall present a neat and workmanlike appearance.

B. The fixtures shall be connected into the power distribution system per the requirements of

the National Electrical Code, the manufacturer's requirements, or the contract documents, whichever is more stringent.

C. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for installation of the fixtures onto the ceiling type

specified by the architectural or electrical drawings. Any fixture supporting equipment such as chains, wires, channels, hooks or bars shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.


16500-2 Lighting T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 16_Electrical\16500-Lighting.docxBecker County Transfer Station

SECTION 16680

FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. Related Documents 1. Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents apply to the Work of this

Section as fully as though repeated herein. B. The work included in this section shall include the furnishing of all required

design, labor and materials for a complete Fire Alarm System to include: 1. For Transfer Station: monitoring devices for smoke and heat detection, COx,

NOx gases and device monitoring panel to interlock with exhaust fans. C. Verify the specific requirements such as pre-signal alarm, outside fire alarm

signal, proprietary signal system and special key boxes with applicable building codes.

D. No sprinklers will be installed.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Fire alarm signal systems shall meet the design requirements of the latest applicable codes and shall be UL Listed for its intended purpose. 1. NFPA 70: 2011 National Electric Code 2. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code

PART 2 – SUBMITTALS 2.01 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit the fire alarm shop drawings in accordance with Division 1, Section 01300 - Submittals. Include a riser diagram, sequence of operation, wire size and type, battery calculations, voltage drop calculations, a floor plan that shows all the devices, data sheets for the devices and copies of fire alarm specifications as required by applicable state codes. Plans F-101 and F-201 show the minimum requirements the Transfer Station.

B. The contractor shall provide record documents of the fire alarm installation to the

OWNER. The documents shall include all shop drawing information, the device-to-device wiring scheme, a revised floor plan showing any devices added or relocated during the construction project, final sequence of operations, final voltage drop calculations and an OWNER’s manual regarding required maintenance and testing.

16680-1 Fire Alarm Systems T:\1423 Becker Co\0008\June 8 Bid Pkg\Div 16_Electrical\16680-Fire Protection.docxBecker County Transfer Station

2.02 OPERATIONAL PLAN AND TEST

A. Confirm with the OWNER’s representative when the fire alarm and the interface to related systems will be commissioned.

B. Project Manual

1. Within the project manual, the CONTRACTOR shall include a test manual for the specific testing requirements for the fire alarm and related systems.

C. Test Manual

1. The test manual shall include test procedures to verify that the fire/life safety interface is operating correctly for the following systems: a. Fire alarm system and devices, test every device. b. Exhaust Fan activation in and reset in the Transfer Station.

D. Test Procedures

1. Each test procedure shall include a detailed description of the following items: a. Recording format b. Sequence of operations for control functions of the fire alarm system c. Test equipment required d. Test participants

E. Operation Matrix

1. Construction drawings and shop drawings shall have a sequence matrix of operation for initiating devices in Office Building. The following table is a sample:

The following parties shall sign off with date, indicating the system performed according to the required sequence of operations: Fire alarm vendor ____________________________ Date ______________ Electrical contractor __________________________ Date ______________ Fire protection contractor ______________________ Date ______________ Mechanical contractor ________________________ Date ______________ Engineer____________________________________ Date ______________

Water-flow Sprinkler tamper

Dry Pipe Hi-Low

Air

Manual Pull

Station Smoke

Detector

Duct Smoke

Detector

Circuit or Panel

Trouble

120V Loss at FACP

Alarm Annun. at FACP and PSAC x x


F. Acceptance Test

1. The final acceptance test shall be conducted in the presence of the OWNER, Engineer and fire inspector (if required). A typed NFPA 72 Certificate of Completion shall document the installation and acceptance test.

2. The Engineer shall specify that the acceptance of the fire protection system be based upon completion of the necessary testing as outlined in the state and national fire codes. All testing must be documented on certificate forms. The fire protection contractor is responsible for maintaining the equipment in service after the acceptance test, as well as minimizing impairments to the system for the remainder of the project. During remodeling or after Certificate of Occupancy or substantial completion, coordinate impairments with the OWNER's representative.

2.03 MATERIAL

A. All fire alarm equipment shall be UL listed. 1. Fire alarm systems shall be the addressable type. If the system has more than

10 smoke detectors, they shall be analog addressable type and have alarm verification set at 60 seconds.

2. All devices associated with the fire alarm system shall operate through the fire alarm main panel instead of as independent systems tied into the building fire alarm system. Examples include special releasing device controls and pre-action systems.

3. Other independent fire alarm/control systems shall report via the building fire alarm system with three common points: alarm, supervisory and trouble.

4. The fire alarm system shall have 24 hours of battery capacity even with generator backup.

B. The minimum size conductor for door holder circuits, horn and strobe circuits

shall be 14 AWG. Provide raceways or cable tray for fire alarm wiring to minimize costs over the operating life of the building. Paint raceway junction box covers red for identification.

C. Speakers are preferred over horns to better accommodate maintenance and

testing. Specify ANSI S3.41, Audible Emergency Evacuation Signal temporal code- three. Exception: Speakers are acceptable for large assembly buildings, large laboratory buildings, high rises and hospitals. Microphones are preferred on speakers for broadcasting purposes.

D. Specify CAT 30 keys for building main control panel and associated, lockable

panels. Fire alarm systems within telecommunication rooms may require a different key type.


PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.01 CONTROL PANELS

A. PROHIBITED: Wire nut connections in control panels.

B. Each control relay operated by the fire alarm system shall be supervised and within 3 feet of the device operated, in addition to being numbered and labeled.

C. Locate the fire alarm main control panel for a building in a non-public area.

Locate an annunciator at the fire department entrance to the building.

D. Specify mounting height for devices to comply with ADA and NFPA requirements.

E. The contractor shall program the fire alarm control system to operate according

to the design matrix.

F. Organize alarm and notification circuits by floor or area to accommodate troubleshooting.

G. Do not load signaling line circuits with greater than 75 percent of capacity. The

panel shall have one spare signaling line circuit or capacity for 50 additional initiating devices.

H. Notification appliance circuits shall be designed with a minimum of 20 percent

spare capacity. System performance shall include the capability to silence audible appliances without affecting visual appliance operation. It shall be either two, 2-wire systems or a 2-wire addressable system.

I. Where speakers are used, provide fire fighters handset at fire alarm annunciator

panel to allow emergency responders to communicate with building occupants. Speakers to be zoned by floor, and include general alarm conditions and temporal-code-three signal.

J. All circuits shall be Class B. Locate the end of line resistor at the last device of the circuit, and identify it on the drawings and in the field. Limit circuits to one floor or major area. Label terminal strips. Provide terminal boards in control panels.

K. Concealed initiating devices shall have remote alarm indicators that identify the

location of the devices. Locate remote indicators in public spaces such as corridors. Duct smoke detectors shall have remote indicators with test stations.

L. Provide an electrical outlet within 10 feet of the fire alarm control panel.

M. Provide adequate lighting around area where fire alarm is serviced.

N. Paint fire alarm junction box covers red.


O. Document the fire alarm address for each device, along with wire and cable identification numbers, on record drawings.

